ABB - Electrical Installation Handbook - I

Electrical installation handbook
Volume 1 Protection and

rd
3 edition control devices
1SDC008001D0203
Protection and control devices

06/05
1SDC008001D0203
Printed in Italy
Due to possible developments of standards as well as of

materials, the characteristics and dimensions specified in
this document may only be considered binding after
confirmation by ABB SACE.
ABB SACE S.p.A.

An ABB Group Company
L.V. Breakers
Via Baioni, 35
24123 Bergamo - Italy ABB SACE
Tel.: +39 035.395.111 - Telefax: +39 035.395.306-433
http://www.abb.com
Volume 1
3rd edition
June 2005
Index
Introduction ...............................................................................................................2
1 Standards
1.1 General aspects ............................................................................................. 3
1.2 IEC Standards for electrical installation ......................................................... 15
2 Protection and control devices
2.1 Circuit-breaker nameplates .......................................................................... 22
2.2 Main definitions ............................................................................................ 25
2.3 Types of releases .......................................................................................... 28
3 General characteristics
3.1 Electrical characteristics of circuit breakers ................................................... 38
3.2 Trip curves ................................................................................................... 49
3.3 Limitation curves ........................................................................................ 111
3.4 Specific let-through energy curves ............................................................. 142
3.5 Temperature derating ................................................................................. 172
3.6 Altitude derating ......................................................................................... 187
3.7 Electrical characteristics of switch disconnectors ....................................... 188
4 Protection coordination
4.1 Protection coordination .............................................................................. 194
4.2 Discrimination tables .................................................................................. 203
4.3 Back-up tables ........................................................................................... 228
First edition 2003 4.4 Coordination tables between circuit breakers and
switch disconnectors ................................................................................. 232
Second edition 2004 5 Special applications
Third edition 2005 5.1 Direct current networks .............................................................................. 236
5.2 Networks at particular frequencies; 400 Hz and 16 2/3 Hz ......................... 247
5.3 1000 Vdc and 1000 Vac networks ............................................................. 264
5.4 Automatic Transfer Switches ...................................................................... 276
6 Switchboards
Published by ABB SACE 6.1 Electrical switchboards ............................................................................... 285
via Baioni, 35 - 24123 Bergamo (Italy) 6.2 MNS switchboards ..................................................................................... 293
6.3 ArTu distribution switchboards ................................................................... 294
Annex A: Protection against short-circuit effects inside
All rights reserved low-voltage switchboards ................................................................. 297
Annex B: Temperature rise evaluation
according to IEC 60890 ...................................................................... 306
Annex C: Application examples:
Advanced protection functions with PR123/P release .................... 320
ABB SACE - Protection and control devices 1

Introduction 1 Standards
Scope and objectives
1.1 General aspects
The scope of this electrical installation handbook is to provide the designer and In each technical field, and in particular in the electrical sector, a condition
user of electrical plants with a quick reference, immediate-use working tool. sufficient (even if not necessary) for the realization of plants according to the
This is not intended to be a theoretical document, nor a technical catalogue, “status of the art” and a requirement essential to properly meet the demands
but, in addition to the latter, aims to be of help in the correct definition of of customers and of the community, is the respect of all the relevant laws and
equipment, in numerous practical installation situations. technical standards.
Therefore, a precise knowledge of the standards is the fundamental premise
The dimensioning of an electrical plant requires knowledge of different factors for a correct approach to the problems of the electrical plants which shall be
relating to, for example, installation utilities, the electrical conductors and other designed in order to guarantee that “acceptable safety level” which is never
components; this knowledge leads the design engineer to consult numerous absolute.
documents and technical catalogues. This electrical installation handbook,
however, aims to supply, in a single document, tables for the quick definition of
the main parameters of the components of an electrical plant and for the selection Juridical Standards
of the protection devices for a wide range of installations. Some application These are all the standards from which derive rules of behavior for the juridical
examples are included to aid comprehension of the selection tables. persons who are under the sovereignty of that State.
Electrical installation handbook users

Technical Standards
The electrical installation handbook is a tool which is suitable for all those who These standards are the whole of the prescriptions on the basis of which
are interested in electrical plants: useful for installers and maintenance technicians machines, apparatus, materials and the installations should be designed,
through brief yet important electrotechnical references, and for sales engineers manufactured and tested so that efficiency and function safety are ensured.
through quick reference selection tables. The technical standards, published by national and international bodies, are
circumstantially drawn up and can have legal force when this is attributed by a
Validity of the electrical installation handbook
legislative measure.
Some tables show approximate values due to the generalization of the selection
process, for example those regarding the constructional characteristics of Application fields
electrical machinery. In every case, where possible, correction factors are given Electrotechnics and Mechanics, Ergonomics
for actual conditions which may differ from the assumed ones. The tables are Telecommunications
Electronics and Safety
always drawn up conservatively, in favour of safety; for more accurate
calculations, the use of DOCWin software is recommended for the dimensioning International Body IEC ITU ISO
of electrical installations. European Body CENELEC ETSI CEN
This technical collection takes into consideration only the bodies dealing with electrical and electronic
technologies.
IEC International Electrotechnical Commission

The International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) was officially founded in
1906, with the aim of securing the international co-operation as regards
standardization and certification in electrical and electronic technologies. This
association is formed by the International Committees of over 40 countries all
over the world.
The IEC publishes international standards, technical guides and reports which
are the bases or, in any case, a reference of utmost importance for any national
and European standardization activity.
IEC Standards are generally issued in two languages: English and French.
In 1991 the IEC has ratified co-operation agreements with CENELEC (European
standardization body), for a common planning of new standardization activities
and for parallel voting on standard drafts.
2 ABB SACE - Protection and control devices ABB SACE - Protection and control devices 3
1.1 General aspects 1.1 General aspects
1 Standards 1 Standards
CENELEC European Committee for Electrotechnical Standardization “Low Voltage” Directive 73/23/CEE – 93/68/CEE
The European Committee for Electrotechnical Standardization (CENELEC) was The Low Voltage Directive refers to any electrical equipment designed for use
set up in 1973. Presently it comprises 28 countries (Austria, Belgium, Cyprus, at a rated voltage from 50 to 1000 V for alternating current and from 75 to 1500 V for
Czech Republic, Denmark, Estonia, Finland, France, Germany, Greece, Hungary, direct current.
Iceland, Ireland, Italy, Latvia, Lithuania, Luxembourg, Malta, Netherlands, Norway, In particular, it is applicable to any apparatus used for production, conversion,
Portugal, Poland, Slovakia, Slovenia, Spain, Sweden, Switzerland, United transmission, distribution and use of electrical power, such as machines,
Kingdom) and cooperates with 7 affiliates (Albania, Bosnia and Herzegovina, transformers, devices, measuring instruments, protection devices and wiring
Bulgaria, Croatia, Romania, Turkey, Ukraine) which have first maintained the materials.
national documents side by side with the CENELEC ones and then replaced The following categories are outside the scope of this Directive:
them with the Harmonized Documents (HD). • electrical equipment for use in an explosive atmosphere;
There is a difference between EN Standards and Harmonization Documents • electrical equipment for radiology and medical purposes;
(HD): while the first ones have to be accepted at any level and without additions • electrical parts for goods and passenger lifts;
or modifications in the different countries, the second ones can be amended to • electrical energy meters;
meet particular national requirements. • plugs and socket outlets for domestic use;
EN Standards are generally issued in three languages: English, French and • electric fence controllers;
German. • radio-electrical interference;
From 1991 CENELEC cooperates with the IEC to accelerate the standards • specialized electrical equipment, for use on ships, aircraft or railways, which
preparation process of International Standards. complies with the safety provisions drawn up by international bodies in which
CENELEC deals with specific subjects, for which standardization is urgently the Member States participate.
required.
When the study of a specific subject has already been started by the IEC, the
European standardization body (CENELEC) can decide to accept or, whenever Directive EMC 89/336/EEC (“Electromagnetic Compatibility”)
necessary, to amend the works already approved by the International
standardization body. The Directive on electromagnetic compatibility regards all the electrical and
electronic apparatus as well as systems and installations containing electrical
and/or electronic components. In particular, the apparatus covered by this
Directive are divided into the following categories according to their
EC DIRECTIVES FOR ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
characteristics:
Among its institutional roles, the European Community has the task of • domestic radio and TV receivers;
promulgating directives which must be adopted by the different member states • industrial manufacturing equipment;
and then transposed into national law. • mobile radio equipment;
Once adopted, these directives come into juridical force and become a reference • mobile radio and commercial radio telephone equipment;
for manufacturers, installers, and dealers who must fulfill the duties prescribed • medical and scientific apparatus;
by law. • information technology equipment (ITE);
Directives are based on the following principles: • domestic appliances and household electronic equipment;
• harmonization is limited to essential requirements; • aeronautical and marine radio apparatus;
• only the products which comply with the essential requirements specified by • educational electronic equipment;
the directives can be marketed and put into service; • telecommunications networks and apparatus;
• the harmonized standards, whose reference numbers are published in the • radio and television broadcast transmitters;
Official Journal of the European Communities and which are transposed into • lights and fluorescent lamps.
the national standards, are considered in compliance with the essential The apparatus shall be so constructed that:
requirements; a) the electromagnetic disturbance it generates does not exceed a level allowing
• the applicability of the harmonized standards or of other technical specifications radio and telecommunications equipment and other apparatus to operate
is facultative and manufacturers are free to choose other technical solutions as intended;
which ensure compliance with the essential requirements; b) the apparatus has an adequate level of intrinsic immunity to electromagnetic
• a manufacturer can choose among the different conformity evaluation proce- disturbance to enable it to operate as intended.
dure provided by the applicable directive. An apparatus is declared in conformity to the provisions at points a) and b)
The scope of each directive is to make manufacturers take all the necessary when the apparatus complies with the harmonized standards relevant to its
steps and measures so that the product does not affect the safety and health product family or, in case there aren’t any, with the general standards.
of persons, animals and property.
CE conformity marking ABB SACE circuit-breakers (Isomax-Tmax-Emax) are approved by the following
shipping registers:
The CE conformity marking shall indicate conformity to all the obligations
imposed on the manufacturer, as regards his products, by virtue of the European
• RINA Registro Italiano Navale Italian shipping register
Community directives providing for the affixing of the CE marking.
• DNV Det Norske Veritas Norwegian shipping register
• BV Bureau Veritas French shipping register
• GL Germanischer Lloyd German shipping register
• LRs Lloyd’s Register of Shipping British shipping register
• ABS American Bureau of Shipping American shipping register
When the CE marking is affixed on a product, it represents a declaration of the
manufacturer or of his authorized representative that the product in question It is always advisable to ask ABB SACE as regards the typologies and the
conforms to all the applicable provisions including the conformity assessment performances of the certified circuit-breakers or to consult the section certificates
procedures. This prevents the Member States from limiting the marketing and in the website http://bol.it.abb.com.
putting into service of products bearing the CE marking, unless this measure is
justified by the proved non-conformity of the product.
Marks of conformity to the relevant national and

Flow diagram for the conformity assessment procedures established by the Directive
international Standards
73/23/EEC on electrical equipment designed for use within particular voltage range: The international and national marks of conformity are reported in the following
table, for information only:
EC declaration of
Technical file conformity
COUNTRY Symbol Mark designation Applicability/Organization
The manufacturer The manufacturer –
draw up the technical EUROPE Mark of compliance with the
guarantees and declares harmonized European standards
Manufacturer documentation that his products are in
ASDC008045F0201
listed in the ENEC Agreement.
covering the design, conformity to the technical
manufacture and documentation and to the
operation of the directive requirements
product
AUSTRALIA AS Mark Electrical and non-electrical
products.
It guarantees compliance with
SAA (Standard Association of
Naval type approval Australia).
The environmental conditions which characterize the use of circuit breakers for
on-board installations can be different from the service conditions in standard AUSTRALIA S.A.A. Mark Standards Association of
industrial environments; as a matter of fact, marine applications can require Australia (S.A.A.).
installation under particular conditions, such as: The Electricity Authority of New
- environments characterized by high temperature and humidity, including salt- South Wales Sydney Australia
mist atmosphere (damp-heat, salt-mist environment);
- on board environments (engine room) where the apparatus operate in the
presence of vibrations characterized by considerable amplitude and duration. AUSTRIA Austrian Test Mark Installation equipment and
materials
In order to ensure the proper function in such environments, the shipping
registers require that the apparatus has to be tested according to specific type OVE
approval tests, the most significant of which are vibration, dynamic inclination,
humidity and dry-heat tests.
COUNTRY Symbol Mark designation Applicability/Organization COUNTRY Symbol Mark designation Applicability/Organization
AUSTRIA ÖVE Identification Cables CROATIA KONKAR Electrical Engineering Institute
Thread
BELGIUM CEBEC Mark Installation materials and electrical DENMARK DEMKO Low voltage materials.
appliances Approval Mark This mark guarantees the
compliance of the product with
the requirements (safety) of the
“Heavy Current Regulations”
BELGIUM CEBEC Mark Conduits and ducts, conductors FINLAND Safety Mark Low voltage material.
and flexible cords of the Elektriska This mark guarantees the
Inspektoratet compliance of the product with
the requirements (safety) of the
“Heavy Current Regulations”
BELGIUM Certification of Installation material and electrical FRANCE ESC Mark Household appliances
Conformity appliances (in case there are no
equivalent national standards or
criteria)
CANADA CSA Mark Electrical and non-electrical FRANCE NF Mark Conductors and cables –
products. Conduits and ducting –
This mark guarantees compliance Installation materials
with CSA (Canadian Standard
Association)
CHINA CCEE Mark Great Wall Mark Commission for FRANCE NF Identification Cables
Certification of Electrical Thread
Equipment
Czech Republic EZU’ Mark Electrotechnical Testing Institute FRANCE NF Mark Portable motor-operated tools
Slovakia Electrotechnical Research and FRANCE NF Mark Household appliances

Republic EVPU’ Mark Design Institute
GERMANY VDE Mark For appliances and technical ITALY IMQ Mark Mark to be affixed on electrical
equipment, installation accessories material for non-skilled users; it
such as plugs, sockets, fuses, certifies compliance with the
wires and cables, as well as other European Standard(s).
components (capacitors, earthing
systems, lamp holders and
electronic devices)
GERMANY VDE NORWAY Norwegian Approval Mandatory safety approval for low
Identification Thread Cables and cords Mark voltage material and equipment
GERMANY VDE Cable Mark For cables, insulated cords, NETHERLANDS KEMA-KEUR General for all equipment
installation conduits and ducts
KEUR
GERMANY VDE-GS Mark Safety mark for technical equipment POLAND KWE Electrical products
for technical to be affixed after the product has
been tested and certified by the VDE
geprüfte
Sicherheit
equipment Test Laboratory in Offenbach; the
conformity mark is the mark VDE,
which is granted both to be used
B
alone as well as in combination with
the mark GS
HUNGARY Hungarian Institute for Testing and RUSSIA Certification of Electrical and non-electrical
MEEI Certification of Electrical Equipment Conformity products. It guarantees
compliance with national standard
(Gosstandard of Russia)
JAPAN JIS Mark Mark which guarantees SINGAPORE SISIR Electrical and non-electrical
compliance with the relevant O
SIN
GAPO
R products
R O V ED T
E
Japanese Industrial Standard(s).
STA N D AR
PP
A D
IRELAND IIRS Mark Electrical equipment SLOVENIA SIQ Slovenian Institute of Quality and
Metrology
IRELAND CO N F IIRS Mark Electrical equipment SPAIN AEE Electrical products.

OF O
R M I DA D A The mark is under the control of
FO
R
K
MI
C A DE CON
MAR
NO
the Asociación Electrotécnica
TY
R MA S U N
Española(Spanish Electrotechnical
Association)
AR
M E
I . I. R . S .
UNITED Compliance with the “British

SPAIN AENOR Asociación Española de
KINGDOM BEAB
Normalización y Certificación. Safety Mark Standards” for household
(Spanish Standarization and appliances
Certification Association)
SWEDEN SEMKO Mandatory safety approval for low UNITED BSI Compliance with the “British
Mark voltage material and equipment. KINGDOM Safety Mark Standards”
Safety Mark Swiss low voltage material subject B R IT I S

SWITZERLAND UNITED TO H BEAB Compliance with the relevant
to mandatory approval (safety).
ROVED
ST
KINGDOM Kitemark “British Standards” regarding
A N D AR
safety and performances
PP
A D
DENT LA B
EN OR
EP
ND
ATO
AN I
– Cables subject to mandatory
RY
SWITZERLAND U.S.A. UNDERWRITERS Electrical and non-electrical
TES
Y
approval
ET
products
TI
AF
G
LABORATORIES
N
FO S
R P U B L IC
Mark
L I S T E D
(Product Name)
(Control Number)
SWITZERLAND SEV Safety Mark Low voltage material subject to U.S.A. UNDERWRITERS Electrical and non-electrical
mandatory approval LABORATORIES products
Mark
UNITED ASTA Mark Mark which guarantees U.S.A. UL Recognition Electrical and non-electrical
KINGDOM compliance with the relevant products
N
TR
IO
AD
AT
“British Standards”
C
E
FI
M
TI
AR
ER
K
C
UNITED BASEC Mark Mark which guarantees CEN CEN Mark Mark issued by the European
KINGDOM compliance with the “British Committee for Standardization
Standards” for conductors, cables (CEN): it guarantees compliance
and ancillary products. with the European Standards.
UNITED BASEC Cables CENELEC Mark Cables

KINGDOM Identification Thread
1.1 General aspects
1.2 IEC Standards for electrical

COUNTRY Symbol Mark designation Applicability/Organization installation
STANDARD YEAR TITLE
CENELEC Certification mark providing
IEC 60027-1 1992 Letter symbols to be used in electrical
assurance that the harmonized technology - Part 1: General
Harmonization Mark
cable complies with the relevant
harmonized CENELEC Standards
IEC 60034-1 2004 Rotating electrical machines - Part 1:
– identification thread Rating and performance
Mark assuring the compliance IEC 60617-DB-12M 2001 Graphical symbols for diagrams - 12-
EC month subscription to online database
Ex EUROPEA Mark with the relevant European
comprising parts 2 to 11 of IEC 60617
Standards of the products to be
used in environments with IEC 61082-1 1991 Preparation of documents used in
explosion hazards electrotechnology - Part 1: General
requirements
Mark which is applicable to some IEC 61082-2 1993 Preparation of documents used in
CEEel electrotechnology - Part 2: Function-
CEEel Mark household appliances (shavers,
oriented diagrams
electric clocks, etc).
IEC 61082-3 1993 Preparation of documents used in
electrotechnology - Part 3: Connection
diagrams, tables and lists
IEC 61082-4 1996 Preparation of documents used in
electrotechnology - Part 4: Location and
installation documents
IEC 60038 2002 IEC standard voltages
EC - Declaration of Conformity IEC 60664-1 2002 Insulation coordination for equipment
within low-voltage systems - Part 1:
The EC Declaration of Conformity is the statement of the manufacturer, who Principles, requirements and tests
declares under his own responsibility that all the equipment, procedures or IEC 60909-0 2001 Short-circuit currents in three-phase a.c.
services refer and comply with specific standards (directives) or other normative systems - Part 0: Calculation of currents
documents. IEC 60865-1 1993 Short-circuit currents - Calculation of
The EC Declaration of Conformity should contain the following information: effects - Part 1: Definitions and
calculation methods
• name and address of the manufacturer or by its European representative;
IEC 60781 1989 Application guide for calculation of short-
• description of the product; circuit currents in low-voltage radial
• reference to the harmonized standards and directives involved; systems
• any reference to the technical specifications of conformity; IEC 60076-1 2000 Power transformers - Part 1: General
• the two last digits of the year of affixing of the CE marking; IEC 60076-2 1993 Power transformers - Part 2: Temperature
• identification of the signer. rise
A copy of the EC Declaration of Conformity shall be kept by the manufacturer IEC 60076-3 2000 Power transformers - Part 3: Insulation
levels, dielectric tests and external
or by his representative together with the technical documentation. clearances in air
IEC 60076-5 2000 Power transformers - Part 5: Ability to
withstand short circuit
IEC/TR 60616 1978 Terminal and tapping markings for power
transformers
IEC 60076-11 2004 Power transformers - Part 11: Dry-type
transformers
IEC 60445 1999 Basic and safety principles for man-
machine interface, marking and
identification - Identification of
equipment terminals and of terminations
of certain designated conductors,
including general rules for an
alphanumeric system
1.2 IEC standards for electrical installation 1.2 IEC standards for electrical installation
STANDARD YEAR TITLE STANDARD YEAR TITLE
IEC 60073 2002 Basic and safety principles for man- IEC 60947-5-6 1999 Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear -
machine interface, marking and Part 5-6: Control circuit devices and
identification – Coding for indicators and switching elements – DC interface for
actuators proximity sensors and switching
amplifiers (NAMUR)
machine interface, marking and IEC 60947-6-1 1998 Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear -
identification - Identification of Part 6-1: Multiple function equipment –
conductors by colours or numerals Automatic transfer switching equipment
IEC 60947-6-2 2002 Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear -
machine interface, marking and
Part 6-2: Multiple function equipment -
identification - Actuating principles
Control and protective switching devices
IEC 60947-1 2004 Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear - (or equipment) (CPS)
Part 1: General rules IEC 60947-7-1 2002 Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear -
IEC 60947-2 2003 Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear - Part 7: Ancillary equipment - Section 1:
Part 2: Circuit-breakers Terminal blocks for copper conductors
IEC 60947-3 2001 Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear - IEC 60947-7-2 2002 Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear -
Part 3: Switches, disconnectors, switch- Part 7: Ancillary equipment - Section 2:
disconnectors and fuse-combination Protective conductor terminal blocks for
units copper conductors
IEC 60947-4-1 2002 Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear - IEC 60439-1 2004 Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear
Part 4-1: Contactors and motor-starters – assemblies - Part 1: Type-tested and
Electromechanical contactors and motor- partially type-tested assemblies
starters IEC 60439-2 2000 Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear
IEC 60947-4-2 2002 Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear - assemblies - Part 2: Particular
Part 4-2: Contactors and motor-starters – requirements for busbar trunking systems
AC semiconductor motor controllers and (busways)
starters IEC 60439-3 2001 Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear
assemblies - Part 3: Particular
requirements for low-voltage switchgear
Part 4-3: Contactors and motor-starters –
and controlgear assemblies intended to
AC semiconductor controllers and
be installed in places where unskilled
contactors for non-motor loads
persons have access for their use -
IEC 60947-5-1 2003 Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear - Distribution boards
Part 5-1: Control circuit devices and IEC 60439-4 2004 Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear
switching elements - Electromechanical assemblies - Part 4: Particular
control circuit devices requirements for assemblies for
IEC 60947-5-2 2004 Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear - construction sites (ACS)
Part 5-2: Control circuit devices and
switching elements – Proximity switches
IEC 60947-5-3 1999 Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear - IEC 60439-5 1998 Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear
Part 5-3: Control circuit devices and assemblies - Part 5: Particular
switching elements – Requirements for requirements for assemblies intended to
proximity devices with defined behaviour be installed outdoors in public places -
under fault conditions Cable distribution cabinets (CDCs) for
IEC 60947-5-4 2002 Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear - power distribution in networks
Part 5: Control circuit devices and
switching elements – Section 4: Method
of assessing the performance of low IEC 61095 2000 Electromechanical contactors for
energy contacts. Special tests household and similar purposes
Part 5-5: Control circuit devices and
switching elements - Electrical
emergency stop device with mechanical
latching function
IEC 60890 1987 A method of temperature-rise assessment 1994 Part 5: Lift cables
by extrapolation for partially type-tested 1994 Part 6: Arc welding electrode cables
assemblies (PTTA) of low-voltage 1994 Part 7: Heat resistant ethylene-vinyl
switchgear and controlgear acetate rubber insulated cables
IEC/TR 61117 1992 A method for assessing the short-circuit 2004 Part 8: Cords for applications requiring
withstand strength of partially type-tested high flexibility
assemblies (PTTA) IEC 60309-2 1999 Plugs, socket-outlets and couplers for
IEC 60092-303 1980 Electrical installations in ships. Part 303: industrial purposes - Part 2: Dimensional
Equipment - Transformers for power and interchangeability requirements for pin
lighting and contact-tube accessories
IEC 60092-301 1980 Electrical installations in ships. Part 301: IEC 61008-1 2002 Residual current operated circuit-breakers
Equipment - Generators and motors without integral overcurrent protection for
IEC 60092-101 2002 Electrical installations in ships - Part 101: household and similar uses (RCCBs) -
Definitions and general requirements Part 1: General rules
IEC 61008-2-1 1990 Residual current operated circuit-breakers
IEC 60092-401 1980 Electrical installations in ships. Part 401:
without integral overcurrent protection for
Installation and test of completed
household and similar uses (RCCB’s).
installation Part 2-1: Applicability of the general rules
IEC 60092-201 1994 Electrical installations in ships - Part 201: to RCCB’s functionally independent of
System design - General line voltage
IEC 60092-202 1994 Electrical installations in ships - Part 202: IEC 61008-2-2 1990 Residual current operated circuit-breakers
System design - Protection without integral overcurrent protection for
IEC 60092-302 1997 Electrical installations in ships - Part 302: household and similar uses (RCCB’s).
Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear Part 2-2: Applicability of the general rules
assemblies to RCCB’s functionally dependent on line
voltage
IEC 60092-350 2001 Electrical installations in ships - Part 350:
Shipboard power cables - General IEC 61009-1 2003 Residual current operated circuit-breakers
with integral overcurrent protection for
construction and test requirements
household and similar uses (RCBOs) -
IEC 60092-352 1997 Electrical installations in ships - Part 352: Part 1: General rules
Choice and installation of cables for low- IEC 61009-2-1 1991 Residual current operated circuit-breakers
voltage power systems with integral overcurrent protection for
IEC 60364-5-52 2001 Electrical installations of buildings - Part household and similar uses (RCBO’s)
5-52: Selection and erection of electrical Part 2-1: Applicability of the general rules
equipment – Wiring systems to RCBO’s functionally independent of
IEC 60227 Polyvinyl chloride insulated cables of line voltage
rated voltages up to and including 450/ IEC 61009-2-2 1991 Residual current operated circuit-breakers
750 V with integral overcurrent protection for
1998 Part 1: General requirements household and similar uses (RCBO’s) -
Part 2-2: Applicability of the general rules
2003 Part 2: Test methods to RCBO’s functionally
1997 Part 3: Non-sheathed cables for fixed dependent on line voltage
wiring IEC 60670-1 2002 Boxes and enclosures for electrical
1997 Part 4: Sheathed cables for fixed wiring accessories for household and similar
2003 Part 5: Flexible cables (cords) fixed electrical installations - Part 1:
General requirements
2001 Part 6: Lift cables and cables for flexible
IEC 60669-2-1 2002 Switches for household and similar fixed
connections
electrical installations - Part 2-1:
2003 Part 7: Flexible cables screened and Particular requirements – Electronic
unscreened with two or more conductors switches
IEC 60228 2004 Conductors of insulated cables IEC 60669-2-2 2002 Switches for household and similar fixed
IEC 60245 Rubber insulated cables - Rated voltages electrical installations - Part 2: Particular
up to and including 450/750 V requirements – Section 2: Remote-control
switches (RCS)
2003 Part 1: General requirements
IEC 60669-2-3 1997 Switches for household and similar fixed
1998 Part 2: Test methods
electrical installations - Part 2-3:
1994 Part 3: Heat resistant silicone insulated Particular requirements – Time-delay
cables switches (TDS)
IEC 60079-10 2002 Electrical apparatus for explosive gas IEC 60529 2001 Degrees of protection provided by
atmospheres - Part 10: Classification of enclosures (IP Code)
hazardous areas IEC 61032 1997 Protection of persons and equipment by
IEC 60079-14 2002 Electrical apparatus for explosive gas enclosures - Probes for verification
atmospheres - Part 14: Electrical IEC/TR 61000-1-1 1992 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) -
installations in hazardous areas (other Part 1: General - Section 1: Application
than mines) and interpretation of fundamental
IEC 60079-17 2002 Electrical apparatus for explosive gas definitions and terms
atmospheres - Part 17: Inspection and IEC/TS 61000-1-2 2001 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) -
maintenance of electrical installations in Part 1-2: General - Methodology for the
hazardous areas (other than mines) achievement of the functional safety of
IEC 60269-1 1998 Low-voltage fuses - Part 1: General electrical and electronic equipment with
requirements regard to electromagnetic phenomena
IEC 60269-2 1986 Low-voltage fuses. Part 2: Supplementary IEC/TR 61000-1-3 2002 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) -
requirements for fuses for use by Part 1-3: General - The effects of high-
authorized persons (fuses mainly for altitude EMP (HEMP) on civil equipment
industrial application) and systems
IEC 60269-3-1 2004 Low-voltage fuses - Part 3-1:
Supplementary requirements for fuses for
use by unskilled persons (fuses mainly for
household and similar applications) -
Sections I to IV: Examples of types of
standardized fuses
IEC 60127-1/10 Miniature fuses -
2003 Part 1: Definitions for miniature fuses and
general requirements for miniature fuse-links
2003 Part 2: Cartridge fuse-links
1988 Part 3: Sub-miniature fuse-links
1996 Part 4: Universal Modular Fuse-Links
(UMF)
1988 Part 5: Guidelines for quality assessment
of miniature fuse-links
1994 Part 6: Fuse-holders for miniature
cartridge fuse-links
2001 Part 10: User guide for miniature fuses
IEC 60730-2-7 1990 Automatic electrical controls for
household and similar use. Part 2-7:
Particular requirements for timers and
time switches
IEC 60364-1 2001 Electrical installations of buildings - Part 1:
Fundamental principles, assessment of
general characteristics, definitions
Protection for safety
IEC 60364-5 2001…2002 Electrical installations of buildings - Part 5:
Selection and erection of electrical equipment
Verification
IEC 60364-7 1983…2002 Electrical installations of buildings. Part 7:
Requirements for special installations or
locations
2.1 Circuit-breaker nameplates
2 Protection and control devices 2 Protection and control devices
Moulded-case circuit-breaker: Tmax Moulded-case circuit-breaker: Isomax
CIRCUIT-BREAKER TYPE
Series Size Rated ultimate short-circuit Rated CIRCUIT-BREAKER TYPE
T 1 breaking capacity at 415 Vac uninterrupted
B = 16 kA Series Size Rated ultimate short-circuit
2 current S 7 breaking capacity at 415 Vac
C = 25 kA
3 160 A
N = 36 kA 8
4 S = 50 kA 250 A S = 50 kA
5 H = 70 kA 320 A H = 65 kA (for S7)
6 L = 85 kA (for T2) 400 A H = 85 kA (for S8)
L = 120 kA (for T4-T5) 630 A L = 100 kA
L = 100 kA (for T6) 800 A V = 120 kA
V = 200 kA 1000 A
Rated insulation
Rated uninterrupted voltage Ui; i.e. the
current Iu maximum r.m.s. value
of voltage which the
circuit-breaker is Rated uninterrupted
Rated operational capable of current Iu
voltage Ue withstanding at the
supply frequency Rated operational
under specified test voltage Ue
conditions. Compliance with national and
international product Standards.
Rated impulse
withstand voltage
Uimp; i.e. the peak Rated ultimate short-
value of impulse circuit breaking
Tmax T2L160 Iu=160A Ue=690V Ui=800V Uimp=8kV IEC 60947-2
voltage which the capacity (Icu) at
Ue (V) 230 400/415 440 500 690 250 500 Made in Italy
circuit-breaker can different voltage values.
Icu (kA) 150 85 75 50 10 85 85 by ABB SACE
withstand under SACE S7L Iu=1250A Ue=690V IEC 947-2 CEI EN 60947-2
Ics (% Icu) 75 75 75 75 75 75 75 specified test Ics = 50% Icu
2P 3P Ue (V) 230 400/415 440 500 690
Cat A 50-60Hz in series conditions.
Icu 50-60 Hz (kA) 200 100 80 70 35 Cat B
Rated ultimate short- According to the CE marking affixed on Compliance with the
circuit breaking capacity international Standard ABB circuit-breakers to international
(Icu) and rated service IEC 60947-2, the circuit indicate compliance Standard According to the According to the international CE marking affixed on
short-circuit breaking breakers can be divided with the following CE IEC 60947-2: international Standard IEC 60947-2, the ABB circuit-breakers to
capacity (Ics) at into Category A, i.e. directives: “Low-Voltage Standard circuit-breakers can be divided indicate compliance
different voltage values. without a specified “Low Voltage Directive” switchgear and IEC 60947-2: into Category A, i.e. without with the following CE
short-time withstand (LVD) no. 73/23 EEC controlgear-Circuit- “Low-Voltage a specified short-time directives:
ASDC008046F0201
ASDC008047F0201
current rating, or “Electromagnetic breakers”. switchgear and withstand current rating, or “Low Voltage Directive”
Category B, i.e. with a Compatibility Directive” controlgear- Category B, i.e. with a (LVD) no. 73/23 EEC
specified short-time (EMC) no. 89/336 EEC. Circuit-breakers”. specified short-time withstand “Electromagnetic
withstand current rating. current rating. Compatibility Directive”
(EMC) no. 89/336 EEC.
2.2 Main definitions
Air circuit-breaker: Emax The main definitions regarding LV switchgear and controlgear are included in
the international Standards IEC 60947-1, IEC 60947-2 and IEC 60947-3.
CIRCUIT-BREAKER TYPE Main characteristics

Series Size Rated ultimate short-circuit Rated
E 1 breaking capacity at 415 Vac uninterrupted Circuit-breaker
2 current A mechanical switching device, capable of making, carrying and breaking
3 B = 42 kA 08 800 A currents under normal circuit conditions and also making, carrying for a specified
4 N = 65 kA (50 kA E1) 10 1000 A time and breaking currents under specified abnormal circuit conditions such as
S = 75 kA (85 kA E2) 12 1250 A
6 those of short-circuit.
H = 100 kA 16 1600 A
20 2000 A Current-limiting circuit-breaker
L = 130 kA
25 2500 A A circuit-breaker with a break-time short enough to prevent the short-circuit
V = 150 kA (130 kA E3) 32 3200 A current reaching its otherwise attainable peak value.
40 4000 A
50 5000 A Plug-in circuit-breaker
63 6300 A A circuit-breaker which, in addition to its interrupting contacts, has a set of
contacts which enable the circuit-breaker to be removed.
Withdrawable circuit-breaker
A circuit-breaker which, in addition to its interrupting contacts, has a set of
isolating contacts which enable the circuit-breaker to be disconnected from
Rated uninterrupted
the main circuit, in the withdrawn position, to achieve an isolating distance in
current Iu
accordance with specified requirements.
Rated operational Moulded-case circuit-breaker
voltage Ue Rated short-time A circuit-breaker having a supporting housing of moulded insulating material
withstand current Icw;
i.e. the maximum forming an integral part of the circuit-breaker.
current that Disconnector
the circuit-breaker can A mechanical switching device which, in the open position, complies with the
Iu=3200A Ue=690V carry during a
SACE E3V 32 Icw=85kA x 1s specified time. requirements specified for the isolating function.
Release
Cat B ~ 50-60 Hz IEC 60947-2
made in Italy by A device, mechanically connected to a mechanical switching device, which
Ue (V) 230 415 440 525 690 ABB-SACE releases the holding means and permits the opening or the closing of the
Icu (kA) 130 130 130 100 100 switching device.
Ics (kA) 100 100 100 85 85
Fault types and currents
Overload
Operating conditions in an electrically undamaged circuit which cause an over-
According to the Rated ultimate CE marking affixed on Compliance with the current.
international Standard short-circuit ABB circuit-breakers to international Standard Short-circuit
IEC 60947-2, the circuit- breaking capacity indicate compliance IEC 60947-2: The accidental or intentional connection, by a relatively low resistance or
breakers can be divided (Icu) and rated with the following CE “Low-Voltage
impedance, of two or more points in a circuit which are normally at different
ASDC008048F0201
into Category A, i.e. service short- directives: switchgear and

without a specified short- circuit breaking “Low Voltage Directive” controlgear-Circuit- voltages.
time withstand current capacity (Ics) at (LVD) no. 73/23 EEC breakers”. Residual current (I∆)
rating, or Category B, i.e. different voltage “Electromagnetic
with a specified short-time values. Compatibility Directive” It is the vectorial sum of the currents flowing in the main circuit of the circuit-
withstand current rating. (EMC) no. 89/336 EEC. breaker.
2.2 Main definitions 2.2 Main definitions

Rated performances
Voltages and frequencies Rated ultimate short-circuit breaking capacity (Icu)
The rated ultimate short-circuit breaking capacity of a circuit-breaker is the
Rated operational voltage (Ue) maximum short-circuit current value which the circuit-breaker can break twice
A rated operational voltage of an equipment is a value of voltage which, (in accordance with the sequence O – t – CO), at the corresponding rated
combined with a rated operational current, determines the application of the operational voltage. After the opening and closing sequence the circuit-breaker
equipment and to which the relevant tests and the utilization categories are is not required to carry its rated current.
referred to. Rated service short-circuit breaking capacity (Ics)
Rated insulation voltage (Ui) The rated service short-circuit breaking capacity of a circuit-breaker is the
The rated insulation voltage of an equipment is the value of voltage to which maximum short-circuit current value which the circuit-breaker can break three
dielectric tests voltage and creepage distances are referred. In no case the times in accordance with a sequence of opening and closing operations (O - t
maximum value of the rated operational voltage shall exceed that of the rated - CO - t – CO) at a defined rated operational voltage (Ue) and at a defined
insulation voltage. power factor. After this sequence the circuit-breaker is required to carry its
Rated impulse withstand voltage (Uimp) rated current.
The peak value of an impulse voltage of prescribed form and polarity which the Rated short-time withstand current (Icw)
equipment is capable of withstanding without failure under specified conditions The rated short-time withstand current is the current that the circuit-breaker in
of test and to which the values of the clearances are referred. the closed position can carry during a specified short time under prescribed
Rated frequency conditions of use and behaviour; the circuit-breaker shall be able to carry this
The supply frequency for which an equipment is designed and to which the current during the associated short-time delay in order to ensure discrimination
other characteristic values correspond. between the circuit-breakers in series.
Rated short-circuit making capacity (Icm)
Currents The rated short-circuit making capacity of an equipment is the value of short-
circuit making capacity assigned to that equipment by the manufacturer for the
Rated uninterrupted current (Iu) rated operational voltage, at rated frequency, and at a specified power-factor
The rated uninterrupted current of an equipment is a value of current, stated by for ac.
the manufacturer, which the equipment can carry in uninterrupted duty.
Rated residual operating current (I∆n)
It is the r.m.s. value of a sinusoidal residual operating current assigned to the Utilization categories
CBR by the manufacturer, at which the CBR shall operate under specified
The utilization category of a circuit-breaker shall be stated with reference to
conditions.
whether or not it is specifically intended for selectivity by means of an intentional
time delay with respect to other circuit-breakers in series on the load side,
Performances under short-circuit conditions under short-circuit conditions (Table 4 IEC 60947-2).
Rated making capacity
Category A - Circuit-breakers not specifically intended for selectivity under
The rated making capacity of an equipment is a value of current, stated by the short-circuit conditions with respect to other short-circuit protective devices in
manufacturer, which the equipment can satisfactorily make under specified series on the load side, i.e. without a short-time withstand current rating.
making conditions.
Rated breaking capacity Category B - Circuit-breakers specifically intended for selectivity under short-
The rated breaking of an equipment is a value of current, stated by the circuit conditions with respect to other short-circuit protective devices in series
manufacturer, which the equipment can satisfactorily break, under specified on the load side, i.e. with and intentional short-time delay provided for selectivity
breaking conditions. under short-circuit conditions. Such circuit-breakers have a short-time withstand
current rating.
2.2 Main definitions 2.3 Types of releases

A circuit-breaker is classified in category B if its Icw is higher than (Table 3 IEC with particular requirements, thanks to their wide setting possibilities of both
60947-2): thresholds and tripping times.
Among the devices sensitive to overcurrents, the following can be considered:
12·In or 5 kA, whichever is the greater for In ≤ 2500A
30 kA for In > 2500A • thermomagnetic releases and magnetic only releases;
• microprocessor-based releases;
Electrical and mechanical durability • residual current devices.
Mechanical durability
The mechanical durability of an apparatus is expressed by the number of no- The choice and adjusting of protection releases are based both on the
load operating cycles (each operating cycle consists of one closing and opening requirements of the part of plant to be protected, as well as on the coordination
operation) which can be effected before it becomes necessary to service or with other devices; in general, discriminating factors for the selection are the
replace any of its mechanical parts (however, normal maintenance may be required threshold, time and curve characteristic.
permitted).
Electrical durability
The electrical durability of an apparatus is expressed by the number of on-load
operating cycles and gives the contact resistance to electrical wear under the
service conditions stated in the relevant product Standard.
2.3 Types of releases 2.3.1 THERMOMAGNETIC RELEASES AND MAGNETIC ONLY RELEASES
A circuit-breaker must control and protect, in case of faults or malfunctioning, The thermomagnetic releases use a bimetal and an electromagnet to detect
the connected elements of a plant. In order to perform this function, after overloads and short-circuits; they are suitable to protect both alternating and
detection of an anomalous condition, the release intervenes in a definite time direct current networks.
by opening the interrupting part.
The protection releases fitted with ABB SACE moulded-case and air circuit- The following table shows the available rated currents and the relevant magnetic
breakers can control and protect any plant, from the simplest ones to those settings.
In [A] → 1 1.6 2 2.5 3.2 4 5 6.3 8 8.5 10 11 12.5 16 20 25 32 40 50 52 63 80 100 125 160 200 250 320 400 500 630 800
Circuit-breaker
Magnetic type Thermal [A]→ - 1.1-1.6 1.4-2 1.8-2.5 2.2-3.2 2.8-4 3.5-5 4.4-6.3 5.6-8 - 7-10 - 8.8-12.5 11-16 14-20 18-25 22-32 28-40 35-50 - 44-63 56-80 70-100 88-125 112-160 140-200 175-250 224-320 280-400 350-500 441-630 560-800
T1 TMD 10xIn 500 500 500 500 500 500 630 800 1000 1250 1600
T2 TMD 10xIn 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 125 500 500 500 500 500 500 630 800 1000 1250 1600
MF 13xIn 13 21 26 33 42 52 65 84 110 145 163
MA 6-12xIn 120-240 192-384 314-624 480-960 600-1200
T3 TMD 10xIn 630 800 1000 1250 1600 2000 2500
TMG 3xIn 400 400 400 400 480 600 750
MA 6-12xIn 600-1200 750-1500 960-1920 1200-2400
T4 TMD 10xIn I3 [A] 320 320 500
TMA 5-10xIn 400-800 500-1000 625-1250 800-1600 1000-2000 1250-2500
MA 6-14xIn 60-140 150-350 314-728 480-1120 600-1400 750-1750 960-2240 1200-2800
T5 TMA 5-10xIn 1600-3200 2000-4000 2500-5000
TMG 2.5-5xIn 800-1600 1000-2000 1250-2500
T6 TMA 5-10xIn 3150-6300 4000-8000
*Note: TMD Thermomagnetic release with adjustable thermal and fixed magnetic threshold
TMA Thermomagnetic release with adjustable thermal and magnetic threshold
TMG Thermomagnetic release for generator protection
MA Adjustable magnetic only releases
MF Fixed magnetic only releases
2.3 Types of releases 2.3 Types of releases

For example, a circuit-breaker type T2, with rated current In equal to 2.5 A, is Besides the standard protection functions, releases provide:
available in two versions: - measurements of the main characteristics of the plant: current,voltage,power,
- thermomagnetic with adjustable thermal current I1 from 1.8 up to 2.5 A and power factor, frequency, peak factor and energy (PR223);
fixed magnetic current I3 equal to 25 A; - measurements of the main characteristics of the plant: current,voltage,power,
- fixed magnetic only releases (MF) with I3 equal to 33 A. power factor, frequency, peak factor, energy, harmonics calculation and
maintenance (PR122-PR123);
- serial communication with remote control for a complete management of the
plant (PR212-PR222-PR223-PR122-PR123 equipped with dialogue unit).
2.3.2 ELECTRONIC RELEASES

CURRENT TRANSFORMER SIZE
These releases are connected with current transformers (three or four
Rated current In [A] → 10 25 63 100 160 250 320 400 630 800 1000 1250 1600 2000 2500 3200
according to the number of conductors to be protected), which are positioned
Circuit-breaker Iu[A]
inside the circuit-breaker and have the double functions of supplying the
power necessary to the proper functioning of the release (self-supply) and of T2 160
detecting the value of the current flowing inside the live conductors; therefore T4 250
they are compatible with alternating current networks only. 320
The signal coming from the transformers and from the Rogowsky coils is T5 400
processed by the electronic component (microprocessor) which compares
630
it with the set thresholds. When the signal exceeds the thresholds, the trip of
T6 630
the circuit-breaker is operated through an opening solenoid which directly
acts on the circuit-breaker operating mechanism. 800
In case of auxiliary power supply in addition to self-supply from the current 1000
transformers, the voltage shall be 24 Vdc ± 20%. S7 1250
1600
S8 2000
2500
3200
Rated Current In [A] → 10 25 63 100 (2) 160 (2) 200 250 320 400 630 800 1000 1250 1600 2000 2500 3200
PR221 4-10 10-25 25-63 40-100 64-160 100-250 128-320 160-400 252-630 320-800 400-1000
PR222 40-100 64-160 100-250 128-320 160-400 252-630 320-800 400-1000
PR223 18-100 28.8-160 45-250 57.6-320 72-400 113.4-630 144-800 180-1000
L PR211/PR212 400-1000 500-1250 640-1600 800-2000 1000-2500 1280-3200
Function PR222/MP 40-100 64-160 80-200 128-320 160-400 252-630
PR212/MP 400-1000
PR221 (1) 10-100 25-250 63-630 100-1000 160-1600 250-2500 320-3200 400-4000 630-6300 800-8000 1000-10000
S
PR222 60-1000 96-1600 150-2500 192-3200 240-4000 378-6300 480-8000 600-10000
Function
PR223 60-1000 96-1600 150-2500 192-3200 240-4000 378-6300 480-8000 600-10000
PR211/PR212 1000-10000 1250-12500 1600-1600 2000-20000 2500-25000 3200-32000
(1)
PR221 10-100 25-250 63-630 100-1000 160-1600 250-2500 320-3200 400-4000 630-6300 800-8000 1000-10000
PR222 150-1200 240-1920 375-3000 480-3200* 600-4800 945-6300 ** 1200-9600 1500-12000
I
PR223 150-1200 240-1920 375-3000 480-3200* 600-4800 945-6300 ** 1200-9600 1500-12000
Function PR211/PR212 1500-12000 2875-15000 2400-19200 3000-24000 3750-30000 4800-38400
PR222/MP 600-1300 960-2080 1200-2600 1920-4160 2400-5200 3780-8190 6000-13000
PR212/MP 6000-13000
(1)
For T2 only: S function is in alternative to I function ** For T6 945-7560
(2)
Not available with PR223 EF
* For T5 480-3840

CURRENT TRANSFORMER SIZE 2.3.2.1 PROTECTION FUNCTIONS OF ELECTRONIC RELEASES
Rating plugs
Type of Rated In [A]
circuit-breaker current I u 400 630 800 1000 1250 1600 2000 2500 3200 4000 5000 6300
800 The protection functions available for the electronic releases are:
E1B 1000-1250
1600
L - Overload protection with inverse long time delay
800
E1N 1000-1250
Function of protection against overloads with inverse long time delay and
1600 constant specific let-through energy; it cannot be excluded.
E2B
1600 L - Overload protection in compliance with Std. IEC 60255-3
2000
Function of protection against overloads with inverse long time delay and trip
1000-1250
E2N 1600
curves complying with IEC 60255-3; applicable in the coordination with fuses
2000 and with medium voltage protections.
800 S - Short-circuit protection with adjustable delay
1000-1250
E2S Function of protection against short-circuit currents with adjustable delay; thanks
1600
2000
to the adjustable delay, this protection is particularly useful when it is necessary
1250 to obtain selective coordination between different devices.
E2L
1600 S2- Double S
2500
E3N This function allows two thresholds of protection function S to be set
3200
1000-1250
independently and activated simultaneously, selectivity can also be achieved
1600 under highly critical conditions.
E3S
2000 D - Directional short-circuit protection with adjustable delay
2500
The directional protection, which is similar to function S, can intervene in a
3200
800
different way according to the direction of the short-circuit current; particularly
1000-1250 suitable in meshed networks or with multiple supply lines in parallel.
1600 I - Short-circuit protection with instantaneous trip
E3H 2000
Function for the instantaneous protection against short-circuit.
2500
3200 EFDP - Early Fault Detection and Prevention
800 Thanks to this function, the release is able to isolate a fault in shorter times than
1250 the zone selectivities currently available on the market.
1600
E3V
2000
Rc - Residual current protection
2500 This function is particularly suitable where low-sensitivity residual current
3200 protection is required and for high-sensitivity applications to protect people
E3L
2000 against indirect contact.
2500
E4S, E4S/f 4000
G - Earth fault protection with adjustable delay
3200 Function protecting the plant against earth faults.
E4H, E4H/f
4000 U - Phase unbalance protection
3200
E4V Protection function which intervenes when an excessive unbalance between
4000
4000
the currents of the single phases protected by the circuit-breaker is detected.
E6H, E6H/f 5000 OT - Self-protection against overtemperature
6300 Protection function controlling the opening of the circuit-breaker when the tem-
3200
perature inside the release can jeopardize its functioning.
4000
E6V
5000 UV - Undervoltage protection
6300 Protection function which intervenes when the phase voltage drops below the
preset threshold.
Rated current In [A] → 400 630 800 1000 1250 1600 2000 2500 3200 4000 5000 6300
L PR121
160÷400 252÷630 320÷800 400÷1000 500÷1250 640÷1600 800÷2000 1000÷2500 1280÷3200 1600÷4000 2000÷5000 2520÷6300
Function PR122/PR123
S PR121 400÷4000 630÷6300 800÷8000 1000÷10000 1250÷12500 1600÷16000 2000÷20000 2500÷25000 3200÷32000 4000÷40000 5000÷50000 6300÷63000
Function PR122/PR123 240÷4000 378÷6300 480÷8000 600÷10000 750÷12500 960÷16000 1200÷20000 1500÷25000 1920÷32000 2400÷40000 3000÷50000 3780÷63000
I PR121
600÷6000 945÷9450 1200÷12000 1500÷15000 1875÷18750 2400÷24000 3000÷30000 3750÷37500 4800÷48000 6000÷60000 7500÷75000 9450÷94500
Function PR122/PR123

OV - Overvoltage protection 2.3.3 RESIDUAL CURRENT DEVICES
Protection function which intervenes when the phase voltage exceeds the preset
threshold. The residual current releases are associated with the circuit-breaker in order to
RV - Residual voltage protection obtain two main functions in a single device:
Protection which identifies anomalous voltages on the neutral conductor. - protection against overloads and short-circuits;
RP - Reverse power protection - protection against indirect contacts (presence of voltage on exposed
Protection which intervenes when the direction of the active power is opposite conductive parts due to loss of insulation).
to normal operation. Besides, they can guarantee an additional protection against the risk of fire
UF - Under frequency protection deriving from the evolution of small fault or leakage currents which are not
This frequency protection detects the reduction of network frequency above detected by the standard protections against overload.
the adjustable threshold, generating an alarm or opening the circuit. Residual current devices having a rated residual current not exceeding 30 mA
OF - Overfrequency protection are also used as a means for additional protection against direct contact in
This frequency protection detects the increase of network frequency above case of failure of the relevant protective means.
the adjustable threshold, generating an alarm or opening the circuit. Their logic is based on the detection of the vectorial sum of the line currents
M - Thermal memory through an internal or external toroid.
Thanks to this function, it is possible to take into account the heating of a This sum is zero under service conditions or equal to the earth fault current (I∆)
component so that the tripping is the quicker the less time has elapsed since in case of earth fault.
the last one.
R - Protection against rotor blockage When the release detects a residual current different from zero, it opens the
Function intervening as soon as conditions are detected, which could lead to circuit-breaker through an opening solenoid.
the block of the rotor of the protected motor during operation.
Iinst - Very fast instantaneous protection against short-circuit As we can see in the picture the protection conductor or the equipotential
This particular protection function has the aim of maintaining the integrity of
conductor have to be installed outside the eventual external toroid.
the circuit-breaker and of the plant in case of high currents requiring delays
lower than those guaranteed by the protection against instantaneous short-
circuit. This protection must be set exclusively by ABB SACE and cannot be Generic distribution system (IT, TT, TN)
excluded.
Dual setting
With this function it is possible to program two different sets of parameters L1
(LSIG) and, through an external command, to switch from one set to the other.
L2
The following table summarizes the types of electronic release and the functions L3
they implement:
N
SERIES SIZE RELEASE PROTECTION FUNCTION
Tmax T2 PR221DS LS L-S or L-I PE
PR221DS I I Circuit-breaker
T4-T5-T6 PR221DS LS/I L-S-I
PR222DS/P LSI L-S-I
PR222DS/P LSIG L-S-I-G
PR222MP LRIU L-R-I-U
PR223DS L-S-I-G
PR223EF L-S-I-G-EFDP Opening
Isomax S7 PR211/P LI L-I solenoid
PR211/P I I
S7-S8 PR212/P LSI L-S-I
Protective conductor
ASDC008002F0201
PR212/P LSIG L-S-I-G
S7 PR212/MP LRIU L-R-I-U Load
Emax E1-E2-E3-E4-E6 PR121/P LI L-I
PR121/P LSI L-S-I
PR121/P LSIG L-S-I-G
PR122/P LI L-I-OT-U-M
PR122/P LSI L-S-I-OT-U-M The operating principle of the residual current release makes it suitable for the
PR122/P LSIG L-S-I-G-OT-U-M distribution systems TT, IT (even if paying particular attention to the latter) and
PR122/P LSIRc L-S-I-Rc-OT-U-M
TN-S, but not in the systems TN-C. In fact, in these systems, the neutral is
PR123/P LSI L-S-S2-I-Rc-D-U-OT-UV-OV-RV-RP-UF-OF-M
PR123/P LSIG L-S-S2-I-G-Rc-D-U-OT-UV-OV-RV-RP-UF-OF-M used also as protective conductor and therefore the detection of the residual
current would not be possible if the neutral passes through the toroid, since the
The settings and curves of the single protection functions are reported in the chapter 3.2.2 vectorial sum of the currents would always be equal to zero.

One of the main characteristics of a residual current release is its minimum In these case it is necessary to use a residual current release classified as type B.
rated residual current I∆n. This represents the sensitivity of the release. The following table shows the main characteristics of ABB SACE residual current
According to their sensitivity to the fault current, the residual current circuit- devices; they can be mounted both on circuit-breakers as well as on switch
breakers are classified as: disconnectors (in case of fault currents to earth lower than the apparatus
breaking capacity), are type A devices and they do not need auxiliary supply
- type AC: a residual current device for which tripping is ensured in case of
since they are self-supplied.
residual sinusoidal alternating current, in the absence of a dc component whether RC221 RC222
suddenly applied or slowly rising; Suitable for circuit-breaker type T1-T2-T3 T1-T2-T3 T4 T5
- type A: a residual current device for which tripping is ensured for residual T1D-T3D T1D-T3D T4D T5D
sinusoidal alternating currents in the presence of specified residual pulsating Primary service voltage [V] 85-500 85-500 85-500 85-500
direct currents, whether suddenly applied or slowly rising. Rated service current [A] 250 250 250 400
Rated residual current trip I∆n [A] 0.03-0.1-0.3- 0.03-0.05-0.1- 0.03-0.05-0.1- 0.03-0.05-0.1-
- type B residual current device for which tripping is ensured for residual 0.5-1-3 0.3-0.5-1 0.3-0.5-1 0.3-0.5-1
sinusoidal alternating currents in presence of specified residual pulsanting 3-5-10 3-5-10 3-5-10
direct currents whether suddenly applied or slowy rising, for residual directs Time limit for non-trip (at 2x I∆n ) [s] Instantaneous Inst.-0.1-0.2- Inst.-0.1-0.2- Inst.-0.1-0.2-
may result from rectifying circuits. 0.3-0.5-1-2-3 0.3-0.5-1-2-3 0.3-0.5-1-2-3
Tolerance over trip times [%] ± 20 ± 20 ± 20
Note: for detailed information, please consult the relevant technical catalogues.
Emax air circuit-breakers can be equipped with a toroid fitted on the back of
Form of residual Correct functioning of residual the circuit-breaker so as to ensure protection against earth faults. In particular,
current current devices the electronic release types able to perform this function are:
Type • PR122/P LSIRc
AC A B • PR122/P LSIG with “Measuring module”
• PR123/P LSIG
which can all be provided for the following types of circuit-breakers: E2 and E3,
Sinusoidal ac suddenly applied both three and four pole version, and E4 (three pole version).
Along with the family of residual current releases illustrated previously, ABB
+ + + SACE is developing the RC223 (B type) residual current release, which can
slowly rising only be combined with the Tmax T4 four-pole circuit-breaker in the fixed or
plug-in version. It is characterized by the same types of reference as the RC222
(S and AE type) release, but can also boast conformity with type B operation,
suddenly applied
which guarantees sensitivity to residual fault currents with alternating, alternating
pulsating and direct current components.
with or without 0,006A + + Apart from the signals and settings typical of the RC222 residual current release,
Pulsating dc the RC223 also allows selection of the maximum threshold of sensitivity to the
residual fault frequency (3 steps: 400 – 700 –1000 Hz). It is therefore possible
to adapt the residual current device to the different requirements of the industrial
plant according to the prospective fault frequencies generated on the load side
slowly rising of the release.
ASDC008003F0201 ABB SACE moulded-case circuit-breakers series Isomax1 and Tmax and air
circuit-breakers series Emax1 can be combined with the switchboard residual
Smooth dc + current relay type RCQ, type A, with separate toroid (to be installed externally
on the line conductors).
1
up to 2000 A rated currents RCQ
Power supply voltage ac [V] 80 ÷ 500
dc [V] 48÷125
Trip threshold adjustements I∆n
In presence of electrical apparatuses with electronic components (computers, 1st range of adjustements [A] 0.03 – 0.05 - 0.1 - 0.3 – 0.5
photocopiers, fax etc.) the earth fault current might assume a non sinusoidal 2nd range of adjustements [A] 1 – 3 – 5 – 10 - 30
shape but a type of a pulsating unidirectional dc shape. In these cases it is Trip time adjustement [s] 0 - 0.1 - 0.2 - 0.3 - 0.5 -
necessary to use a residual current release classified as type A. 0.7 - 1 - 2 - 3 - 5
In presence of rectifying circuits (i.e. single phase connection with capacitive Tolerance over Trip times [%] ± 20
load causing smooth direct current, three pulse star connection or six pulse Note: for detailed information, please consult the relevant technical catalogues.
bridge connection, two pulse connection line-to-line) the earth fault current
might assume a unidirectional dc shape. The versions with adjustable trip times allow to obtain a residual current
protection system coordinated from a discrimination point of view, from the
main switchboard up to the ultimate load.
3.1 Electrical characteristics of circuit-breakers
3 General characteristics 3 General characteristics
3.1 Electrical characteristics of circuit-breakers

Tmax moulded-case circuit-breakers Tmax T1 1P Tmax T1 Tmax T2 Tmax T3 Tmax T4 Tmax T5 Tmax T6
Rated uninterrupted current, Iu [A] 160 160 160 250 250/320 400/630 630/800/1000
Poles
No. Poles [No.] 1 3/4 3/4 3/4 3/4 3/4 3/4
Rated operational voltage, Ue (ac) 50-60 Hz [V] 240 690 690 690 690 690 690
(dc) [V] 125 500 500 500 750 750 750
Rated impulse withstand voltage, Uimp [kV] 8 8 8 8 8 8 8
Rated insulation voltage, Ui [V] 500 800 800 800 1000 1000 1000
Test
Test voltage
voltage at
at industrial
industrial frequency
frequency for
for 11 min.
min. [V] 3000 3000 3000 3000 3500 3500 3500
Rated ultimate short-circuit breaking capacity, Icu B B C N N S H L N S N S H L V N S H L V N S H L
(ac) 50-60 Hz 220/230 V [kA] 25 (*) 25 40 50 65 85 100 120 50 85 70 85 100 200 200 70 85 100 200 200 70 85 100 200
(ac) 50-60 Hz 380/415 V [kA] – 16 25 36 36 50 70 85 36 50 36 50 70 120 200 36 50 70 120 200 36 50 70 100
(ac) 50-60 Hz 440 V [kA] – 10 15 22 30 45 55 75 25 40 30 40 65 100 180 30 40 65 100 180 30 45 50 80
(ac) 50-60 Hz 500 V [kA] – 8 10 15 25 30 36 50 20 30 25 30 50 85 150 25 30 50 85 150 25 35 50 65
(ac) 50-60 Hz 690 V [kA] – 3 4 6 6 7 8 10 5 8 20 25 40 70 80 20 25 40 70 80 20 22 25 30
(dc) 250 V - 2 poles in series [kA] 25 (at 125 V) 16 25 36 36 50 70 85 36 50 36 50 70 100 100 36 50 70 100 100 36 50 70 100
(dc) 250 V - 3 poles in series [kA] – 20 30 40 40 55 85 100 40 55 – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
(dc) 500 V - 2 poles in series [kA] – – – – – – – – – – 25 36 50 70 100 25 36 50 70 100 20 35 50 65
(dc) 500 V - 3 poles in series [kA] – 16 25 36 36 50 70 85 36 50 – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
(dc) 750 V - 3 poles in series [kA] – – – – – – – – – – 16 25 36 50 70 16 25 36 50 70 16 20 36 50
Rated service short-circuit breaking capacity, Ics
(ac) 50-60 Hz 220/230 V [%Icu] 75% 100% 75% 75% 100% 100% 100% 100% 75% 50% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 75%
(ac) 50-60 Hz 380/415 V [%Icu] – 100% 100% 50% (25 kA) 100% 100% 100% 75% (70 kA) 75% 50% (27 kA) 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 75%
(ac) 50-60 Hz 440 V [%Icu] – 100% 75% 50% 100% 100% 100% 75% 75% 50% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 75%
(ac) 50-60 Hz 500 V [%Icu] – 100% 75% 50% 100% 100% 100% 75% 75% 50% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100%(1) 100%(2) 100% 100% 100% 75%
(ac) 50-60 Hz 690 V [%Icu] – 100% 75% 50% 100% 100% 100% 75% 75% 50% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100%(1) 100%(2) 100%(2) 75% 75% 75% 75%
Rated short-circuit making capacity, Icm
(ac) 50-60 Hz 220/230 V [kA] 52.5 52.5 84 105 143 187 220 264 105 187 154 187 220 440 660 154 187 220 440 660 154 187 220 440
(ac) 50-60 Hz 380/415 V [kA] – 32 52.5 75.6 75.6 105 154 187 75.6 105 75.6 105 154 264 440 75.6 105 154 264 440 75.6 105 154 220
(ac) 50-60 Hz 440 V [kA] – 17 30 46.2 63 94.5 121 165 52.5 84 63 84 143 220 396 63 84 143 220 396 63 94.5 105 176
(ac) 50-60 Hz 500 V [kA] – 13.6 17 30 52.5 63 75.6 105 40 63 52.5 63 105 187 330 52.5 63 105 187 330 52.5 73.5 105 143
(ac) 50-60 Hz 690 V [kA] – 4.3 5.9 9.2 9.2 11.9 13.6 17 7.7 13.6 40 52.5 84 154 176 40 52.5 84 154 176 40 46.2 52.5 63
Opening
Opening timetime (415
(415 V)
V) [ms] 7 7 6 5 3 3 3 3 7 6 5 5 5 5 5 6 6 6 6 6 10 9 8 7
Utilization category (EN 60947-2) A A A A A A (630 A) - B (400 A)(3) B (630A-800A)(4) - A (1000A)
Isolation behaviour ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Reference standard IEC 60947-2 IEC 60947-2 IEC 60947-2 IEC 60947-2 IEC 60947-2 IEC 60947-2 IEC 60947-2
Releases: thermomagnetic
T fixed, M fixed TMF ■ – – – – – –
T adjustable, M fixed TMD – ■ ■ ■ ■ (up to 50 A) – –
T adjustable, M adjustable (5…10 x In) TMA – – – – ■ ■ ■ (5)
T adjustable, M fixed (3 x In) TMG – – – ■ – – –
T adjustable, M adjustable (2.5…5 x In) TMG – – – – – ■ –
magnetic only MA – – ■ (MF up to In 12.5 A) ■ ■ – –
electronic PR221DS-LS/I – – ■ – ■ ■ ■
PR221DS-I – – ■ – ■ ■ ■
PR222DS/P-LSI – – – – ■ ■ ■
PR222DS/P-LSIG – – – – ■ ■ ■
PR222DS/PD-LSI – – – – ■ ■ ■
PR222DS/PD-LSIG – – – – ■ ■ ■
PR222MP – – – – ■ ■ ■
PR223DS – – – – ■ ■ ■
PR223EF – – – – ■ (for L version only) ■ (for L version only) ■ (for L version only)
Interchangeability – – – – ■ ■ –
Versions F F F-P F-P F-P-W F-P-W F-W
Terminals fixed FC Cu FC Cu-EF-FC CuAl -HR F-FC Cu-FC CuAl-EF-ES-R F-FC Cu-FC Cu Al-EF-ES-R F-FC Cu-FC CuAl-EF-ES-R-MC F-FC Cu-FC CuAl-EF-ES-R F-EF-ES-FC CuAI-R-RC
plug-in – – F-FC Cu-FC CuAl-EF-ES-R F-FC Cu-FC Cu Al-EF-ES-R EF-ES-HR-VR-FC Cu-FC CuAl EF-ES-HR-VR-FC Cu-FC CuAl –
withdrawable – – – – EF-ES-HR-VR-FC Cu-FC CuAl EF-ES-HR-VR-FC Cu-FC CuAl EF-HR-VR (5)
Fixing on DIN rail – DIN EN 50022 DIN EN 50022 DIN EN 50022 – – –
Mechanical life [No. operations] 25000 25000 25000 25000 20000 20000 20000
[No. hourly operations] 240 240 240 240 240 120 120
Electrical life @ 415 V ac [No. operations] 8000 8000 8000 8000 8000 (250 A) - 6000 (320 A) 7000 (400 A) - 5000 (630 A) 7000 (630 A) - 5000 (800 A) - 4000 (1000 A)
[No. hourly operations] 120 120 120 120 120 60 60
Basic dimensions - fixed version L [mm] 25.4 (1 pole) 76 90 105 105 140 210
4 poles L [mm] – 102 120 140 140 184 280
D [mm] 70 70 70 70 103.5 103.5 103.5
H [mm] 130 130 130 150 205 205 268
Weight fixed 3/4 poles [kg] 0.4 (1 pole) 0.9/1.2 1.1/1.5 2.1/3 2.35/3.05 3.25/4.15 9.5/12
plug-in 3/4 poles [kg] – – 1.5/1.9 2.7/3.7 3.6/4.65 5.15/6.65 –
withdrawable 3/4 poles [kg] – – – – 3.85/4.9 5.4/6.9 12.1/15.1
(1)
TERMINAL CAPTION EF = Front extended FC Cu = Front for copper cables R = Rear orientated VR = Rear in vertical flat bar F = Fixed circuit-breakers W = Withdrawable circuit-breakers (*) The breaking capacity for settings 75% for T5 630 (4)
Icw = 7.6 kA (630 A) Notes: in the plug-in version of T2
ES = Front extended spread FC CuAl = Front for CuAl cables HR = Rear in horizontal flat bar MC = Multicable P = Plug-in circuit-breakers In=16 A and In= 20 A is 16 kA (2)
50% for T5 630 Icw = 10 kA (800 A) and T3 the maximum setting
F = Front (3) (5)
Icw = 5 kA Not available on T6 1000 A is derated by 10% at 40 °C
3.1 Electrical characteristics of circuit-breakers 3.1 Electrical characteristics of circuit-breakers

SACE Isomax moulded-case circuit-breakers
S7 S8
Rated uninterrupted current, Iu [A] 1250 - 1600 2000 - 2500 - 3200
Poles No. 3-4 3-4
Rated operational voltage, Ue (ac) 50-60Hz [V] 690 690
(dc) [V] - -
Rated impulse withstand voltage, Uimp [kV] 8 8
Rated insulation voltage, Ui [V] 800 690
Test voltage at industrial frequency for 1 min. [V] 3000 2500
Rated ultimate short-circuit breaking capacity, Icu S H L H V
(ac) 50-60 Hz 220/230 V [kA] 85 100 200 85 120
(ac) 50-60 Hz 380/415 V [kA] 50 65 100 85 120
(ac) 50-60 Hz 440 V [kA] 40 55 80 70 100
(ac) 50-60 Hz 500 V [kA] 35 45 70 50 70
(ac) 50-60 Hz 690 V [kA] 20 25 35 40 50
(dc) 250 V - 2 poles in series [kA] - - - - -
Rated short-circuit service
breaking capacity, Ics [%Icu] 100% 75% 50% 50% 50%
Rated short-circuit making capacity (415 V) Icm [kA] 105 143 220 187 264
Opening time (415V at Icu) [ms] 22 22 22 20 20
Rated short-time withstand current for 1 s, Icw [kA] 15 (1250A) - 20 (1600A) 35
Utilization category (EN 60947-2) B B
Isolation behaviour
IEC 60947-2, EN 60947-2
Releases: thermomagnetic T adjustable, M adjustable TMA - -
T adjustable, M fixed 2,5 In TMG - -
with microprocessor PR211/P (I-LI) -
PR212/P (LSI-LSIG)
Interchangeability -
Versions F-W F
Terminals fixed F - EF - ES - F (2000-2500A) - VR
FC CuAl (1250A)
HR - VR
plug-in - -
withdrawable (1) EF - HR - VR -
Mechanical life [No. operations / operations per hours] 10000/120 10000/20
Electrical life (at 415 V) [No. operations / operations per hours] 7000(1250A)- 2500(2500A)/20-
5000(1600A)/20 1500(3200A)/10
Basic dimensions, fixed 3/4 poles L [mm] 210/280 406/556
D [mm] 138.5 242
H [mm] 406 400
Weights fixed 3/4 poles [kg] 17 / 22 57/76
plug-in 3/4 poles [kg] - -
withdrawable 3/4 poles [kg] 21.8 / 29.2 -
(1) The withdrawable version circuit-breakers must be fitted KEY TO VERSIONS KEY TO TERMINALS FC CuAl = Front for copper or
with the front flange for the lever operating mechanism or F = Fixed F = Front aluminium cables
with its alternative accessories, such as the rotary handle P = Plug-in EF = Extended front R = Rear threaded
or the motor operator W = Withdrawable ES = Extended spreaded front RC = Rear for copper or aluminium cables
HR = Rear horizontal flat bar
VR = Rear vertical flat bar

Tmax moulded-case circuit-breakers for motor
protection Tmax T2 Tmax T3 Tmax T4 Tmax T5 Tmax T6
Rated uninterrupted current, Iu [A] 160 250 250, 320 400, 630 630, 800, 1000
Rated current, In [A] 1…100 100…200 10…320 320, 400, 630 630, 800, 1000
Poles [No.] 3 3 3 3 3
Rated operational voltage,Ue (ac) 50-60 Hz [V] 690 690 690 690 690
(dc) [V] 500 500 750 750 750
Rated impulse withstand voltage, Uimp [kV] 8 8 8 8 8
Rated insulation voltage, Ui [V] 800 800 1000 1000 1000
Test voltage at industrial frequency for 1 min. [V] 3000 3000 3500 3500 3500
Rated ultimate short-circuit breaking capacity, Icu N S H L N S N S H L V N S H L V N S H L
(ac) 50-60 Hz 220/230 V [kA] 65 85 100 120 50 85 70 85 100 200 300 70 85 100 200 300 70 85 100 200
(ac) 50-60 Hz 380/415 V [kA] 36 50 70 85 36 50 36 50 70 120 200 36 50 70 120 200 36 50 70 100
(ac) 50-60 Hz 440 V [kA] 30 45 55 75 25 40 30 40 65 100 180 30 40 65 100 180 30 45 50 80
(ac) 50-60 Hz 500 V [kA] 25 30 36 50 20 30 25 30 50 85 150 25 30 50 85 150 25 35 50 65
(ac) 50-60 Hz 690 V [kA] 6 7 8 10 5 8 20 25 40 70 80 20 25 40 70 80 20 22 25 30
Rated short-circuit service breaking capacity, Ics [%Icu]
(ac) 50-60 Hz 220/230 V [%Icu] 100% 100% 100% 100% 75% 50% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 75%
(ac) 50-60 Hz 380/415 V [%Icu] 100% 100% 100% 75% (70 kA) 75% 50% (27 kA) 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 75%
(ac) 50-60 Hz 440 V [%Icu] 100% 100% 100% 75% 75% 50% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 75%
(ac) 50-60 Hz 500 V [%Icu] 100% 100% 100% 75% 75% 50% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100%(1) 100% 100% 100% 100% 75%
(ac) 50-60 Hz 690 V [%Icu] 100% 100% 100% 75% 75% 50% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100%(1) 100%(2) 100% 75% 75% 75% 75%
Rated short-circuit making capacity, Icm [kA]
(ac) 50-60 Hz 220/230 V [kA] 143 187 220 264 105 187 154 187 220 440 660 154 187 220 440 660 154 187 220 440
(ac) 50-60 Hz 380/415 V [kA] 75.6 105 154 187 75.6 105 75.6 105 154 264 440 75.6 105 154 264 440 75.6 105 154 220
(ac) 50-60 Hz 440 V [kA] 63 94.5 121 165 52.5 84 63 84 143 220 396 63 84 143 220 396 63 94.5 105 176
(ac) 50-60 Hz 500 V [kA] 52.5 63 75.6 105 40 63 52.5 63 105 187 330 52.5 63 105 187 330 52.5 73.5 105 143
(ac) 50-60 Hz 690 V [kA] 9.2 11.9 13.6 17 7.7 13.6 40 52.5 84 154 176 40 52.5 84 154 176 40 46.2 52.5 63
Opening time (415 V) [ms] 3 3 3 3 7 6 5 5 5 5 5 6 6 6 6 6 10 9 8 7
Utilization category (EN 60947-2) A A A B (400 A)(*) - A (630 A) B (630 A-800 A) - A (1000 A)
(**)
Isolation behaviour ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Reference Standard IEC 60947-2 IEC 60947-2 IEC 60947-2 IEC 60947-2 IEC 60947-2
Protection against short-circuit
Magnetic only release MA ■ (MF up to In 12.5 A) ■ ■ – –
Electronic release PR221DS-I ■ – ■
–
Integrated protection (IEC 60947-4-1)
Electronic release PR222MP – – (for T4 250 N-S-L only) (for T5 400 N-S-L only) ■ (for T6 800 only)
Interchangeability – –
Versions F-P F-P F-P-W F-P-W F-W
Terminals fixed F - FC Cu - FC CuAl - EF - F - FC Cu - FC CuAl - EF - F - FC Cu - FC CuAl - EF - ES - R - MC F - FC Cu - FC CuAl - EF - ES - R F-EF-ES-FCCuAI-R-RC
ES - R ES - R
plug-in F - FC Cu - FC CuAl - EF - F - FC Cu - FC CuAl - EF - EF - ES - FC Cu - FC CuAl - HR - VR EF - ES - FC Cu - FC CuAl - HR - VR –
ES - R ES - R
withdrawable – – EF - ES - FC Cu - FC CuAl - HR - VR EF - ES - FC Cu - FC CuAl - HR - VR EF-HR-VR
Fixing on DIN rail DIN EN 50022 DIN EN 50022 – – –
Mechanical life [No. operations] 25000 25000 20000 20000 20000
[No.hourly operations] 240 240 240 120 120
Electrical life @ 415 V ac
AC [No. operations] 8000 8000 8000 7000 5000
[No.hourly operations] 120 120 120 60 60
Basic fixed version dimensions L [mm] 90 105 105 140 210
D [mm] 70 70 103.5 103.5 103.5
H [mm] 130 150 205 205 268
Weight fixed [kg] 1.1 2.1 2.35 3.25 9.5
plug-in [kg] 1.5 2.7 3.6 5.15 –
withdrawable [kg] – – 3.85 5.4 12.1
TERMINAL CAPTION
F = Front FC CuAl = Front for CuAl cables (**) Icw = 7.6 kA (630 A)
EF = Front extended MC = Multicable Icw = 10 kA (800 A)
ES = Front extended spread HR = Rear in horizontal flat bar (1)
75% for T5 630 A
FC Cu = Front for copper cables VR = Rear in vertical flat bar (2)
50% for T5 630 A
R = Rear orientated (*) Icw = 5 kA

SACE Isomax moulded-case circuit-breakers for motor
protection
S7 S7
Rated uninterrupted, Iu [A] 1250 / 1600 1250
Rated current, In [A] 1000, 1250 / 1600 1000
Poles No 3 3
Rated operational voltage (ac) 50-60 Hz, Ue [V] 690 690
Test voltage at industrial frequency for 1 minute [V] 3000 3000
Rated ultimate short-circuit braking capacity, Icu S H L S H
(ac) 50-60Hz 220/230V [kA] 85 100 200 85 100
(ac) 50-60Hz 380/415V [kA] 50 65 100 50 65
(ac) 50-60Hz 440V [kA] 40 55 80 40 55
(ac) 50-60Hz 500V [kA] 35 45 70 35 45
(ac) 50-60Hz 690V [kA] 20 25 35 20 25
Rated service short-circuit braking capacity, Ics [%Icu] 100% 75% 505 100% 75%
Rated short-circuit making capacity (415Vac), Icm [kA] 105 143 220 105 143
Opening time (415Vac at Icu) [ms] 22 22 22 22 22
Utilization category (EN 60947-2) B B
Iinsulation behaviour
Reference standard
IEC 60947-2, EN60947-2
IEC 60947-4-1, EN60947-4-1 –
Microprocessor-based release PR211/P (I) PR212/MP (L-R-I-U)
Interchangeability
Versions F-W F-W
Terminals
Fixed F - EF - ES - FCCuAI (1250A) - HR - VR F - EF - ES - FCCuAI - HR - VR
Plug-in – –
Withdrawable EF - HR - VR EF - HR - VR
[No. of operations] 10000 10000
Mechanical life [Operations per hour] 120 120
L [mm] 210 210
D [mm] 138.5 138.5
Basic dimensions, fixed 3 poles H [mm] 406 406
3 poles fixed [kg] 17 17
3 poles plug-in [kg] - -
Weight 3 poles withdrawable [kg] 21.8 21.8
KEY TO VERSIONS KEY TO TERMINALS FC CuAl = Front for copper RC = Rear for copper or aluminium cables
F = Fixed F = Front or aluminium cables HR = Rear horizontal flat bar
P = Plug-in EF = Extended front R = Rear threaded VR = Rear vertical flat bar
W= Withdrawable ES = Extended spreaded
front

SACE Emax air circuit-breakers
Common data E1 E2 E3 E4 E6
Voltages Performance levels B N B N S L N S H V L S H V H V
Rated operational voltage Ue [V] 690 ~
Currents: rated uninterrupted current (at 40 °C) Iu [A] 800 800 1600 1000 800 1250 2500 1000 800 800 2000 4000 3200 3200 4000 3200
Rated insulation voltage Ui [V] 1000
[A] 1000 1000 2000 1250 1000 1600 3200 1250 1000 1250 2500 4000 4000 5000 4000
Rated impulse withstand
voltage Uimp [kV] 12 [A] 1250 1250 1600 1250 1600 1250 1600 6300 5000
Test voltage at industrial [A] 1600 1600 2000 1600 2000 1600 2000 6300
frequency for 1 min. [V] 3500 ~ [A] 2000 2500 2000 2500
Service temperature [°C] -25....+70 [A] 3200 2500 3200
Storage temperature [°C] -40....+70 [A] 3200
Frequency f [Hz] 50 - 60 Neutral pole current-carrying capacity for 3-pole CBs [%Iu] 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 50 50 50 50 50
Number of poles 3-4 Rated ultimate breaking capacity under short-circuit Icu
Version Fixed -Withdrawable 220/230/380/400/415 V ~ [kA] 42 50 42 65 85 130 65 75 100 130 130 75 100 150 100 150
440 V ~ [kA] 42 50 42 65 85 110 65 75 100 130 110 75 100 150 100 150
500/525 V ~ [kA] 42 50 42 55 65 85 65 75 100 100 85 75 100 130 100 130
660/690 V ~ [kA] 42 50 42 55 65 85 65 75 85 (2) 100 85 75 85 (2) 100 100 100
Rated service breaking capacity under short-circuit Ics
220/230/380/400/415 V ~ [kA] 42 50 42 65 85 130 65 75 85 100 130 75 100 125 100 125
440 V ~ [kA] 42 50 42 65 85 110 65 75 85 100 110 75 100 125 100 125
500/525 V ~ [kA] 42 50 42 55 65 65 65 75 85 85 65 75 100 130 100 100
660/690 V ~ [kA] 42 50 42 55 65 65 65 75 85 85 65 75 85 100 100 100
Rated short-time withstand current Icw (1s) [kA] 42 50 42 55 65 10 65 75 75 85 15 75 100 100 100 100
(3s) [kA] 36 36 42 42 42 – 65 65 65 65 – 75 75 75 85 85
Rated making capacity under short-circuit (peak value) Icm
220/230/380/400/415 V ~ [kA] 88.2 105 88.2 143 187 286 143 165 220 286 286 165 220 330 220 330
440 V ~ [kA] 88.2 105 88.2 143 187 242 143 165 220 286 242 165 220 330 220 330
500/525 V ~ [kA] 75.6 75.6 84 121 143 187 143 165 187 220 187 165 220 286 220 286
660/690 V ~ [kA] 75.6 75.6 84 121 143 187 143 165 187 220 187 165 187 220 220 220
Utilisation category (according to CEI EN 60947-2) B B B B B A B B B B A B B B B B
Isolation behaviour (according to CEI EN 60947-2)
O vercurrent protection
Electronic releases for AC applications
Operating times
Closing time (max) [ms] 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80
Breaking time for I<Icw (max) (1) [ms] 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70
Breaking time for I>Icw (max) [ms] 30 30 30 30 30 12 30 30 30 30 12 30 30 30 30 30
Overall dimensions
Fi xed: H = 418 mm - D = 302 mm L (3/4 poles) [mm] 296/386 296/386 404/530 566/656 782/908
i thdrawable: H = 461 mm - D = 396.5 mm L (3/4 poles)
W [mm] 324/414 324/414 432/558 594/684 810/936
W eights (circuit-breaker complete with releases and CTs, including accessories)
(1) Without intentional delays
(2) Performance at 600 V is Fixed 3/4 poles [kg] 45/54 45/54 50/61 50/61 50/61 52/63 66/80 66/80 66/80 66/80 72/83 97/117 97/117 97/117 140/160 140/160
100 kA i thdrawable 3/4 poles (including fixed part)
W [kg] 70/82 70/82 78/93 78/93 78/93 80/95 104/125 104/125 104/125 104/125 110/127 147/165 147/165 147/165 210/260 210/240
SACE Emax air circuit-breakers E1 B-N E2 B-N-S E2 L E3 N-S-H-V E3 L E4 S-H-V E6 H-V

Rated uninterrupted current (at 40 °C) Iu [A] 800 1000-1250 1600 800 1000-1250 1600 2000 1250 1600 800 1000-1250 1600 2000 2500 3200 2000 2500 3200 4000 3200 4000 5000 6300
Mechanical life with regular ordinary maintenance [No. operations x 1000] 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 15 15 15 15 12 12 12 12
Operation frequency [Operations/hour] 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60
Electrical life (440 V ~) [No. operations x 1000] 10 10 10 15 15 12 10 4 3 12 12 10 9 8 6 2 1.8 7 5 5 4 3 2
(690 V ~) [No. operations x 1000] 10 8 8 15 15 10 8 3 2 12 12 10 9 7 5 1.5 1.3 7 4 5 4 2 1.5
Operation frequency [Operations/hour] 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 10 10 10 10 10 10
3.1 Electrical characteristics of circuit breakers 3.2 Trip curves

SACE Emax air circuit-breakers with full-size neutral 3.2 Trip curves
conductor
E4S/f E4H/f E6H/f 3.2.1 Trip curves of thermomagnetic and magnetic only releases
Rated uninterrupted current (at 40 °C) Iu [A] 4000 3200 4000
[A] 4000 5000 The overload protection function must not trip the breaker in 2 hours for current
6300 values which are lower than 1.05 times the set current, and must trip within 1.3
Number of poles 4 4 4 times the set current. By “cold trip conditions”, it is meant that the overload
Rated operational voltage Ue [V ~] 690 690 690 occurs when the circuit-breaker has not reached normal working temperature
Rated ultimate short-circuit breaking capacity Icu (no current flows through the circuit-breaker before the anomalous condition
220/230/380/400/415 V ~ [kA] 80 100 100 occurs); on the contrary “hot trip conditions” refer to the circuit-breaker having
440 V ~ [kA] 80 100 100 reached the normal working temperature with the rated current flowing through,
500/525 V ~ [kA] 75 100 100 before the overload current occurs. For this reason “cold trip conditions” times
660/690 V ~ [kA] 75 100 100 are always greater than “hot trip conditions” times.
Rated service short-circuit breaking capacity Ics The protection function against short-circuit is represented in the time-current
220/230/380/400/415 V ~ [kA] 80 100 100 curve by a vertical line, corresponding to the rated value of the trip threshold I3.
440 V ~ [kA] 80 100 100 In accordance with the Standard IEC 60947-2, the real value of this threshold
500/525 V ~ [kA] 75 100 100 is within the range 0.8·I3 and 1.2·I3. The trip time of this protection varies
660/690 V ~ [kA] 75 100 100 according to the electrical characteristics of the fault and the presence of other
Rated short-time withstand current Icw devices: it is not possible to represent the envelope of all the possible situations
(1s) [kA] 75 85 100 in a sufficiently clear way in this curve; therefore it is better to use a single
(3s) [kA] 75 75 85 straight line, parallel to the current axis. All the information relevant to this trip
Rated short-circuit making capacity Icm area and useful for the sizing and coordination of the plant are represented in
220/230/380/400/415 V ~ [kA] 176 220 220 the limitation curve and in the curves for the specific let-through energy of the
440 V ~ [kA] 176 220 220 circuit-breaker under short-circuit conditions.
500/525 V ~ [kA] 165 220 220
660/690 V ~ [kA] 165 220 220
Utilization category (in accordance with IEC 60947-2) B B B
Isolation behavior (in accordance with IEC 60947-2) ■ ■ ■
Overall dimensions
Fixed: H = 418 mm - D = 302 mm L [mm] 746 746 1034
Withdrawable: H = 461 - D = 396.5 mm L [mm] 774 774 1062
Weight (circuit-breaker complete with releases and CT, not including accessories)
Fixed [kg] 120 120 165
Withdrawable (including fixed part) [kg] 170 170 250
3.2 Trip curves

Trip curve Trip curve
thermomagnetic thermomagnetic
release release
T1 160 T1 160
104 104
TMD TMD
In = 16÷63 A In = 80÷160 A
103 103
t [s] t [s]
102 102
10 10
1 1
In = 16 A ⇒ I3 = 500 A
1SDC210039F0004
In = 20 A ⇒ I3 = 500 A
10-1 In = 25 A ⇒ I3 = 500 A 10-1
In = 32 A ⇒ I3 = 500 A
In = 40 A ⇒ I3 = 500 A I3 = 10 x In
In = 50÷63 A ⇒ I3 = 10 x In
10-2 10-2
1 10 102 10-1 1 10 102
x I1 x I1
3.2 Trip curves 3.2 Trip curves

release release
T2 160 T2 160
104 104
MF TMD
I3 = 13 x In In = 1.6÷100 A
103 103
t [s] t [s]
102 102
Overload limit
10 10
1 1
In = 1,6÷12,5 A ⇒ I3 = 10xIn
In = 16 A ⇒ I3 = 500 A
1SDC210045F0004
1SDC210040F0004
I3 = 13 x In In = 20 A ⇒ I3 = 500 A
10-1 10-1 In = 25 A ⇒ I3 = 500 A
In = 32 A ⇒ I3 = 500 A
In = 40 A ⇒ I3 = 500 A
In = 50÷100 A ⇒ I3 = 10 x In
10-2 10-2
1 10 102 1 10 102
x In x I1

release release
T2 160 T2 160/T3 250
104 104
TMD MA
In = 125÷160 A I3 = 6…12 x In
103 103
t [s] t [s]
102 Overload limit

102
10
10
1
1
1SDC210046F0004
1SDC210041F0004
I3 = 6…12 x In
10-1
10-1
I3 = 10 x In
10-2
10-2 10
10-1 10 1 102
1 102 x In
x I1

release release
T3 250 T3 250
104 104
TMD TMG
In = 63÷250 A In = 63÷250 A
103 103
t [s] t [s]
102 102
10 10
1 1 In = 63 A ⇒ I3 = 400 A
In = 80 A ⇒ I3 = 400 A
In = 100 A ⇒ I3 = 400 A
In = 125 A ⇒ I3 = 400 A
In = 160 A ⇒ I3 = 480 A
1SDC210073F0004
1SDC210042F0004
10-1 10-1 In = 200 A ⇒ I3 = 600 A
In = 250 A ⇒ I3 = 750 A
I3 = 10 x In
10-2 10-2
10-1 1 10 102 10-1 1 10 102
x I1 x I1

release release
T4 250 T4 250
104 104
MA TMD
I3 = 6…14 x In In = 20÷50 A
103 103
t [s] t [s]
102 Overload limit 102
10 10
1 1
In = 20 A ⇒ I3 = 320 A
1SDC210076F0004
1SDC210074F0004
I3 = 6…14 x In
10-1 10-1 In = 32-50 A ⇒ I3 = 10 x In
10-2 10-2
1 10 102 10-1 1 10 102
x In x I1

release release
T4 250/320 T5 400/630
104 104
TMA TMA
In = 80÷250 A In = 320÷500 A
103 103
t [s] t [s]
102 102
10 10
1 1
1SDC210033F0004
1SDC210034F0004
10-1 10-1
I3 = 5…10 x In I3 = 5…10 x In
10-2 10-2
10-1 1 10 102 10-1 1 10 102
x I1 x I1

release release
T5 400/630 T6 630
104 104
TMG TMA
In = 320÷500 A In = 630 A
103 103
t [s]
t [s]
102 102
10
101
1
1
1SDC210075F0004
10-1
I3 = 2,5…5 x In 10-1 I3 = 5…10 x In
GSISO209-2
10-2
10-1 1 10 102 10-2
x I1
10-1 1 1,05 101 102

x In

Trip curve Example of thermomagnetic release setting
thermomagnetic
Consider a circuit-breaker type T1 160 In 160 and select, using the trimmer for
release
thermal regulation, the current threshold, for example at 144 A; the magnetic
T6 800 trip threshold, fixed at 10·ln, is equal to 1600 A.
104
TMA Note that, according to the conditions under which the overload occurs, that is
either with the circuit-breaker at full working temperature or not, the trip of the
In = 800 A
thermal release varies considerably. For example, for an overload current of
600 A, the trip time is between 1.2 and 3.8 s for hot trip, and between 3.8 and
103
14.8 s for cold trip.
For fault current values higher than 1600 A, the circuit-breaker trips
t [s] instantaneously through magnetic protection.
102 T1 160 - In 160 Time-Current curves

t [s] 104
101
103
1
102
10-1 I3 = 5…10 x In
14.8 s
101
GSISO210
3.8 s
10-2
1 1.2 s
1,05
10-1 1 101 102
x I1
600 A
10-1
1SDC008005F0001
10-2
101 102 103 104
I [A]

3.2.2 Trip curves of electronic releases S FUNCTION (short-circuit protection with time delay) (I2t=k, t=k)
Introduction t [s] 104
The following figures show the curves of the single protection functions available
in the electronic releases. The setting ranges and resolution are referred to
setting operations to be carried out locally.
L FUNCTION (overload protection)
103
t [s] 104
103 I1 I2
102
102
101
t1 I2t=k
101
1 t2
1
1SDC008006F0001
t=k
1SDC008007F0001
10-1
10-1
10-2
10-2
10 -1 1 1 102 x In
I1 t1 10 10-1 1 101 102
PR221 (0.4 – 0.44 – 0.48 – 0.52 – 0.56 – 0.6 – 0.64 – 0.68 – 0.72 – 3s - 6s (@ 6 x I1) for T2 I2 t2 x In
0.76 – 0.8 – 0.84 – 0.88 - 0.92 – 0.96 – 1) x In 3s - 12s (@ 6 x I1) for T4, T5, T6
PR221 (1 – 1.5 – 2 – 2.5 – 3 – 3.5 – 4.5 – 5.5 – 6.5 – 7 – 7.5 – 8 – 0.1s - 0.25s (@ 8 x I2)
PR222 (0.4…1) x In with step 0.02 x In 3s - 6s - 9s - 18(1)s (@ 6xI1) 8.5 – 9 – 10 – OFF) x In
PR223 (0.18…1) x In with step 0.01 x In 3…18s(1) (@ 6xI1) PR222 0.6…10 x In with step 0.1 x In 0.05s - 0.1s - 0.25s - 0.5s (@ 8 x In)
PR211 (0.4 – 0.5 – 0.6 – 0.7 – 0.8 – 0.9 – 0.95 – 1) x In A= 3s; B= 6s; C= 12s; D= 18s (@ 6 x I1) PR223 (0.6…10-OFF) x In with step 0.1 x In 0.05s - 0.5s (@ 8 x In)
PR212 (0.4 – 0.5 – 0.55 – 0.6 – 0.65 – 0.7 – 0.75 – 0.8 – 0.85 – A= 3s; B= 6s; C= 12s; D= 18s (@ 6 x I1) PR211
0.875 – 0.9 – 0.925 – 0.95 - 0.975 – 1) x In (1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 6 – 8 – 10 – OFF) x In A= 0.05s; B= 0.1s; C= 0.25s; D= 0.5s
PR212 (@ 8 x I2)
PR121 (0.4 – 0.425 – 0.45 – 0.475 – 0.5 – 0.525 – 0.55 – 0.575 –
0.6 – 0.625 – 0.65 – 0.675 – 0.7 – 0.725 – 0.75 – 0.775 – 3 –12 –24 –36 –48 –72 –108 – 144 s (2)
PR121 (1 – 1.5 – 2 – 2.5 – 3 – 3.5 – 4.5 – 5.5 – 6.5 – 7 – 7.5 – 8 – 0.1-0.2-0.3-0.4-0.5-0.6-0.7-0.8s (@I>I2 with t=k)
0.8 – 0.825 – 0.85 – 0.875 – 0.9 – 0.925 – 0.95 – 0.975) x In (@ 3 x I1) 8.5 – 9 – 10 – OFF) x In 0.1-0.2-0.3-0.4-0.5-0.6-0.7-0.8s (@10xIn with I2 t=k)
PR122 PR122 (0.6 … 10 – OFF) x In with step 0.1 x In 0.05…0.8s with step 0.01s (@I>I2 with t=k)
(0.4 … 1) x In with step 0.01 x In 3 … 144s with step 3s (@ 3 x I1) PR123(2)
0.05…0.8s with step 0.01s (@10xIn with I2 t=k)
PR123
(1)
for T4 In = 320 A and T5 In = 630 A → t1 = 12s. Here below the tolerances:
Here below the tolerances: I2 t2
I1 t1
(3) ± 10 % (T4-T5-T6) ± 10 % up to 6 x In (T4-T5-T6)
PR221 1.1÷1.3 x I1 ± 10 % (up to 6 x In) PR221 ± 10 % (up to 2 x In) (T2) ± 20 % over to 6 x In (T4-T5-T6)
± 20 % (over 6 x In) ± 20 % (over 2 x In) (T2) ± 20 % (T2)
PR222 1.1÷1.3 x I1 ± 10 %
PR222 ± 10 % ± 10%
(1)
PR223 1.1÷1.3 x I1 ± 10 % PR223

(4)
PR221 ± 10 % (up to 2 x In) PR211 ± 10 %
PR211 1.05÷1.3 x I1 ± 20 %
± 20 % (over 2 x In) PR212
PR212
the better of the two figures:
PR121 ± 10 % (up to 4 x In) PR121 ± 7 % (up to 4 x In) ± 10 % or ± 40 ms (t=k)
PR121 1.05÷1.2 x I1 ± 20 % (over 4 x In) PR122 ± 10 % (over 4 x In)
PR122 PR123 ± 15 % (up to 4 x In, with I2t=k)
(1)
± 20 % (over 4 x In, with I2t=k)
For T4 In=320A and T5 In=630A → t1=12s, (2) The minimum trip values is 1 s, regardless of type of curve set
(2)
(self protection), (3) For T4-T5-T6, (4) For T2. Settings valid for function S2 too.

I FUNCTION (short-circuit istantaneous protection) G FUNCTION (earth fault protection) (I2t=k, t=k)
t [s] 104 t [s] 104
103 103
I4
102 102
101
101
I3
1
1
t4
10-1 t=k
1SDC008008F0001
1SDC008009F0001
10-1
I2t=k
10-2
10-1 1 101 102
10-2
I3 x In
10-1 1 101 102
PR221 (1 – 1.5 – 2 – 2.5 – 3 – 3.5 – 4.5 – 5.5 – 6.5 – 7 – 7.5 – 8 – 8.5 – 9 – 10 – OFF) x In x In
PR222 (1.5 – 2.5 – 3 – 4 – 3.5 – 4.5 – 5 – 5.5 – 6.5 – 7 – 7.5 – 8 – 9 – 9.5 – 10.5 – 12 – OFF) x In(1) I4 t4
PR223 (1.5 … 12 – OFF) x In(1) with step 0.1 x In PR222 (0.2 – 0.25 – 0.45 – 0.55 – 0.75 – 0.8 – 1 – OFF) x In 0.1s up to 3.15x14; 0.2s up to 2.25x14
0.4s up to 1.6x14; 0.8s up to 1.10x14
PR211 (1.5 – 2 – 4 – 6 – 8 – 10 – 12 – OFF) x In
PR212 PR212 (0.2 – 0.3 – 0.4 – 0.6 – 0.8 – 0.9 – 1 – OFF) x In A= 0.1s; B= 0.2s; C= 0.4s; D= 0.8s (@ 4 x I4)
PR121 (1.5 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 – 6 – 7 – 8 – 9 – 10 – 11 – 12 – 13 – 14 – 15 OFF) x In PR223 (0.2…1 – OFF) x In with step 0.01 x In 0.1…0.8s with step 0.01s
PR122 PR121 (0.2 – 0.3 – 0.4 – 0.6 – 0.8 – 0.9 – 1 – OFF) x In t4= 0.1 – 0.2 – 0.4 – 0.8 s (@ 4 x I4, with I2t=k)
(1.5 … 15 – OFF) x In with step 0.1 x In t4= 0.1 – 0.2 – 0.4 – 0.8 s (@ I > I4, with t=k)
PR123
PR122 (0.2…I – OFF) x In with step 0.02 x In t4= 0.1…1 s with step 0.05 (@ 4 x I4, with I2t=k)
(1) PR123 t4= 0.1…1 s with step 0.05 (@ I > I4, with t=k)
for T4 In = 320 A and T5 In = 630 A →I3 max = 10 x In
Here below the tolerances:

I3 Tripping time: Here below the tolerances:
I4 t4
PR221 ± 10 % (T4-T5-T6) ≤ 25 ms
± 20 % (T2) PR222 ± 10 % ± 20 %
PR223
PR222 ± 10 % ≤ 25 ms
PR223 PR212 ± 20 % ± 20 %
PR211 PR121 ± 15 % (I2t=k)
± 20 % ≤ 25 ms PR122 ±7%
PR212 the better of the two figures: ± 10 % or ± 40 ms (t=k)
PR123
PR121
PR122 ± 10 % ≤ 30 ms
PR123
The given tolerances are valid only if the release is self-supplied in steady state condition with two-phase or three-phase power supply.

electronic releases electronic releases
T2 160
104 T2 160
PR221DS 0,4-0,44-0,48-0,52-0,56-0,60-0,64-0,68-
10 4
0,72-0,76-0,80-0,84-0,88-0,92-0,96-1
PR221DS 0,4-0,44-0,48-0,52-0,56-0,60-0,64-0,68-
0,72-0,76-0,80-0,84-0,88-0,92-0,96-1
L-S Functions 0,4 1
103
L-I Functions 0,4 1
1 1
1,5 10 3
2 1,5
t [s]
2,5 2
3 t [s]
B 2,5
102 B 3,5 3
4,5 6,5 7 7,5 8 8,5 9 10 B 3,5
A 10 2 B
A 5,5 4,5 6,5 7 7,5 8 8,5 9 10
A
A 5,5
101 C
102 10 1
B Up to In = 10 A
102
Up to In = 10 A
1
1
10-1
10 -1
10-2
10 -2
TSTM0006
TSTM0005
10-3
10-1 1 101 10-1 1 10
x In I [kA] 10 -3
10 -1 1 10 1 10 -1 1 10
x In I [kA]

Trip curve
electronic releases Trip curve
T4 250/320 electronic releases
T5 400/630 T4 250/320
T6 630/800/1000 T5 400/630
PR221DS 104 104
0,4-0,44-0,48-0,52-0,56-0,6-0,64-0,68-0,72-0,76-0,8-0,84-0,88-0,92-0,96-1 T6 630/800/1000 0,4-0,44-0,48-0,52-0,56-0,6-0,64-0,68-0,72-0,76-0,8-0,84-0,88-0,92-0,96-1
L-I Functions PR221DS

0,4 1 1,5 2 2,5 3 3,5 4,5 5,5 6,5 7 7,5 8 8,5 9 10 1,5 2 2,5 3 3,5 4,5 5,5 6,5 7 7,5 8 8,5 9 10
L-S Functions 0,4 1
103 103
1 1
t [s] t [s]
102 102
10 10
102 102
1 1
10-1 10-1
1SDC210004F0004
1SDC210005F0004
10-2 10-2
T4 T5 T5 T6 T6 T4 T5 T5 T6 T6
400 630 630 800 400 630 630 800
1000 1000
10-3 10-3
10-1 1 10 1 10 10-1 1 10 1 10
x In I [kA] x In I [kA]

T4 250/320 T4 250/320
T5 400/630 T5 400/630
104 104
T6 630/800/1000 0,4-0,42-0,44-0,46-0,48-0,5-0,52-0,54-0,56-0,58-0,6-0,62-0,64-0,66-0,68- T6 630/800/1000 0,4-0,42-0,44-0,46-0,48-0,5-0,52-0,54-0,56-0,58-0,6-0,62-0,64-0,66-0,68-
0,7-0,72-0,74-0,76-0,78-0,8-0,82-0,84-0,86-0,88-0,9-0,92-0,94-0,96-0,98-1 0,7-0,72-0,74-0,76-0,78-0,8-0,82-0,84-0,86-0,88-0,9-0,92-0,94-0,96-0,98-1
PR222DS/P PR222DS/P
PR222DS/PD 0,18 (1) 0,4 1 1,2 1,8 2,4 3 3,6 4,2 5,8 6,4 7 7,6 8,2 8,8 9,4 10
PR222DS/PD 0,18 (1) 0,4 1 1,8 2,4 3 3,6 4,2 5,8 6,4 7 7,6 8,2 8,8 9,4 10
PR223DS 103 PR223DS 103
PR223EF* 5,5 PR223EF*
2,5 3 4 4,5 5 5,5
*without Vaux t [s] 2,5 3 4 6,5 *without Vaux t [s] 6,5
4,5 7 7
L-S-I Functions 102 0,6 5 7,5 L-S-I Functions 102 7,5
(I2t const = ON) 8 (I2t const = OFF) 8
1,5 9 1,5 9
0,6 1,2
9,5 9,5
10 10,5 10 10,5
12 12
102 102
I2t ON I2t OFF
1 1
10-1 10-1
1SDC210001F0004
1SDC210002F0004
10-2 10-2
T4 T5 T5 T6 T6 T4 T5 T5 T6 T6
400 630 630 800 400 630 630 800
1000 1000
10-3 10-3
10-1 1 10 1 10 10-1 1 10 1 10
x In I [kA] x In I [kA]
Note:
The dotted curve of function L corresponds to the maximum delay (t1) which can be set Note:
at 6xl1, in the case where 320 A CTs are used for T4 and 630 A for T5. For all the CT The dotted curve of function L corresponds to the maximum delay (t1) which can be set
sizes t1=18s, except with 320 A CT (T4) and 630 A (T5) where t1=12s. at 6xl1, in the case where 320 A CTs are used for T4 and 630 A for T5. For all the CT
For T4 In = 320 A, T5 In = 630 A and T6 In = 1000 A ⇒ I3 max = 10 x In. sizes t1=18s, except with 320 A CT (T4) and 630 A (T5) where t1=12s.
For PR223DS and PR223EF the electronic settings only are available. For T4 In = 320 A, T5 In = 630 A and T6 In = 1000 A ⇒ I3 max = 10 x In.
For PR223DS and PR223EF the electronic settings only are available.
(1)
For PR223DS and PR223EF only.
(1)
For PR223DS and PR223EF only.

electronic releases electronic releases 104
T4 250/320 T4L 250/320
T5 400/630 T5L 400/630
104
T6 630/800/1000 T6L 630/800/1000 0,18 1
103
PR222DS/P PR223EF
PR222DS/PD 0,2 0,25 0,45 0,55 0,75 1 with Vaux
PR223DS 103 0,8 L-S-EF Functions
PR223EF (I2t const = ON) 0,6 10
t [s] 102
G Function
102 t [s]
EF
12
101
10
1
1
I4=0.2…0.49 In prevention at 4 In
I4=0.5…0.79 In prevention at 6 In
I4=0.8…1.00 In prevention at 8 In 10-1
10-1
I2t ON
1SDC210003F0004
10-2
10-2
10-3 10-3
10-1 1 10 102 10-1 1 101 102
x In x In
Note:
Note: For all the CT sizes the maximum delay t1 is equal to 18s, except for 320 A CT (T4) and
For PR223DS and PR223EF the electronic settings only are available. 630 A (T5) where t1=12s.
For T4 In = 320 A, T5 In = 630 A and T6 In = 630 A ⇒ I3 max = 10 x In.
Only the electronic settings are available.

electronic releases 104 electronic releases
T4L 250/320
T5L 400/630 T2 160
0,18 1 104
T6L 630/800/1000 PR221DS-I
103
PR223EF
I Function 1 1,5 2 2,5 3 3,5 4,5 5,5 6,5 7 7,5 8 8,5 9 10
with Vaux
L-S-EF Functions 103
(I2t const = OFF) 0,6 10
102
t [s]
t [s]
EF 102
12 Overload limit
101
10
102
1
10-1
10-1
I t OFF
2
1SDC210047F0004
10-2
10-2
10-3 10-3
10-1 1 101 102 10-1 1 10 10-1 1 10
x In x In Iu [kA]
Note:
For all the CT sizes the maximum delay t1 is equal to 18s, except for 320 A CT (T4) and
630 A (T5) where t1=12s.
For T4 In = 320 A, T5 In = 630 A and T6 In = 630 A ⇒ I3 max = 10 x In.
Only the electronic settings are available.

T4 250/320 T4 250
T5 400 105
T5 400/630
104 T6 800
T6 630/800/1000 1 1,5 2 2,5 3 3,5 4,5 5,2 6,5 7 7,5 8 8,5 9 10
PR221DS-I PR222MP hot
L Function 104 cold
I Function 103
(hot and cold trip)
t [s] t [s]
102
103
Overload limit Overload limit
T4 320 - T5 630 T4 250 - T5 400
T6 1000 T6 630 / 800
10
102 102
10A
1
10
30
10-1 20
10
30
10A
1SDC210006F0004
1 20
10-2
10
1SDC210048F0004
10A
T4 T5 T5 T6 T6
400 630 630 800
1000
10-3 10-1
10-1 1 10 1 10
x In I [kA]
1,05
10-1 1 10 102
x I1
I1 t1
PR222MP (0.4 ÷ 1) x In with step 0.01 x In 4 – 8 – 16 – 24 s
Here the tolerances

I1 t1
PR222MP According to IEC 60947-4-1 According to IEC 60947-4-1

T4 250 T4 250
105 105
T5 400 T5 400
T6 800 T6 800
PR222MP hot PR222MP U function
R-U Functions 104 R function
L Function 104
(hot trip wiiith 1 or 2
phases supplied)
t [s]
t [s] 103 103
102 102 4
5
6
7
10A 8
10
10 10
10
7
30
1 1 1
20
10
1SDC210050F0004
1SDC210049F0004
10A
10-1 10-1
1,05
10-1 1
1,05
10 102 10-1 1 10 102
x I1 x I1
I1 t1 R I5 t5
PR222MP (0.4 ÷ 1) x In with step 0.01 x In 4 – 8 – 16 – 24 s PR222MP (3 - 4- 5 - 6 - 7 - 8 - 10 - OFF) x I1 1 – 4 – 7 – 10 s
U I6 t6
PR222MP ON (0.4 x I1) - OFF 4s
Here the tolerances
I1 t1 Here the tolerances
PR222MP ±15% ±15% R I5 t5
PR222MP ± 15 % ± 10 %
U I6 t6
PR222MP ± 15 % ± 10 %

T4 250 S7
103 104
T5 400 PR211/P
T6 800 13
PR222MP 12 L-I Functions 0,5 0,7 0,95

11 0,4 0,6 0,8 1
I Functions 102 10 103 0,9
9
1,5
t [s] 8 t [s] 2
D
10 7 C
102
B 4
6
A 6
8
1 D 10
101 C 12
B
A
10-1 1
10-2 10-1
1SDC210051F0004
10-3 10-2
GSIS0211
1,05 1,05
10-1 1 10 102 10-1 1 101 102
x In
x In
Note: for PR211/P-I releases, consider the curves relevant to function I only.
I3
PR222MP (6 - 7- 8 - 9 - 10 - 11 - 12 - 13) x In
Here the tolerances

I3
PR222MP ± 15 %

S7 - S8 S7 - S8
PR212/P 104 PR212/P 104
0,4-0,5-0,55-0,6-0,65-0,7-0,75-0,8- 0,4-0,5-0,55-0,6-0,65-0,7-0,75-0,8-
L-S-I Functions, 0,85-0,875-0,9-0,925-0,95-0,975-1 L-S-I Functions, 0,85-0,875-0,9-0,925-0,95-0,975-1
S inverse short 0,4 1

S inverse short 0,4 1
delay 103 delay 103
(I2t =constant) (t=constant)
1,5 1,5
t [s] 2 t [s] 2
D D
C C
102 102
B 4 B 4
1
A 6 A 1 6
D 8 8
2 D 10 D 10
101 C 101
C 12 2 C 12
3
B B 3 B
4
A A 4 A
6
1 8 1 6 8 10
10 D
C
I2t ON I2t OFF
10-1 10-1 B
A
GSIS0212
GSIS0213
10-2 10-2
1,05 1,05
10-1 1 101 102 10-1 1 101 102
x In x In

S7 - S8 S7
104 105
PR212/P 0,2 0,3 0,4 0,6 0,8 PR212/MP
0,9
G Function 1 L Function
(hot and cold trip) hot
103 104 cold
t [s] t [s]
102 103
101 102
1 101
D 30
C 20
B 10
30
1 10 A
10-1 A 20
10
10 A
10-2 10-1
GSIS0214
GSIS0216
1,05 1,05
10-1 1 101 102 10-1 1 101 102
x In x I1
I1 t1
PR212/MP (0.4 ÷ 1) x In with step 0.01 x In 4 – 8 – 16 – 24 s
Here the tolerances

I1 t1
PR212/MP According to IEC 60947-4-1 According to IEC 60947-4-1

S7 S7
PR212/MP 105 PR212/MP 105
L Function R-U Functions

(hot trip with one hot U function
or two phases 104 104 R function
supplied)
t [s] t [s]
103 103
102 102 4
5
6
7
8
10
101 101 10
30
1 1 1
20
10
10 A
10-1 10-1
GSIS0218
GSIS0217
1,05
1,05 10-1 1 101 102
10-1 1 101 102
x I1 x I1
R I5 t5
PR212/MP (3 - 4- 5 - 6 - 7 - 8 - 10 - OFF) x I1 1 – 4 – 7 – 10 s
U I6 t6
PR212/MP 0.4 x I1 4s
Here the tolerances
R I5 t5
PR212/MP ± 10 % ± 20 %
U I6 t6
PR212/MP ± 20 % ± 20 %

S7 Emax
103 104
PR212/MP PR121/P
13
I Function 12
L- I Functions
11 103
102 10
9 t [s]
t [s] 8
102
7
10
6
101
1
1
10-1
10-1
1SDC200100F0001
10-2
10-2
10-3
10-1 1 101 102
10-3
GSIS0219
x In
1,05
10-1 1 101 102
x In
I3
PR212/MP (6 - 7- 8 - 9 - 10 - 11 - 12 - 13 - OFF) x In
The tolerances are according to IEC 60947-4-1.

Emax Emax
104 104
PR121/P PR121/P
L-S-I Functions, L-S-I Functions,
S inverse short S indipendent 103
103
time delay time delay
(I2t = const.) (t = constant) t [s]
t [s]
102 102
101 101
1 1
k
t= 2
I
t=k
10-1 10-1
1SDC200101F0001
1SDC200102F0001
10-2 10-2
10-3 10-3
10-1 1 101 102 10-1 1 101 102
x In x In

Emax Emax
104 104
PR121/P PR122/P
0,2 1
G Function 0,2 1
L-I Functions
103 103
t [s] t [s]
102 102
101 101
1 1
I2t = k
t=k
10-1 10-1
1SDC200103F0001
1SDC200602F0001
10-2 10-2
10-3 10-3
10-1 1 101 102 10-1 1 101 102
x In x In

Emax Emax
104 104
PR122/P-PR123/P PR122/P-PR123/P
L-S-I Functions L-S-I Functions
S inverse short 103
S indipendent 103
time delay time delay
(I2t = const.) t [s] (t = constant)
t [s]
102 102
k t=k
t= 2
I
101 101
1 1
10-1 10-1
1SDC200110F0001
1SDC200111F0001
10-2 10-2
10-3 10-3
10-1 1 101 102 10-1 1 101 102
x In

Trip curve Trip curve PR123/P release – Function L in compliance with Std.
electronic releases electronic releases IEC 60255-3
Emax Emax
104 The following three curves refer to the protection function L complying with
PR122/P-PR123/P PR123/P Std. IEC 60255-3 and integrate the standard one; they are applicable in
0,2 1
G Function L Function coordination with fuses and MV circuit-breakers.
0,2 1
(IEC 60255-3) PR 123/P k=0.14 alfa=0.02
103
t [s] 104
t [s]
102
103
101
1 102
I2t = k
t=k 0,1 1
10-1
101
1SDC200112F0001
10-2
1SDC200118F0001
10-3
10-1 1 101 102
x In
10-1
10-1 1 101 102
x In
I1 t1
PR123 (0.4…1) x In with step 0.01 x In t1=3s…144s with step 3s (1)
(@ I=3 x Un)
I1
± 20 % Ig > 5 x I1
PR123 1.05…1.2 x In
± 30 % 2 x I1 ≤ Ig ≤ 5 x I1 In
(1)
The minimum trip values is 1 s, regardless of the type of curve set (self protection)

electronic releases PR 123/P k=13.5 alfa=1 electronic releases PR 123/P k=80 alfa=2
t [s] 104
Emax Emax t [s] 104
PR123/P PR123/P
L Function L Function
(IEC 60255-3) (IEC 60255-3)
103
103
102 102
101 101
1SDC200119F0001
1
1SDC200120F0001
10-1
10-1 1 101 102 10-1
10-1 1 101 102
x In
x In
I1 t1 I1 t1
PR123 (0.4…1) x In with step 0.01 x In t1=3s…144s with step 3s (1) PR123 (0.4…1) x In with step 0.01 x In t1=3s…144s with step 3s (1)
(@ I=3 x Un) (@ I=3 x Un)
Here below the tolerances: Here below the tolerances:
I1
± 20 % Ig > 5 x I1 ± 20 % Ig > 5 x I1
PR123 1.05…1.2 x In PR123 1.05…1.2 x In
± 30 % 2 x I1 ≤ Ig ≤ 5 x I1 In ± 30 % 2 x I1 ≤ Ig ≤ 5 x I1 In
(1)
The minimum trip values is 1 s, regardless of the type of curve set (self protection) (1)
The minimum trip values is 1 s, regardless of the type of curve set (self protection)

Trip curve PR 122/PR123 release – Other protection functions Trip curve
The following curves refer to the particular protection functions provided for t [s] 104
Emax PR122/PR123. Emax
PR123/P t [s] 104 PR122/P 0,05...60
PR123/P
Function D 0,05 0,9
Function U
U
103
D
103
102
60
102
101
101 0,5...60
0,2...0,8
1
1SDC200122F0001
1 0,5
1SDC200121F0001
10-1
10-2 10-1 1 101
10-1 x In
10-2 10-1 1 101 102
x In I6 t6
PR122/P (5%…90% – OFF) with step 5% 0.5 … 60s with step 0.5s
PR123/P
I7 t7
I6 t6
PR123 (0.6 …10 – OFF) x In with step 0.1 x In 0.2s … 0.8s with step 0.01s
PR122/P ± 10 % The better of the two figures:
(@ I > I7)
PR123/P ± 20 % or ± 100 ms
I7 t7
PR123 ± 10 % the better of the two figures:
± 10 % or ± 40 ms

Emax t [s] 104 t [s] 104
Emax
PR122/P PR122/P 1,05...1,2
0,5...0,95
PR123/P 0,5 0,95 PR123/P 0,05 1,2
Function UV UV Function OV OV
103 103
102 102
101 101
5 5
1 1
0,1...5 0,1...5
1SDC200123F0001
1SDC200124F0001
10-1 0,1 10-1 0,1
10-2 10-2
0.3 0.5 0.7 0.9 1.1 1.3 1 1.05 1.1 1.15 1.2 1.25 1.3
x Un x Un
U8 t8 U9 t9
PR122/P (0.5 … 0.95 – OFF) x Un with step 0.01 x Un with U<U8 PR122/P (1.05 … 1.2 – OFF) x Un with step 0.01 x Un with U<U9
PR123/P 0.1 … 5s with step 0.1s PR123/P 0.1s … 5s with step 0.1s
U8 t8 U9 t9
PR122/P ±5% The better of two figures: PR122/P ±5% The better of two figures:
± 20 % or ± 100 ms ± 20 % or ± 100 ms
PR123/P ±5% The better of two figures: PR123/P ±5% The better of two figures:
± 20 % or ± 40 ms ± 20 % or ± 40 ms

t [s] 104 t [s] 104
Emax Emax
PR122/P PR122/P 0,3...0,1
PR123/P 0,1...0,4
PR123/P 0,3 0,1
Function RV 0,1 0,4 Function RP
RP
RV
103
103
102
102
30 25
101
101
0,5...30 0,5...25
1SDC200126F0001
1SDC200125F0001
1
1
0,5
0,5
10-1
10-1
-0.4 -0.3 -0.2 -0.1 0
0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1 1.2
x Pn
x Un
U10 t10 P11 t11

PR122/P (0.1 … 0.4 – OFF) x Un with step 0.05 x Un with U<U10 PR122/P (-0.3 … -0.1 – OFF) x Pn with step 0.02 x Pn with P<P11
PR123/P 0.5s … 30s with step 0.5s PR123/P 0.1 … 25s with step 0.1s
U10 t10 P11 t11
PR122/P ±5% the better of the two figures: PR122/P ±5% the better of the two figures:
PR123/P ± 10 % or ± 100 ms PR123/P 10 % ± 10% or ± 100 ms
3.2 Trip curves

Example of electronic release setting 3.3 Limitation curves
Considering a circuit-breaker type E1B1000 fitted with a PR121/P LSI release A circuit-breaker in which the opening of the contacts occurs after the passage
and with a rating plugs of 1000, it is supposed that for the system requirements, of the peak of the short-circuit current, or in which the trip occurs with the
the protection functions are regulated according to the following settings: natural passage to zero, allows the system components to be subjected to
high stresses, of both thermal and dynamic type. To reduce these stresses,
L I1=0.6 t1=12s current-limiting circuit-breakers have been designed (see Chapter 2.2 “Main
S I2=4 t2=0.3 definitions”), which are able to start the opening operation before the short-circuit
I I3=8 current has reached its first peak, and to quickly extinguish the arc between the
contacts; the following diagram shows the shape of the waves of both the
The trip curve of the release is represented in the following figure (continuous prospective short-circuit current as well as of the limited short-circuit current.
lines): it can be seen that:
• for function L, the curve is represented by the mean value between the
tolerances given by the Standard (the overload protection function must not
trip for current values lower than 1.05·ln, and must trip within 1.3·ln), therefore
corresponding to 1.175·ln (around 700 A);
• graphically, point 1 is obtained at the intersection of the vertical part of function
L and the horizontal segment (C0.4In-C1In) which connects the points relevant
to the same t1, taken from the curves with setting 0.4·ln and 1·ln;
• corresponding to point 2 (4000 A), the function S takes the place of function Ik
L, as the trip time of function S is lower than the trip time of function L;
• in the same way as for point 2, for point 3 (8000 A) and beyond, function S is
substituted by function I.
Prospective
t [s] 104 short-circuit current
1SDC008011F0001
l1=0.6, t1=12s
103
1
C0.4In C1In
102 Limited t
short-circuit current
2
101
l2=4, t2=0.3 t=k

1 The following diagram shows the limit curve for Tmax T2L160, In160 circuit-breaker.
3 The x-axis shows the effective values of the symmetrical prospective short-circuit
current, while the y-axis shows the relative peak value. The limiting effect can
be evaluated by comparing, at equal values of symmetrical fault current, the
1SDC008010F0001
10-1 peak value corresponding to the prospective short-circuit current (curve A) with
the limited peak value (curve B).
Circuit-breaker T2L160 with thermomagnetic release In160 at 400 V, for a fault
l3=8 current of 40 kA, limits the short-circuit peak to 16.2 kA only, with a reduction
10-2 of about 68 kA compared with the peak value in the absence of limitation (84 kA).
10-1 1 101 102
I [kA]
3.3 Limitation curves 3.3 Limitation curves

Ip [kA]
Limitation curves
T1 160
103
Curve A 230 V
10 2 84
68 Ip [kA]
102
16.2
Curve B
10 1
160A
125A
1SDC008012F0001
10 100A
80A
40A÷63A
32A
1SDC210061F0004
1 20A-25A
1 10 1 40 10 2
16A
Irms [kA]
Considering that the electro-dynamic stresses and the consequent mechanical

stresses are closely connected to the current peak, the use of current limiting 1
circuit-breakers allows optimum dimensioning of the components in an electrical 1 10 102 103
Irms [kA]
plant. Besides, current limitation may also be used to obtain back-up protection
between two circuit-breakers in series.
In addition to the advantages in terms of design, the use of current-limiting
circuit-breakers allows, for the cases detailed by Standard IEC 60439-1, the
avoidance of short-circuit withstand verifications for switchboards. Clause
8.2.3.1 of the Standard “Circuits of ASSEMBLIES which are exempted from
the verification of the short-circuit withstand strength” states that:
“A verification of the short-circuit withstand strength is not required in the

following cases.
…
For ASSEMBLIES protected by current-limiting devices having a cut-off current
not exceeding 17 kA at the maximum allowable prospective short-circuit current
at the terminals of the incoming circuit of the ASSEMBLY.
...”
The example above is included among those considered by the Standard: if

the circuit-breaker was used as a main breaker in a switchboard to be installed
in a point of the plant where the prospective short-circuit current is 40 kA, it
would not be necessary to carry out the verification of short-circuit withstand.

Limitation curves Limitation curves
T2 160 T3 250
102 103
230 V 230 V
80A÷160A
40A÷63A
Ip [kA]
25A-32A Ip [kA]
20A
10
16A
12,5A
102
10A
8A 250A
1
6,3A 200A
5A 160A
4A 125A
3,2A 100A
10 80A
2,5A
2A 63A
10-1
1,6A
1SDC210062F0004
1A
1SDC210063F0004
10-2 1
10-2 10-1 1 10 102 103 104 105 103
1 10 102
Irms [kA] Irms [kA]

T4 250/320 102
T5 400/630
102
230 V 230 V
Ip [kA] Ip [kA]
100-320A
80A
10 10
32-50A
20-25A
10A
1SDC200127F0001
1SDC200500F0001
1 1
1 10 102 103 1 10 102 103
Irms [kA] Irms [kA]

T6 630/800/1000 T1 160
103
230 V 400-440 V
Ip [kA]
Ip [kA]
102
800A-1000A
630A
102
160A
125A
10 100A
80A
10 1
40A÷63A
32A
1SDC210064F0004
20A-25A
16A
1
1 10 1 102 103 1
Irms [kA] 1 10 102 103
Irms [kA]

T2 160 T3 250
102 103
400-440 V 80A÷160A 400-440 V
40A÷63A
25A-32A
Ip [kA] 20A
16A
10 Ip [kA]
12,5A
10A
102
8A
6,3A
5A
1 250A
4A
200A
3,2A
160A
2,5A 125A
2A 100A
1,6A 10
80A
1A 63A
10-1
1SDC210065F0004
1SDC210066F0004
10-2
10-2 10-1 1 10 102 103 104 105 1
1 10 102 103
Irms [kA]
Irms [kA]

T4 250/320 102
T5 400/630
102
400-440 V 400-440 V
Ip [kA] Ip [kA]
100-320A
80A
32-50A
20-25A 10
10
10A
1SDC210024F0004
1SDC200128F0001
1
1 1 10 102 103
1 10 102 103 Irms [kA]
Irms [kA]

T6 630/800/1000 T1 160
102
400-440 V 500 V
Ip [kA]
Ip [kA]
102
160A
800A-1000A 125A
630A
100A
80A
40A÷63A
32A
10
20A-25A
16A
10 1
1SDC210028F0004
1
1 1 10 102
1 10 1 102 103 Irms [kA]
Irms [kA]

T2 160 T3 250
102 102
500 V 80A÷160A 500 V
40A÷63A
25A-32A
Ip [kA] Ip [kA]
20A
16A 250A
200A
10 12,5A
160A
10A
125A
8A
6,3A 100A
5A 80A
4A 63A
3,2A
1 10
2,5A
2A
1,6A
1A
10-1
1SDC210032F0004
1SDC210030F0004
10-2 1
10-2 10-1 1 10 102 103 1 10 102
Irms [kA] Irms [kA]

T4 250/320 102
T5 400/630
102
500 V 500 V
Ip [kA]
Ip [kA] 100-320A
80A
32-50A
20-25A
10
10 10A
1SDC210025F0004
1SDC200129F0001
1
1 1 10 102 103
1 10 102 103 Irms [kA]
Irms [kA]

T6 630/800/1000 T1 160
102 10
500 V 690 V
800A-1000A 100÷160A
630A 50÷80A
16÷40A
Ip [kA] Ip [kA]
10
1SDC210067F0004
1 1
1 2 5 10
1 10 102
Irms [kA]
Irms [kA]

T2 160 T3 250
102 103
690 V 690 V
80A÷160A
40A÷63A
25A-32A
Ip [kA]
20A
Ip [kA]
10 16A
12,5A
10A 102
8A
6,3A
5A
4A
1
3,2A
2,5A 250A
2A 200A
1,6A 160A
10
1A 125A
100A
10-1
80A
1SDC210068F0004
63A
1SDC210069F0004
10-2 1
10-2 10-1 1 10 102 103 1 10 103
102
Irms [kA] Irms [kA]

T4 250/320 102 T5 400/630
102
690 V 690 V
Ip [kA] Ip [kA]
100-320A
80A
32-50A
20-25A
10A
10 10
1SDC210026F0004
1SDC200130F0001
1
1 1 10 102 103
1 10 102 103 Irms [kA]
Irms [kA]

T6 630/800/1000 S7 - S8
690 V 230 V
S7
Ip [kA] Ip [kA]
S8
102 10 2
800A-1000A
630A
101
10 1
GSIS0223
3
1 101 102 103
Irms [kA] 3
1 10 1 10 2 10 3
Irms [kA]

S7 - S8 S7 - S8
400-440 V 690 V
S8
Ip [kA] S7
Ip [kA]
10 2 10 2 S8
S7
10 1 10 1
GSIS0229
GSIS0235
3 3
1 10 1 10 2 10 3 1 10 1 10 2 10 3
Irms [kA] Irms [kA]

E2L E3L
103 103
690 V ~ 690 V ~
380/415 V ~ 380/415 V ~
Ip [kA] Ip [kA]
690
690
380/415
380/415
102 102
101 101
1SDC200094F0001
1SDC200092F0001
1 1
1 101 102 103 1 101 102 103
Irms [kA] Irms [kA]
3.4 Specific let-through energy curves

Specific let-through
3.4 Specific let-through energy curves
energy curves
In case of short-circuit, the parts of a plant affected by a fault are subjected to
thermal stresses which are proportional both to the square of the fault current T1 160
as well as to the time required by the protection device to break the current. 10
The energy let through by the protection device during the trip is termed “specific 230 V
let-through energy” (I2t), measured in A2s. The knowledge of the value of the
specific let-through energy in various fault conditions is fundamental for the
dimensioning and the protection of the various parts of the installation.
The effect of limitation and the reduced trip times influence the value of the
I2t [(kA)2s]
specific let-through energy. For those current values for which the tripping of
the circuit-breaker is regulated by the timing of the release, the value of the
specific let-through energy is obtained by multiplying the square of the effective
fault current by the time required for the protection device to trip; in other cases 1
the value of the specific let-through energy may be obtained from the following
diagrams.
The following is an example of the reading from a diagram of the specific let-
through energy curve for a circuit-breaker type T3S 250 In160 at 400 V. 160A
The x-axis shows the symmetrical prospective short-circuit current, while the 125A
y-axis shows the specific let-through energy values, expressed in (kA)2s. 100A
Corresponding to a short-circuit current equal to 20 kA, the circuit-breaker lets 80A
-1
through a value of I2t equal to 1.17 (kA)2s (1170000 A2s). 10 40A-63A
I2t 10 3 32A
[(kA)2s] 20A-25A
1SDC210052F0004
16A
10 2
10-2
1 10 102 103
Irms [kA]
10 1
1.17
1
1SDC008013F0001
10 -1
10 -2
1 10 1 20 10 2
Irms [kA]
3.4 Specific let-through energy curves 3.4 Specific let-through energy curves

Specific let-through Specific let-through
energy curves energy curves
T2 160 T3 250
1 10
230 V 80A÷160A 230 V
40A÷63A
25A-32A
20A
10 -1 I2t [(kA)2s]
16A
12,5A
I 2 t [(kA) 2 s]
250A
10A 1 200A
10 -2
8A 160A
6,3A 125A
5A 100A
4A 80A
10 -3
3,2A 63A
10 -4 10-1
1SDC210057F0004
2,5A
10 -5
2A
1,6A
TSTM0013
1A
10 -6 10-2
10 -2 10 -1 1 10 1 10 2 10 3 10 4 10 5 1 10 102 103
Irms [kA] Irms [kA]

T4 250/320 T5 400/630
10 10
230 V 230 V
I2t [(kA)2s]
I2t [(kA)2s]
100-320A
80A 1
32-50A
20-25A
10A
0.1
1SDC210019F0004
1SDC200131F0001
10-1
0.01 1 10 102 103
Irms [kA]
1 10 102 103
Irms [kA]

T6 630/800/1000 T1 160
10 3
10
230 V 400-440 V
I 2 t [(kA) 2 s]
10 2
I2t [(kA)2s]
1
160A
125A
100A
800A-1000A 80A
10 1 40A÷63A
630A 32A
20A-25A
16A
-1
10
1SDC210054F0004
10-2
1 10 102 103
10 -1 Irms [kA]
1 10 1 10 2 10 3
Irms [kA]

T2 160 T3 250
1 10
400-440 V 400-440 V
80A÷160A
40A÷63A
I2t [(kA)2s]
10-1 25A-32A
20A 250A
16A 200A
12,5A I2t [(kA)2s] 160A
125A
10-2 1
100A
10A
80A
8A
63A
6,3A
10-3 5A
4A
10-4 10-1
3,2A
2,5A
2A
1SDC210056F0004
1SDC210055F0004
10-5 1,6A
1A
10-6 10-2
10-2 10-1 1 10 102 103 104 105 1 10 102 103
Irms [kA]
Irms [kA]

T4 250/320 10 T5 400/630
10
400-440 V 400-440 V
I2t [(kA)2s]
I2t [(kA)2s]
1
100-320A
80A
32-50A
1
20-25A
10A
0.1
1SDC210020F0004
1SDC200132F0001
10-1
0.01 1 10 102 103
1 10 102 103 Irms [kA]
Irms [kA]

T6 630/800/1000 T1 160
10 3 1
400-440 V 500 V
160A
125A
I2t [(kA)2s] 100A
I 2 t [(kA) 2 s] 80A
40A÷63A
32A
10 2
20A-25A
16A
800A-1000A
10-1
630A
10 1
1SDC210027F0004
1
10-2
1 10 102
Irms [kA]
10 -1
1 10 1 10 2 10 3
Irms [kA]

T2 160 T3 250
1 10
500 V 80A÷160A 500 V
I2t [(kA)2s] 40A÷63A
25A-32A I2t [(kA)2s]
10-1 20A
16A 250A
12,5A 200A
160A
10A
125A
8A
10-2 1 100A
6,3A
80A
5A
4A 63A
3,2A
10-3
2,5A
2A
1,6A
10-4 10-1
1A
1SDC210031F0004
1SDC210029F0004
10-5
10-6 10-2
10-2 10-1 1 10 102 103 104 1 10 102
Irms [kA] Irms [kA]

T4 250/320 T5 400/630
10 10
500 V 500 V
I2t [(kA)2s]
I2t [(kA)2s]
1 100-320A
80A
32-50A
20-25A
1
10A
0.1
1SDC210021F0004
1SDC200133F0001
10-1
0.01 1 10 102 103
1 10 102 103 Irms [kA]
Irms [kA]

T6 630/800/1000 T1 160
102 1
500 V 690 V
I2t [(kA)2s]
I2t [(kA)2s] 800A-1000A 0,50
630A 100÷160A
10 50÷80A
16÷40A
0,20
10-1
0,05
1SDC210058F0004
0,02
10-1
1 10 102
Irms [kA] 10-2
1 2 5 10
Irms [kA]

T2 160 T3 250
1 10
690 V 690 V
I2t [(kA)2s]
80A÷160A I2t [(kA)2s]
10-1
40A÷63A
25A-32A
20A
16A
10-2 1
12,5A R250
10A R200
8A R160
6,3A R125
10-3 5A R100
R80
R63
10-4 10-1
4A
3,2A
2,5A
1SDC210059F0004
1SDC210060F0004
2A
10-5
1,6A
1A
10-6
10 10-2
10-2 10-1 1 102 103 103
1 10 102
Irms [kA] Is [kA]

T4 250/320 T5 400/630
102
10
690 V 690 V
I2t [(kA)2s]
I2t [(kA)2s]
100-320A
80A
32-50A
20-25A
10A
1
10
1SDC210022F0004
1SDC200134F0001
10-1
1 1 10 102
1 10 102 103 Irms [kA]
Irms [kA]

T6 630/800/1000 S7 - S8
10 3
690 V 230 V
S8
I 2 t [(kA) 2 s] I 2 t [(kA) 2 s] 10 3
10 2 10 2 S7
800A-1000A
10 1 630A 10 1
1 1
GSIS0241
10 -1 10 -1
1 10 1 10 2 10 3 1 10 1 10 2 10 3
Irms [kA] Irms [kA]

S7 - S8 S7 - S8
10 3 10 3
400-440 V 690 V
I 2 t [(kA) 2 s] S8
I 2 t [(kA) 2 s]
S7
10 2 10 2
S8
S7
10 1 10 1
1 1
GSIS0247
GSIS0253
10 -1 10 -1
1 10 1 10 2 10 3 1 10 1 10 2 10 3
Irms [kA] Irms [kA]

E2L E3L
103 103
690 V~ 690 V~
380/415 V~ 380/415 V~
I 2 t [(kA) 2 s] I 2 t [(kA) 2 s]
690 V 690 V
380/415 V 380/415 V
102 102
101 101
1SDC200095F0001
1SDC200093F0001
1 1
1 101 102 103 1 101 102 103
Irms [kA] Irms [kA]
3.5 Temperature derating

Tmax T2
3.5 Temperature derating 10 °C 20 °C 30 °C 40 °C 50 °C 60 °C 70 °C
Standard IEC 60947-2 states that the temperature rise limits for circuit-breakers In [A] MIN MAX MIN MAX MIN MAX MIN MAX MIN MAX MIN MAX MIN MAX
working at rated current must be within the limits given in the following table: 1 0.8 1.1 0.8 1.1 0.7 1.1 0.7 1.0 0.7 0.9 0.6 0.9 0.6 0.8
1.6 1.3 1.8 1.2 1.8 1.2 1.7 1.1 1.6 1.0 1.5 1.0 1.4 0.9 1.3
2 1.6 2.3 1.5 2.2 1.5 2.1 1.4 2.0 1.3 1.9 1.2 1.7 1.1 1.6
2.5 2.0 2.9 1.9 2.8 1.8 2.6 1.8 2.5 1.6 2.3 1.5 2.2 1.4 2.0
3.2 2.6 3.7 2.5 3.5 2.4 3.4 2.2 3.2 2.1 3.0 1.9 2.8 1.8 2.6
Table 1 - Temperature rise limits for terminals and accessible parts
4 3.2 4.6 3.1 4.4 2.9 4.2 2.8 4.0 2.6 3.7 2.4 3.5 2.3 3.2
Description of part* Temperature rise limits 5 4.0 5.7 3.9 5.5 3.7 5.3 3.5 5.0 3.3 4.7 3.0 4.3 2.8 4.0
K 6.3 5.1 7.2 4.9 6.9 4.6 6.6 4.4 6.3 4.1 5.9 3.8 5.5 3.6 5.1
- Terminal for external connections 80 8 6.4 9.2 6.2 8.8 5.9 8.4 5.6 8.0 5.2 7.5 4.9 7.0 4.5 6.5
- Manual operating metallic 25 10 8.0 11.5 7.7 11.0 7.4 10.5 7.0 10.0 6.5 9.3 6.1 8.7 5.6 8.1
means: non metallic 35 12.5 10.1 14.4 9.6 13.8 9.2 13.2 8.8 12.5 8.2 11.7 7.6 10.9 7.1 10.1
- Parts intended to 16 13 18 12 18 12 17 11 16 10 15 10 14 9 13
be touched but not metallic 40 20 16 23 15 22 15 21 14 20 13 19 12 17 11 16
hand-held: non metallic 50 25 20 29 19 28 18 26 18 25 16 23 15 22 14 20
- Parts which need 32 26 37 25 35 24 34 22 32 21 30 19 28 18 26
not be touched for metallic 50 40 32 46 31 44 29 42 28 40 26 37 24 35 23 32
normal operation: non metallic 60 50 40 57 39 55 37 53 35 50 33 47 30 43 28 40
* No value is specified for parts other than those listed but no damage should be caused 63 51 72 49 69 46 66 44 63 41 59 38 55 36 51
to adjacent parts of insulating materials. 80 64 92 62 88 59 84 56 80 52 75 49 70 45 65
100 80 115 77 110 74 105 70 100 65 93 61 87 56 81
125 101 144 96 138 92 132 88 125 82 117 76 109 71 101
160 129 184 123 178 118 168 112 160 105 150 97 139 90 129
These values are valid for a maximum reference ambient temperature of 40°C,
as stated in Standard IEC 60947-1, clause 6.1.1.
Whenever the ambient temperature is other than 40°C, the value of the current
which can be carried continuously by the circuit-breaker is given in the following Tmax T3
tables: 10 °C 20 °C 30 °C 40 °C 50 °C 60 °C 70 °C
In [A] MIN MAX MIN MAX MIN MAX MIN MAX MIN MAX MIN MAX MIN MAX
Circuit-breakers with thermomagnetic release 63 51 72 49 69 46 66 44 63 41 59 38 55 35 51
80 64 92 62 88 59 84 56 80 52 75 48 69 45 64
Tmax T1 and T1 1P (*) 100 80 115 77 110 74 105 70 100 65 93 61 87 56 80
10 °C 20 °C 30 °C 40 °C 50 °C 60 °C 70 °C 125 101 144 96 138 92 132 88 125 82 116 76 108 70 100
In [A] MIN MAX MIN MAX MIN MAX MIN MAX MIN MAX MIN MAX MIN MAX 160 129 184 123 176 118 168 112 160 104 149 97 139 90 129
16 13 18 12 18 12 17 11 16 11 15 10 14 9 13 200 161 230 154 220 147 211 140 200 130 186 121 173 112 161
20 16 23 15 22 15 21 14 20 13 19 12 18 11 16 250 201 287 193 278 184 263 175 250 163 233 152 216 141 201
25 20 29 19 28 18 26 18 25 16 23 15 22 14 20
32 26 37 25 35 24 34 22 32 21 30 20 28 18 26
40 32 46 31 44 29 42 28 40 26 38 25 35 23 33
50 40 58 39 55 37 53 35 50 33 47 31 44 28 41
63 51 72 49 69 46 66 44 63 41 59 39 55 36 51
80 64 92 62 88 59 84 56 80 53 75 49 70 46 65
100 81 115 77 110 74 105 70 100 66 94 61 88 57 81
125 101 144 96 138 92 131 88 125 82 117 77 109 71 102
160 129 184 123 176 118 168 112 160 105 150 98 140 91 130
(*) For the T1 1P circuit-breaker (fitted with TMF fixed thermomagnetic release), consider
only the column corresponding to the maximum adjustment of the TMD releases.
3.5 Temperature derating 3.5 Temperature derating

Tmax T4 Circuit-breakers with electronic release
10 °C 20 °C 30 °C 40 °C 50 °C 60 °C 70 °C Tmax T2 160
up to 40 °C 50 °C 60 °C 70 °C
In [A] MIN MAX MIN MAX MIN MAX MIN MAX MIN MAX MIN MAX MIN MAX Fixed Imax [A] I1 Imax [A] I1 Imax [A] I1 Imax [A] I1
20 19 27 18 24 16 23 14 20 12 17 10 15 8 13 F 160 1 153.6 0.96 140.8 0.88 128 0.8
32 26 43 24 39 22 36 19 32 16 27 14 24 11 21 EF 160 1 153.6 0.96 140.8 0.88 128 0.8
50 37 62 35 58 33 54 30 50 27 46 25 42 22 39 ES 160 1 153.6 0.96 140.8 0.88 128 0.8
80 59 98 55 92 52 86 48 80 44 74 40 66 32 58 FC Cu 160 1 153.6 0.96 140.8 0.88 128 0.8
100 83 118 80 113 74 106 70 100 66 95 59 85 49 75 FC Cu 160 1 153.6 0.96 140.8 0.88 128 0.8
125 103 145 100 140 94 134 88 125 80 115 73 105 63 95 R 160 1 153.6 0.96 140.8 0.88 128 0.8
F = Front flat terminals; EF = Front extended terminals; ES = Front extended spread terminals;
160 130 185 124 176 118 168 112 160 106 150 100 104 90 130
FC Cu = Front terminals for copper cables; FC CuAl = Front terminals for CuAl cables; R = Rear terminals
200 162 230 155 220 147 210 140 200 133 190 122 175 107 160
250 200 285 193 275 183 262 175 250 168 240 160 230 150 220 Tmax T4 250
up to 40 °C 50 °C 60 °C 70 °C
Fixed Imax [A] I1 Imax [A] I1 Imax [A] I1 Imax [A] I1
FC 250 1 250 1 250 1 230 0.92
F 250 1 250 1 250 1 230 0.92
HR 250 1 250 1 250 1 220 0.88
VR 250 1 250 1 250 1 220 0.88
Tmax T5
10 °C 20 °C 30 °C 40 °C 50 °C 60 °C 70 °C Plug-in - Withdrawable
In [A] MIN MAX MIN MAX MIN MAX MIN MAX MIN MAX MIN MAX MIN MAX FC 250 1 250 1 240 0.96 220 0.88
F 250 1 250 1 240 0.96 220 0.88
320 260 368 245 350 234 335 224 320 212 305 200 285 182 263
HR 250 1 250 1 230 0.92 210 0.84
400 325 465 310 442 295 420 280 400 265 380 250 355 230 325
VR 250 1 250 1 230 0.92 210 0.84
500 435 620 405 580 380 540 350 500 315 450 280 400 240 345
FC = Front terminals for cables; F = Front flat terminals; HR = Rear flat horizontal terminals; VR = Rear
flat vertical terminals.
Tmax T4 320
up to 40 °C 50 °C 60 °C 70 °C
FC 320 1 307 0.96 281 0.88 256 0.80
F 320 1 307 0.96 281 0.88 256 0.80
HR 320 1 294 0.92 269 0.84 243 0.76
VR 320 1 294 0.92 269 0.84 243 0.76
Plug-in - Withdrawable
Tmax T6 FC 320 1 294 0.92 268 0.84 242 0.76
10 °C 20 °C 30 °C 40 °C 50 °C 60 °C 70 °C F 320 1 307 0.96 282 0.88 256 0.80
In [A] MIN MAX MIN MAX MIN MAX MIN MAX MIN MAX MIN MAX MIN MAX HR 320 1 294 0.92 268 0.84 242 0.76
630 520 740 493 705 462 660 441 630 405 580 380 540 350 500 VR 320 1 294 0.92 268 0.84 242 0.76
800 685 965 640 905 605 855 560 800 520 740 470 670 420 610 FC = Front terminals for cables; F = Front flat terminals; HR = Rear flat horizontal terminals; VR = Rear
flat vertical terminals.

Tmax T5 400 Tmax T6 1000
up to 40 °C 50 °C 60 °C 70 °C up to 40 °C 50 °C 60 °C 70 °C
Fixed Imax [A] I1 Imax [A] I1 Imax [A] I1 Imax [A] I1 Fixed Imax [A] I1 Imax [A] I1 Imax [A] I1 Imax [A] I1
FC 400 1 400 1 400 1 368 0.92 FC 1000 1 1000 1 913 0.91 817 0.82
F 400 1 400 1 400 1 368 0.92 R(HR) 1000 1 926 0.93 845 0.85 756 0.76
HR 400 1 400 1 400 1 352 0.88 R(VR) 1000 1 961 0.96 877 0.88 784 0.78
VR 400 1 400 1 400 1 352 0.88 ES 1000 1 800 0.8 600 0.6 600 0.4
FC = Front terminals for cables; R(HR) = Rear terminals oriented in horizontal; R(VR) = Rear terminals
FC 400 1 400 1 382 0.96 350 0.88 oriented in vertical; ES = Spreaded extended front terminals.
F 400 1 400 1 382 0.96 350 0.88
HR 400 1 400 1 368 0.92 336 0.84
SACE Isomax S7 1600
up to 40 °C 50 °C 60 °C 70 °C
VR 400 1 400 1 368 0.92 336 0.84 Fixed Imax [A] I1 Imax [A] I1 Imax [A] I1 Imax [A] I1
FC = Front terminals for cables; F = Front flat terminals; HR = Rear flat horizontal terminals; VR = Rear Front flat bar 1600 1 1520 0.95 1440 0.9 1280 0.8
flat vertical terminals. Rear vertical flat bar 1600 1 1520 0.95 1440 0.9 1280 0.8
Rear horizontal flat bar 1600 1 1440 0.9 1280 0.8 1120 0.7
Tmax T5 630
up to 40 °C 50 °C 60 °C 70 °C Plug-in - Withdrawable
Front flat bar 1600 1 1440 0.9 1280 0.8 1120 0.7
FC 630 1 605 0.96 554 0.88 504 0.80
Rear vertical flat bar 1600 1 1440 0.9 1280 0.8 1120 0.7
F 630 1 605 0.96 554 0.88 504 0.80 Rear horizontal flat bar 1600 1 1280 0.8 1120 0.7 906 0.6
HR 630 1 580 0.92 529 0.84 479 0.76
VR 630 1 580 0.92 529 0.84 479 0.76
F 630 1 607 0.96 552 0.88 476 0.76 SACE Isomax S8 2000
HR 630 1 580 0.92 517 0.82 454 0.72 up to 40 °C 50 °C 60 °C 70 °C
VR 630< 1 580 0.92 517 0.82 454 0.72 Fixed Imax [A] I1 Imax [A] I1 Imax [A] I1 Imax [A] I1
FC = Front terminals for cables; F = Front flat terminals; HR = Rear flat horizontal terminals; VR = Rear Front flat bar 2000 1 2000 1 1900 0,95 1715 0,85
flat vertical terminals. Rear vertical flat bar 2000 1 2000 1 2000 1 1785 0,9
Tmax T6 630
up to 40 °C 50 °C 60 °C 70 °C
SACE Isomax S8 2500
up to 40 °C 50 °C 60 °C 70 °C
F 630 1 630 1 630 1 598.5 0.95
FC 630 1 630 1 598.5 0.95 567 0.9
Front flat bar 2500 1 2500 1 2270 0,9 2040 0,8
R (HR - VR) 630 1 630 1 567 0.9 504 0.8
Rear vertical flat bar 2500 1 2500 1 2375 0,95 2130 0,85
Withdrawable
EF 630 1 630 1 598.5 0.95 567 0.9
VR 630 1 630 1 598.5 0.95 567 0.9 SACE Isomax S8 3200
HR 630 1 598.5 0.95 567 0.9 504 0.8 up to 40 °C 50 °C 60 °C 70 °C
FC = Front terminals for cables; F = Front flat terminals; HR = Rear flat horizontal terminals; VR = Rear Rear vertical flat bar 3200 1 3060 0,95 2780 0,85 2510 0,8
flat vertical terminals; R = Rear terminals; EF = Front extended.
Tmax T6 800
up to 40 °C 50 °C 60 °C 70 °C
F 800 1 800 1 800 1 760 0.95
FC 800 1 800 1 760 0.95 720 0.9
R (HR - VR) 800 1 800 1 720 0.9 640 0.8
Withdrawable
EF 800 1 800 1 760 0.95 720 0.9
VR 800 1 800 1 760 0.95 720 0.9
HR 800 1 760 0.95 720 0.9 640 0.8
FC = Front terminals for cables; F = Front flat terminals; HR = Rear flat horizontal terminals; VR = Rear
flat vertical terminals; R = Rear terminals; EF = Front extended.

SACE Emax E1 Emax E4
Temperature E1 800 E1 1000 E1 1250 E1 1600 Temperature E4 3200 E4 4000
[°C] % [A] % [A] % [A] % [A] [°C] % [A] % [A]
10 100 800 100 1000 100 1250 100 1600 10 100 3200 100 4000
20 100 800 100 1000 100 1250 100 1600 20 100 3200 100 4000
30 100 800 100 1000 100 1250 100 1600 30 100 3200 100 4000
40 100 800 100 1000 100 1250 100 1600 40 100 3200 100 4000
45 100 800 100 1000 100 1250 98 1570 45 100 3200 100 4000
50 100 800 100 1000 100 1250 96 1530 50 100 3200 98 3900
55 100 800 100 1000 100 1250 94 1500 55 100 3200 95 3790
60 100 800 100 1000 100 1250 92 1470 60 100 3200 92 3680
65 100 800 100 1000 99 1240 89 1430 65 98 3120 89 3570
70 100 800 100 1000 98 1230 87 1400 70 95 3040 87 3460
SACE Emax E2
Emax E6
Temperature E2 800 E2 1000 E2 1250 E2 1600 E2 2000
[°C] % [A] % [A] % [A] % A] % [A] Temperature E6 3200 E6 4000 E6 5000 E6 6300
10 100 800 100 1000 100 1250 100 1600 100 2000 [°C] % [A] % [A] % [A] % [A]
20 100 800 100 1000 100 1250 100 1600 100 2000 10 100 3200 100 4000 100 5000 100 6300
20 100 3200 100 4000 100 5000 100 6300
30 100 800 100 1000 100 1250 100 1600 100 2000
30 100 3200 100 4000 100 5000 100 6300
40 100 800 100 1000 100 1250 100 1600 100 2000
40 100 3200 100 4000 100 5000 100 6300
45 100 800 100 1000 100 1250 100 1600 100 2000
50 100 800 100 1000 100 1250 100 1600 97 1945 45 100 3200 100 4000 100 5000 100 6300
55 100 800 100 1000 100 1250 100 1600 94 1885 50 100 3200 100 4000 100 5000 100 6300
60 100 800 100 1000 100 1250 98 1570 91 1825 55 100 3200 100 4000 100 5000 98 6190
65 100 800 100 1000 100 1250 96 1538 88 1765 60 100 3200 100 4000 98 4910 96 6070
65 100 3200 100 4000 96 4815 94 5850
70 100 800 100 1000 100 1250 94 1510 85 1705
70 100 3200 100 4000 94 4720 92 5600
SACE Emax E3
Temperature E3 800 E3 1000 E3 1250 E3 1600 E3 2000 E3 2500 E3 3200
[C°] % [A] % [A] % [A] % [A] % [A] % [A] % [A]
10 100 800 100 1000 1001250 1001600 100 2000 100 2500100 3200
20 100 800 100 1000 1001250 100 1600 100 2000 100 2500100 3200
30 100 800 100 1000 1001250 100 1600 100 2000 100 2500100 3200
40 100 800 100 1000 1001250 100 1600 100 2000 100 2500100 3200
45 100 800 100 1000 1001250 100 1600 100 2000 100 2500100 3200
50 100 800 100 1000 1001250 100 1600 100 2000 100 2500 97 3090
55 100 800 100 1000 1001250 100 1600 100 2000 100 2500 93 2975
60 100 800 100 1000 1001250 100 1600 100 2000 100 2500 89 2860
65 100 800 100 1000 1001250 100 1600 100 2000 97 2425 86 2745
70 100 800 100 1000 1001250 100 1600 100 2000 94 2350 82 2630

The following table lists examples of the continuous current carrying capacity The following tables show the maximum settings for L protection (against
for circuit-breakers installed in a switchboard with the dimensions indicated overload) for electronic releases, according to temperature, version and
below. These values refer to withdrawable switchgear installed in non segregated terminals.
switchboards with a protection rating up to IP31, and following dimensions:
2300x800x900 (HxLxD) for E1 - E2 - E3; Tmax T2 All terminals Tmax T2 All terminals
2300x1400x1500 (HxLxD) for E4 - E6. In ≤ 125A F P In = 160A F P
The values refer to a maximum temperature at the terminals of 120 °C.
For withdrawable circuit-breakers with a rated current of 6300 A, the use of <40 <40 1 0.88
vertical rear terminals is recommended. 45 45 0.96 0.88
Vertical terminals Horizontal and front terminals 50 50 0.96 0.88
Type Iu Continuous capacity Busbars section Continuous capacity Busbars section 55 1 1 55 0.92 0.88
[A] [A] [mm2] [A] [mm2] 60 60 0.88 0.88
35°C 45°C 55°C 35°C 45°C 55°C
65 65 0.84 0.84
E1B/N 08 800 800 800 800 1x(60x10) 800 800 800 1x(60x10)
70 70 0.8 0.8
E1B/N 10 1000 1000 1000 1000 1x(80x10) 1000 1000 1000 2x(60x8)
E1B/N 12 1250 1250 1250 1250 1x(80x10) 1250 1250 1200 2x(60x8)
E1B/N 16 1600 1600 1600 1500 2x(60x10) 1550 1450 1350 2x(60x10) Fixed - Plug-in Fixed - Plug-in
E2S 08 800 800 800 800 1x(60x10) 800 800 800 1x(60x10) Tmax T2 Tmax T2
E2N/S 10 1000 1000 1000 1000 1x(60x10) 1000 1000 1000 1x(60x10)
PR221 PR221
In ≤ 100A In 160A
E2N/S 12 1250 1250 1250 1250 1x(60x10) 1250 1250 1250 1x(60x10) All terminals All terminals
E2B/N/S 16 1600 1600 1600 1600 2x(60x10) 1600 1600 1530 2x(60x10)
<40 <40 1
E2B/N/S 20 2000 2000 2000 1800 3x(60x10) 2000 2000 1750 3x(60x10)
E2L 12 1250 1250 1250 1250 1x(60x10) 1250 1250 1250 1x(60x10) 45 45 0.96
E2L 16 1600 1600 1600 1500 2x(60x10) 1600 1500 1400 2x(60x10) 50 50 0.96
E3H/V 08 800 800 800 800 1x(60x10) 800 800 800 1x(60x10)
E3S/H 10 1000 1000 1000 1000 1x(60x10) 1000 1000 1000 1x(60x10)
55 1 55 0.92
E3S/H/V 12 1250 1250 1250 1250 1x(60x10) 1250 1250 1250 1x(60x10) 60 60 0.88
E3S/H/V 16 1600 1600 1600 1600 1x(100x10) 1600 1600 1600 1x(100x10)
65 65 0.84
E3S/H/V 20 2000 2000 2000 2000 2x(100x10) 2000 2000 2000 2x(100x10)
E3N/S/H/V 25 2500 2500 2500 2500 2x(100x10) 2500 2450 2400 2x(100x10) 70 70 0.8
E3N/S/H/V 32 3200 3200 3100 2800 3x(100x10) 3000 2880 2650 3x(100x10)
E3L 20 2000 2000 2000 2000 2x(100x10) 2000 2000 1970 2x(100x10)
E3L 25 2500 2500 2390 2250 2x(100x10) 2375 2270 2100 2x(100x10) Fixed - Plug-in
E4H/V 32 3200 3200 3200 3200 3x(100x10) 3200 3150 3000 3x(100x10) Tmax T2 Withdrawable
E4S/H/V 40 4000 4000 3980 3500 4x(100x10) 3600 3510 3150 6x(60x10)
E6V 32 3200 3200 3200 3200 3x(100x10) 3200 3200 3200 3x(100x10)
In ≤ 160A PR221 - PR222
E6H/V 40 4000 4000 4000 4000 4x(100x10) 4000 4000 4000 4x(100x10) FC – F – HR – VR
E6H/V 50 5000 5000 4850 4600 6x(100x10) 4850 4510 4250 6x(100x10)
<40
E6H/V 63 6300 6000 5700 5250 7x(100x10) - - - -
45
Note: the reference temperature is the ambient temperature 50
55 1
Examples: 60
65
Selection of a moulded-case circuit-breaker, with thermomagnetic release, for 70
a load current of 180 A, at an ambient temperature of 60°C.
From the table referring to Tmax circuit-breakers (page 173), it can be seen that
the most suitable breaker is the T3 In 250, which can be set from 152 A to 216 A. Tmax T4 Fixed Plug-in - Withdrawable
In = 250A PR221 PR222/PR223 PR221 PR222/PR223
Selection of a moulded-case circuit-breaker, with electronic release, in FC – F HR – VR FC – F HR – VR FC – F HR – VR FC – F HR – VR
withdrawable version with rear flat horizontal bar terminals, for a load current
equal to 720 A, with an ambient temperature of 50 °C. <40
From the table referring to Tmax circuit-breakers (page 176), it can be seen that 45
the most suitable breaker is the T6 800, which can be set from 320 A to 760 A. 50 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Selection of an air circuit-breaker, with electronic release, in withdrawable version 55
with vertical terminals, for a load current of 2700 A, with a temperature outside 60 0.96 0.92 0.96 0.92
of the IP31 switchboard of 55 °C. 65 0.96 0.92 0.96 0.94 0.92 0.88 0.92 0.88
From the tables referring to the current carrying capacity inside the switchboard
for Emax circuit-breakers (see above), it can be seen that the most suitable 70 0.92 0.88 0.92 0.88 0.88 0.84 0.88 0.84
breaker is the E3 3200, with busbar section 3x(100x10)mm2, which can be set
from 1280 A to 2800 A. FC = Front terminals for cables; F = Front flat terminals; HR = Rear flat horizontal
terminals; VR = Rear flat vertical terminals.

Tmax T4 Fixed Plug-in - Withdrawable Fixed Withdrawable
Tmax T6
FC – F HR – VR FC – F HR – VR F FC–HR–VR F FC–HR–VR
F FC R F FC R EF-VR HR EF-VR HR
<40 1 1
1 1 1 1 1 1 <40 1 1
45 0.96 0.96
45 1 1 1 1 1 0.96 1 0.96
50 0.96 0.92 0.96 0.92 0.96 0.92 0.96 0.92
50 1 1 0.92 0.94
55 0.92 0.88 0.92 0.88 0.92 0.88 0.92 0.88
55 0.96 0.92 0.96 0.94 0.96 0.92 0.96 0.92
60 0.88 0.84 0.88 0.84 0.88 0.84 0.88 0.84
60 0.92 0.88 0.94 0.9 0.92 0.88 0.94 0.9
65 0.84 0.8 0.84 0.8 0.84 0.80 0.84 0.80
65 0.96 0.92 0.84 0.96 0.92 0.84 0.92 0.84 0.92 0.84
70 0.8 0.76 0.8 0.76 0.8 0.76 0.8 0.76
70 0.92 0.88 0.8 0.94 0.9 0.8 0.88 0.8 0.9 0.8
Fixed - Plug-in
Withdrawable Fixed Withdrawable
Tmax T5 Tmax T6
In ≤ 320A PR221-PR222-PR223 In = 800A PR221 PR222/PR223 PR221 PR222/PR223
FC – F – HR – VR F FC R F FC R EF-VR HR EF-VR HR
<40 <40 1 1
45 45 1 1 1 1 1 0.96 1 0.96
50 50 1 1 0.92 0.94
55 1 55 0.96 0.92 0.96 0.94 0.96 0.92 0.96 0.92
60 60 0.92 0.88 0.94 0.9 0.92 0.88 0.94 0.9
65 65 0.96 0.92 0.84 0.96 0.92 0.84 0.92 0.84 0.92 0.84
70 70 0.92 0.88 0.8 0.94 0.9 0.8 0.88 0.8 0.9 0.8
Tmax T5 Fixed Plug-in - Withdrawable Fixed

Tmax T6
In = 1000A PR221 PR222/PR223
FC – F HR – VR FC – F HR – VR FC – F HR – VR FC – F HR – VR
FC R (HR) R (VR) ES FC R (HR) R (VR) ES
<40
<40 1 1 1 1 1 1
45 1 1 1 1
45 1 0.96 0.96 0.88 1 0.96 0.98 0.9
50 1 1 1 1
50 0.92 0.96 0.8 0.92 0.96 0.8
55 0.96 0.98 0.96
0.96 55 0.92 0.88 0.88 0.68 0.94 0.88 0.9 0.7
60 0.92 0.96 0.92
60 0.88 0.84 0.84 0.6 0.9 0.84 0.86 0.6
65 0.96 0.92 0.96 0.94 0.92 0.88 0.92 0.88
65 0.84 0.8 0.8 0.48 0.86 0.8 0.82 0.5
70 0.92 0.88 0.92 0.88 0.88 0.84 0.88 0.84
70 0.8 0.72 0.76 0.4 0.8 0.74 0.78 0.4
F = Front flat terminals; HR = Rear flat horizontal terminals; VR = Rear flat vertical terminals; FC = Front
Tmax T5 Fixed Plug-in - Withdrawable terminals for cables; R(HR) = Rear terminals oriented in horizontal; R(VR) = Rear terminals oriented in
In = 630A PR221 PR222/PR223 PR221 PR222/PR223 vertical; ES = Spreaded extended front terminals; R = Rear terminals; EF = Front extended.
FC – F HR – VR FC – F HR – VR F HR–VR F HR–VR
<40
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
45
50 0.96 0.92 0.96 0.92 0.96 0.92 0.96 0.92
55 0.92 0.88 0.92 0.88 0.92 0.84 0.92 0.86
60 0.88 0.84 0.88 0.84 0.88 0.8 0.88 0.82
65 0.84 0.8 0.84 0.8 0.8 0.76 0.8 0.76
70 0.8 0.76 0.8 0.76 0.76 0.72 0.76 0.72
FC = Front terminals for cables; F = Front flat terminals; HR = Rear flat horizontal
terminals; VR = Rear flat vertical terminals.

800 A 1000 A 2500 A 3200 A
Emax E1 Emax E1 Emax E3 Emax E3
PR121 PR122/PR123 PR121 PR122/PR123 PR121 PR122/PR123 PR121 PR122/PR123
<40 <40 <40 <40
1 1
45 45 45 45
50 50 50 1 1 50 0.95 0.96
55 1 1 55 1 1 55 55 0.9 0.92
60 60 60 60 0.875 0.89
65 65 65 0.95 0.97 65 0.85 0.85
70 70 70 0.925 0.94 70 0.8 0.82
1250 A 1600 A
Emax E1 Emax E1 3200 A 4000 A
PR121 PR122/PR123 PR121 PR122/PR123 Emax E4 Emax E4
PR121 PR122/PR123 PR121 PR122/PR123
<40 <40 1 1
<40 <40
45 45 0.975 0.98 1 1
45 45
50 1 1 50 0.95 0.95
50 1 1 50 0.975 0.97
55 55 0.925 0.93
55 55 0.925 0.94
60 60 0.9 0.91
60 60 0.9 0.92
65 0.99 65 0.875 0.89
0.975 65 0.975 0.97 65 0.875 0.89
70 0.98 70 0.85 0.87
70 0.95 0.95 70 0.85 0.86
800/1000/1250 A 1600 A
Emax E2 Emax E2
PR121 PR122/PR123 PR121 PR122/PR123
3200/4000 A 5000 A
<40 <40 Emax E6 Emax E6
PR121 PR122/PR123 PR121 PR122/PR123
45 45
1 1 <40 <40
50 50
45 45
55 1 1 55 1 1
50 50
60 60 0.975 0.98
55 1 1 55
65 65 0.95 0.96
60 60 0.975 0.98
70 70 0.925 0.94
65 65 0.95 0.96
70 70 0.925 0.94
2000 A 800/1000/1250/1600/2000 A
Emax E2 Emax E3
PR121 PR122/PR123 PR121 PR122/PR123
6300 A
<40 <40 Emax E6
1 1 PR121 PR122/PR123
45 45
<40
50 0.95 0.97 50
45 1 1
55 0.925 0.94 55 1 1
50
60 0.9 0.91 60 55 0.975 0.98
65 0.875 0.88 65
60 0.95 0.96
70 0.85 0.85 70
65 0.9 0.92
70 0.875 0.88
3.5 Temperature derating

Vertical Terminals
3.6 Altitude derating
35 °C 45 °C 55 °C
PR121 PR122/PR123 PR121 PR122/PR123 PR121 PR122/PR123 For installations carried out at altitudes of more than 2000 m above sea level,
E1B/N 08 1 1 1 1 1 1 the performance of low voltage circuit-breakers is subject to a decline.
E1B/N 10 1 1 1 1 1 1 Basically there are two main phenomena:
E1B/N 12 1 1 1 1 1 1
• the reduction of air density causes a lower efficiency in heat transfer. The
E1B/N 16 1 1 1 1 0.925 0.93
E2S 08 1 1 1 1 1 1
allowable heating conditions for the various parts of the circuit-breaker can
E2N/S 10 1 1 1 1 1 1 only be followed if the value of the rated uninterrupted current is decreased;
E2N/S 12 1 1 1 1 1 1 • the rarefaction of the air causes a decrease in dielectric rigidity, so the usual
E2B/N/S16 1 1 1 1 1 1 isolation distances become insufficient. This leads to a decrease in the
E2B/N/S20 1 1 1 1 0.9 0.9 maximum rated voltage at which the device can be used.
E2L 12 1 1 1 1 1 1
E2L 16 1 1 1 1 0.925 0.93
E3H/V 08 1 1 1 1 1 1
The correction factors for the different types of circuit-breakers, both moulded- case
E3S/ V 10 1 1 1 1 1 1 and air circuit-breakers, are given in the following table:
E3S/H/V 12 1 1 1 1 1 1
E3S/H/V 16 1 1 1 1 1 1
E3S/H/V20 1 1 1 1 1 1
E3N/S/H/ V25 1 1 1 1 1 1
E3N/S/H/ V32 1 1 0.95 0.96 0.875 0.87
E3L 20 1 1 1 1 1 1
E3L 25 1 1 0.95 0.95 0.9 0.9 Rated operational voltage Ue [V]
E4H/V32 1 1 1 1 1 1 Altitude 2000[m] 3000[m] 4000[m] 5000[m]
E4S/H/V40 1 1 0.975 0.99 0.875 0.87 Tmax* 690 600 500 440
E6V 32 1 1 1 1 1 1 Isomax 690 600 500 440
E6H/ V 40 1 1 1 1 1 1
Emax 690 600 500 440
E6H/ V 50 1 1 0.95 0.97 0.9 0.92
E6H/V 63 0.95 0.95 0.9 0.9 0.825 0.83
Rated uninterrupted current Iu [A]
Vertical Terminals Altitude 2000[m] 3000[m] 4000[m] 5000[m]
35 °C 45 °C 55 °C Tmax 100% 98% 93% 90%
PR121 PR122/PR123 PR121 PR122/PR123 PR121 PR122/PR123 Isomax 100% 95% 90% 85%
E1B/N 08 1 1 1 1 1 1 Emax 100% 98% 93% 90%
E1B/N 10 1 1 1 1 1 1
E1B/N 12 1 1 1 1 0.95 0.96 *Excluding Tmax T1P
E1B/N 16 0.95 0.96 0.9 0.9 0.825 0.84
E2S 08 1 1 1 1 1 1
E2N/S 10 1 1 1 1 1 1
E2N/S 12 1 1 1 1 1 1
E2B/N/S16 1 1 1 1 0.95 0.95
E2B/N/S20 1 1 1 1 0.875 0.87
E2L 12 1 1 1 1 1 1
E2L 16 1 1 0.925 0.93 0.875 0.87
E3H/ V 08 1 1 1 1 1 1
E3S/H 10 1 1 1 1 1 1
E3S/H/ V 12 1 1 1 1 1 1
E3S/H/ V16 1 1 1 1 1 1
E3S/H/ V20 1 1 1 1 1 1
E3N/S/H/ V25 1 1 0.975 0.98 0.95 0.96
E3N/S/H/ V32 0.925 0.93 0.9 0.9 0.825 0.82
E3L 20 1 1 1 1 0.975 0.98
E3L 25 0.95 0.95 0.9 0.9 0.825 0.84
E4H/ V32 1 1 0.975 0.98 0.925 0.93
E4S/H/ V40 0.9 0.9 0.875 0.87 0.775 0.78
E6V 32 1 1 1 1 1 1
E6H/ V 40 1 1 1 1 1 1
E6H/ V 50 0.95 0.97 0.9 0.9 0.85 0.85
E6H/ V 63 - - - - - -
3.7 Electrical characteristics of switch disconnectors

3.7 Electrical characteristics of switch disconnectors The characteristics of the utilization categories are detailed in Table 1 below.
The most demanding category in alternating current is AC23A, for which the
device must be capable of connecting a current equal to 10 times the rated
A switch disconnector as defined by the standard IEC 60947-3 is a mechanical
current of the device, and of disconnecting a current equal to 8 times the rated
switching device which, when in the open position, carries out a disconnecting
current of the device.
function and ensures an isolating distance (distance between contacts) sufficient
to guarantee safety. This safety of disconnection must be guaranteed and verified
From the point of view of construction, the switch disconnector is a very simple
by the positive operation: the operating lever must always indicate the actual
device. It is not fitted with devices for overcurrent detection and the consequent
position of the mobile contacts of the device.
automatic interruption of the current. Therefore the switch disconnector cannot
The mechanical switching device must be able to make, carry and break currents
be used for automatic protection against overcurrent which may occur in the
in normal circuit conditions, including any overload currents in normal service,
case of failure, protection must be provided by a coordinated circuit-breaker.
and to carry, for a specified duration, currents in abnormal circuit conditions,
The combination of the two devices allows the use of switch disconnectors in
such as, for example, short-circuit conditions.
systems in which the short-circuit current value is greater than the electrical
parameters which define the performance of the disconnector (back-up
Switch disconnectors are often used as:
protection see Chapter 4.4. This is valid only for Isomax and Tmax switch-
• main sub-switchboard devices;
disconnectors. For the Emax/MS air disconnectors, it must be verified that the
• switching and disconnecting devices for lines, busbars or load units;
values for Icw and Icm are higher to the values for short-circuit in the plant and
• bus-tie.
correspondent peak, respectively.
The switch disconnector shall ensure that the whole plant or part of it is not live,
safely disconnecting from any electrical supply. The use of such a switch
disconnector allows, for example, personnel to carry out work on the plant
without risks of electrical nature.
Even if the use of a single pole devices side by side is not forbidden, the standards
recommend the use of multi-pole devices so as to guarantee the simultaneous
isolation of all poles in the circuit.
The specific rated characteristics of switch disconnectors are defined by the Table1: Utilization categories
standard IEC 60947-3, as detailed below: Utilization categories
• Icw [kA]: rated short-time withstand current: Nature Utilization category Typical applications
is the current that a switch is capable of carrying, without damage, in the of current Frequent Non-frequent
closed position for a specific duration operation operation
• Icm [kA]: rated short-circuit making capacity: AC-20A AC-20B Connecting and disconnecting under no-load conditions
is the maximum peak value of a short-circuit current which the switch
disconnector can close without damages. When this value is not given by the AC-21A AC-21B Switching of resistive loads including moderate overloads
manufacturer it must be taken to be at least equal to the peak current Alternating
corresponding to Icw. It is not possible to define a breaking capacity Icu [kA] Current AC-22A AC-22B Switching of mixed resistive and inductive loads, including
since switch disconnectors are not required to break short-circuit currents moderate overload
• utilization categories with alternating current AC and with direct AC-23A AC-23B Switching of motor loads or other highly inductive loads
current DC:
define the kind of the conditions of using which are represented by two letters DC-20A DC-20B Connecting and disconnecting under no-load conditions
to indicate the type of circuit in which the device may be installed (AC for
alternating current and DC for direct current), with a two digit number for the Direct DC-21A DC-21B Switching of resistive loads including moderate overloads
type of load which must be operated, and an additional letter (A or B) which Current
represents the frequency in the using. DC-22A DC-22B Switching of mixed resistive and inductive loads, including
With reference to the utilization categories, the product standard defines the moderate overload (e.g. shunt motors)
current values which the switch disconnector must be able to break and
DC-23A DC-23B Switching of highly inductive loads
make under abnormal conditions.
3.7 Electrical characteristics of switch disconnectors 3.7 Electrical characteristics of switch disconnectors

Tables 2, 3 and 4 detail the main characteristics of the disconnectors.
Table 2: Tmax switch disconnectors

T1D T3D T4D T5D T6D
Conventional thermal current, Ith [A] 160 250 250/320 400/630 630/800/1000
Rated current in AC-22A utilization category, Ie [A] 160 250 250/320 400/630 630/800/1000
Rated current in AC-23A utilization category, Ie [A] 125 200 250 400 630/800
Poles [Nr] 3/4 3/4 3/4 3/4 3/4
50-60 Hz [Vac] 690 690 690 690 690
Rated operational voltage, Ue
dc [Vdc] 500 500 750 750 750
Rated impulse withstand voltage, Uimp [kV] 8 8 8 8 8
Rated insulation voltage, Ui [V] 800 800 800 800 1000
Test voltage at industrial frequency for 1 minute [V] 3000 3000 3000 3000 3500
(min) switch disconnector only [kA] 2.8 5.3 5,3 11 30
Rated short-circuit making capacity (415Vac), Icm
(max) with circuit-breaker on supply side [kA] 187 105 440 440 440
Rated short time withstand current for 1s, Icw [kA] 2 3.6 3.6 6 15
Insulation behaviour
Reference standard IEC 60947-3 IEC 60947-3 IEC 60947-3 IEC 60947-3 IEC 60947-3
Versions F F-P F-P-W F-P-W F-W
FC Cu - EF F - FC Cu - FC CuAl F - FCCu - FCCuAl - EF-ES F - FCCu - FCCuAl -EF F-EF-FC - CuAl-R

Terminals
FC CuAl EF-ES - R - FC CuAl R- MC -HR - VR ES- R - HR - VR ES - RC
Mechanical life [No. of operations] 25000 25000 20000 20000 20000

[Operations per hour] 120 120 120 120 120
3 poles L [mm] 76 105 105 140 210
4 poles L [mm] 102 140 140 184 280
Basic dimensions, fixed
D [mm] 130 150 205 205 103,5
H [mm] 70 70 103,5 103,5 268
3/4 poles fixed [kg] 0.9/1.2 2.1/3 2.35/3.05 3.25/4.15 9.5/12
Weight 3/4 poles plug-in [kg] - 2.1/3.7 3.6/4.65 5.15/6.65 -
3/4 poles withdrawable [kg] - - 3.85/4.9 5.4/6.9 12/15.1
KEY TO VERSIONS KEY TO TERMINALS FC CuAl = Front for copper or aluminium cables VR = Rear vertical flat bar
F = Fixed F = Front R = Rear threaded
P = Plug-in EF = Extended front RC = Rear for copper or aluminium cables
W = Withdrawable ES = Extended spreaded front HR = Rear horizontal flat bar
3.7 Electrical characteristics of switch disconnectors 3.7 Electrical characteristics of switch disconnectors
Table 3: SACE Isomax switch disconnectors S7D S8D

Conventional thermal current at 40 °C, Ith [A] 1000 / 1250 / 1600 2000 / 2500 / 3200
Number of poles Nr. 3/4 3/4
Rated operational voltage, Ue (ac) 50-60Hz [V~] 690 690
(dc) [V–] 750 750
Rated current, Ie [A] 1000-1250-1600 2000-2500-3200
Test voltage at industrial frequency for 1 min. [V] 3000 3000
Rated short-circuit making capacity (415 V~), Icm [kA] 52,5 85
Rated short-time withstand current for 1 s, Icw [kA] 25 40
Isolation behaviour
IEC 60947-3
Versions F-W F
Terminals fixed F - EF - FC CuAl (1250A) EF (2500A)-R
HR - VR
plug-in - -
withdrawable F - HR - VR -
Mechanical life [No. of operations / operation per hour] 10000/120 10000/20
Basic dimensions, fixed L (3/4 poles) [mm] 210/280 406/556
D [mm] 138,5 242
H [mm] 406 400
Weight, fixed 3/4 poles [kg] 17/22 57/76
Table 4: Emax switch disconnectors

E1B/MS E1N/MS E2B/MS E2N/MS E2S/MS E3N/MS E3S/MS E3V/MS E4S/MS E4H/fMS E4H/MS E6H/MS E6H/f MS
Rated uninterrupted current [A] 800 800 1600 1000 1000 2500 1000 800 4000 3200 3200 4000 4000
(a 40 °C) Ith [A] 1000 1000 2000 1250 1250 3200 1250 1250 4000 4000 5000 5000
[A] 1250 1250 1600 1600 1600 1600 6300 6300
[A] 1600 1600 2000 2000 2000 2000
[A] 2500 2500
[A] 3200 3200
Rated operational voltage Ue [V ~] 690 690 690 690 690 690 690 690 690 690 690 690 690
[V –] 250 250 250 250 250 250 250 250 250 250 250 250 250
Rated insulation voltage Ui [V ~] 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000
Rated impulse withstand
voltage Uimp [kV] 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12
Rated short-time
withstand current Icw (1s) [kA] 42 50(1) 42 55 65 65 75 85 75 85 100(2) 100 100
(3s) [kA] 36 36 42 42 42 65 65 65 75 75 75 85 85
Rated short-circuit making capacity (peak value) Icm
220/230/380/400/415/440 V ~[kA] 88.2 105 88.2 143 187 143 165 286 165 220 220 220 220
500/660/690 V ~ [kA] 75.6 75.6 88.2 121 143 143 165 220 165 220 187 220 220
(1)
Note: the breaking capacity Icu, at the maximum rated use voltage, by means of external Icw=36kA@690V.
(2)
protection relay, with 500 ms maximum timing, is equal to the value of Icw (1s). Icw=85kA@690V.
4.1 Protection coordination
4 Protection coordination 4 Protection coordination

4.1 Protection coordination Definition of discrimination
The design of a system for protecting an electric network is of fundamental The over-current discrimination is defined in the Standards as “coordination
importance both to ensure the correct economic and functional operation of of the operating characteristics of two or more over-current protective devices
the installation as a whole and to reduce to a minimum any problem caused by such that, on the incidence of over-currents within stated limits, the device
anomalous operating conditions and/or malfunctions. intended to operate within these limits does so, while the others do not opera-
The present analysis discusses the coordination between the different devices te” (IEC 60947-1, def. 2.5.23);
dedicated to the protection of zones and specific components with a view to: It is possible to distinguish between:
• guaranteeing safety for people and installation at all times; • total discrimination, which means “over-current discrimination such that, in
• identifying and rapidly excluding only the zone affected by a problem, instead the case of two over-current protective devices in series, the protective device
of taking indiscriminate actions and thus reducing the energy available to the on the load side provides protection without tripping the other protective device”
rest of the network; (IEC 60947-2, def. 2.17.2);
• containing the effects of a malfunction on other intact parts of the network • partial discrimination, which means “over-current discrimination such that,
(voltage dips, loss of stability in the rotating machines); in the case of two over-current protective devices in series, the protective
• reducing the stress on components and damage in the affected zone; device on the load side provides protection up to a given over-current limit
• ensuring the continuity of the service with a good quality feeding voltage; without tripping the other” (IEC 60947-2, def. 2.17.3); this over-current threshold
• guaranteeing an adequate back-up in the event of any malfunction of the is called “discrimination limit current Is” (IEC 60947-2, def. 2.17.4).
protective device responsible for opening the circuit;
• providing staff and management systems with the information they need to
restore the service as rapidly as possible and with a minimal disturbance to
the rest of the network;
• achieving a valid compromise between reliability, simplicity and cost Current discrimination
effectiveness.
This type of discrimination is based on the observation that the closer the fault
To be more precise, a valid protection system must be able to: comes to the network’s feeder, the greater the short-circuit current will be. We
• understand what has happened and where it has happened, discriminating can therefore pinpoint the zone where the fault has occurred simply by calibrating
between situations that are anomalous but tolerable and faults within a given the instantaneous protection of the device upstream to a limit value higher than
zone of influence, avoiding unnecessary tripping and the consequent the fault current which causes the tripping of the device downstream.
unjustified disconnection of a sound part of the system; We can normally achieve total discrimination only in specific cases where the
• take action as rapidly as possible to contain damage (destruction, accelerated fault current is not very high (and comparable with the device’s rated current) or
ageing, ...), safeguarding the continuity and stability of the power supply. where a component with high impedance is between the two protective devices
The most suitable solution derives from a compromise between these two (e.g. a transformer, a very long or small cable...) giving rise to a large difference
opposing needs - to identify precisely the fault and to act rapidly - and is defined between the short-circuit current values.
in function of which of these two requirements takes priority.
This type of coordination is consequently feasible mainly in final distribution
networks (with low rated current and short-circuit current values and a high
impedance of the connection cables).
Over-current coordination The devices’ time-current tripping curves are generally used for the study.
Influence of the network’s electrical parameters (rated current and short- This solution is:
circuit current) • rapid;
• easy to implement;
The strategy adopted to coordinate the protective devices depends mainly on • and inexpensive.
the rated current (In) and short-circuit current (Ik) values in the considered point
of network. On the other hand:
Generally speaking, we can classify the following types of coordination: • the discrimination limits are normally low;
• increasing the discrimination levels causes a rapid growing of the device sizes.
• current discrimination;
• time (or time-current) discrimination; The following example shows a typical application of current discrimination based
• zone (or logical) discrimination; on the different instantaneous tripping threshold values of the circuit-breakers
• energy discrimination; considered.
• back-up.
4.1 Protection coordination 4.1 Protection coordination

With a fault current value at the defined point equal to 1000 A, an adequate • it enables the use of current-limiting circuit-breakers only at levels hierarchically
coordination is obtained by using the considered circuit-breakers as verified in lower down the chain; the other circuit-breakers have to be capable of
the tripping curves of the protection devices. withstanding the thermal and electro-dynamic stresses related to the passage
The discrimination limit is given by the minimum magnetic threshold of the of the fault current for the intentional time delay. Selective circuit-breakers,
circuit-breaker upstream, T1B160 In160. often air type, have to be used for the various levels to guarantee a sufficiently
Time-current curves high short-time withstand current;
[s] 104 • the duration of the disturbance induced by the short-circuit current on the
U Ur = 400V power supply voltages in the zones unaffected by the fault can cause problems
with electronic and electro-mechanical devices (voltage below the
103
electromagnetic releasing value);
• the number of discrimination levels is limited by the maximum time that the
T1B 160 In160 102 network can stand without loss of stability.
T1B160In25 The following example shows a typical application of time discrimination obtained
101 by setting differently the tripping times of the different protection devices.
1
Cable
T1B160In160 Electronic release: L (Long delay) S (Short delay) I (IST)
10 -1
Setting: 0.9 Setting: 8.5
E4S 4000 PR121-LSI In4000 Off
1SDC008014F0001
Curve: 12s Curve: 0.5s
Setting: 1 Setting: 10
T1D 160 E3N 2500 PR121-LSI In2500 Off
10 -2 Curve: 3s Curve: 0.3s
Setting: 1
S7H 1600 PR211-LI In1600 Setting: 10
Curve: A
10 -1 1 10 1 I [kA]
T1B 160 In25
U Ur = 15000 V
Ik=1kA
Time-current curves
[s] 104
Sr = 2500 kVA
Ur2 = 400 V
Time discrimination uk% = 6%
103
This type of discrimination is an evolution from the previous one. The setting
strategy is therefore based on progressively increasing the current thresholds
E4S 4000 PR121-LSI In4000 102
and the time delays for tripping the protective devices as we come closer to the E4S4000
power supply source. As in the case of current discrimination, the study is
based on a comparison of the time-current tripping curves of the protective 101
devices.
This type of coordination:
• is easy to study and implement; E3N 2500 PR121-LSI In2500 1
• is relatively inexpensive;
• enables to achieve even high discrimination levels, depending on the Icw of
1SDC008015F0001
10 -1 S7H1600 E3N2500
the upstream device;
• allows a redundancy of the protective functions and can send valid information
to the control system, S7H 1600 PR211-LI In1600
10 -2
but has the following disadvantages:
• the tripping times and the energy levels that the protective devices (especially
those closer to the sources) let through are high, with obvious problems Ik=60kA 10 1 10 2 10 3 I [kA]
1
concerning safety and damage to the components even in zones unaffected
by the fault;

Zone (or logical) discrimination Zone selectivity for circuit-breakers type Emax with PR123 releases
The zone discrimination is available with MCCB (T4 L-T6 L-T6L with PR223- A
EF) and ACB (with PR122 or PR123). OUT
This type of coordination is implemented by means of a dialogue between E4S 400PR123/P
IN
current measuring devices that, when they ascertain that a setting threshold
has been exceeded, give the correct identification and disconnection only of
the zone affected by the fault.
In practice, it can be implemented in two ways:
• the releases send information on the preset current threshold that has been
exceeded to the supervisor system and the latter decides which protective
device has to trip;
B
• in the event of current values exceeding its setting threshold, each protective E3N 2500PR123/P OUT E2N 1000PR123/P OUT
device sends a blocking signal via a direct connection or bus to the protective
IN IN
device higher in the hierarchy (i.e. upstream with respect to the direction of C
the power flow) and, before it trips, it makes sure that a similar blocking signal
has not arrived from the protective device downstream; in this way, only the Ik
protective device immediately upstream of the fault trips.
The first mode foresees tripping times of about one second and is used mainly
in the case of not particularly high short-circuit currents where a power flow is
not uniquely defined. D OUT OUT
The second mode enables distinctly shorter tripping times: with respect to a E1N 800PR122/P E1N 800PR122/P
1SDC200559F0001
time discrimination coordination, there is no longer any need to increase the IN IN
intentional time delay progressively as we move closer to the source of the
E
power supply. The maximum delay is in relation to the time necessary to detect
any presence of a blocking signal sent from the protective device downstream.
Advantages:
• reduction of the tripping times and increase of the safety level;
The example above shows a plant wired so as to guarantee zone selectivity
• reduction of both the damages caused by the fault as well of the disturbances
with Emax CB equipped with PR122/P-PR123/P releases.
in the power supply network;
Each circuit-breaker detecting a fault sends a signal to the circuit-breaker
• reduction of the thermal and dynamic stresses on the circuit-breakers and on
immediately on the supply side through a communication wire; the circuit-breaker
the components of the system;
that does not receive any communication from the circuit-breakers on the load
• large number of discrimination levels;
side shall launch the opening command.
• redundancy of protections: in case of malfunction of zone discrimination, the
In this example, with a fault located in the indicated point, the circuit-breakers
tripping is ensured by the settings of the other protection functions of the
D and E do not detect the fault and therefore they do not communicate with
circuit-breakers. In particular, it is possible to adjust the time-delay protection
the circuit-breaker on the supply side (circuit-breaker B), which shall launch the
functions against short-circuit at increasing time values, the closer they are to
opening command within the selectivity time set from 40 to 200 ms.
the network’s feeder.
Disadvantages:
To actuate correctly zone selectivity, the following settings are suggested:
• higher costs;
• greater complexity of the system (special components, additional wiring,
S t2 = selectivity time
auxiliary power sources, ...).
I I3 = OFF
G t4 = selectivity time
This solution is therefore used mainly in systems with high rated current and
Selectivity time same settings for each circuit-breaker
high short-circuit current values, with precise needs in terms of both safety and
continuity of service: in particular, examples of logical discrimination can be
often found in primary distribution switchboards, immediately downstream of
transformers and generators and in meshed networks.

Zone selectivity for circuit-breakers type Tmax (T4L-T5L-T6L) with Energy discrimination
PR223 EF releases
Energy coordination is a particular type of discrimination that exploits the current-
A limiting characteristics of moulded-case circuit-breakers. It is important to
OUT remember that a current-limiting circuit-breaker is “a circuit-breaker with a break
T5L 630 PR223/EF time short enough to prevent the short-circuit current reaching its otherwise
IN
attainable peak value” (IEC 60947-2, def. 2.3).
In practice, ABB SACE moulded-case circuit-breakers of Isomax and Tmax
series, under short-circuit conditions, are extremely rapid (tripping times of about
some milliseconds) and therefore it is impossible to use the time-current curves
for the coordination studies.
The phenomena are mainly dynamic (and therefore proportional to the square
of the instantaneous current value) and can be described by using the specific
let-through energy curves.
In general, it is necessary to verify that the let-through energy of the circuit-
breaker downstream is lower than the energy value needed to complete the
OUT OUT OUT opening of the circuit-breaker upstream.
IN T4L 250 PR223/EF IN T4L 250 PR223/EF IN This type of discrimination is certainly more difficult to consider than the previous
ones because it depends largely on the interaction between the two devices
B C D placed in series and demands access to data often unavailable to the end user.
T4L 250 PR223/EF
Manufacturers provide tables, rules and calculation programs in which the
Ik minimum discrimination limits are given between different combinations of circuit-
1SDC200560F0001
breakers.
Advantages:
• fast breaking, with tripping times which reduce as the short-circuit current
increases;
• reduction of the damages caused by the fault (thermal and dynamic stresses),
of the disturbances to the power supply system, of the costs...;
The example above shows a plant wired through an interlocking protocol • the discrimination level is no longer limited by the value of the short-time
(Interlocking, IL), so as to guarantee zone selectivity through PR223 EF release. withstand current Icw which the devices can withstand;
In case of short-circuit, the circuit-breaker immediately on the supply side of • large number of discrimination levels;
the fault sends through the bus a block signal to the protection device • possibility of coordination of different current-limiting devices (fuses, circuit-
hierarchically higher and verifies, before tripping, that an analogous block signal breakers,..) even if they are positioned in intermediate positions along the
has not been sent by the protection on the load side. chain.
In the example in the figure, the circuit-breaker C, immediately on the supply Disadvantage:
side of the fault, sends a block signal to the circuit-breaker A, which is • difficulty of coordination between circuit-breakers of similar sizes.
hierarchically higher. If, as in the given example, no protection on the load side
is present, the circuit-breaker C shall open in very quick times since it has This type of coordination is used above all for secondary and final distribution
received no block signal. networks, with rated currents below 1600A.
Everything occurs in shorter times (10 to 15ms) than in the case of zone selectivity
with the Emax series air circuit-breaker (40 to 200ms), thus subjecting the plant Back-up protection
to lower electrodynamic stresses, and with a consequent cost reduction for The back-up protection is an “over-current coordination of two over-current
the plant. protective devices in series where the protective device, generally but not
necessarily on the supply side, effects the over-current protection with or without
the assistance of the other protective device and prevents any excessive stress
on the latter” (IEC 60947-1, def. 2.5.24).
Besides, IEC 60364-4-43, § 434.5.1 states: “… A lower breaking capacity is
admitted if another protective device having the necessary breaking capacity is
installed on the supply side. In that case, characteristics of the devices, must
be co-ordinated so that the energy let through by these two devices does not
exceed that which can be withstood without damage by the device on the load
side and the conductors protected by these devices.”
4.1 Protection coordination

Advantages:
• cost-saving solution; 4.2 Discrimination tables
The tables below give the selectivity values of short-circuit currents (in kA)
• extremely rapid tripping.
between pre-selected combinations of circuit-breakers, for voltages from 380
Disadvantages: to 415 V. The tables cover the possible combinations of ABB SACE Emax air
• extremely low discrimination values; circuit-breakers series, ABB SACE Isomax and Tmax moulded-case circuit-
• low service quality, since at least two circuit-breakers in series have to trip. breakers series and the series of ABB modular circuit-breakers.
The values are obtained following particular rules which, if not respected, may
give selectivity values which in some cases may be much lower than those
given. Some of these guidelines are generally valid and are indicated below;
others refer exclusively to particular types of circuit-breakers and will be subject
to notes below the relevant table.
Coordination between circuit-breaker and switch General rules:
disconnector • the function l of electronic releases (PR121-PR122-PR123, PR211/P-PR212/
P, PR221DS-PR222DS/P) of upstream breakers must be excluded (l3 in OFF);
• the magnetic trip of thermomagnetic (TM) or magnetic only (MA-MF) breakers
The switch disconnector positioned upstream must be ≥ 10·In and set to the maximum threshold;
• it is fundamentally important to verify that the settings adopted by the user for
the electronic and thermomagnetic releases of breakers positioned either
The switch disconnectors derive from the corresponding circuit-breakers, of upstream or downstream result in time-current curves properly spaced.
which they keep the overall dimensions, the fixing systems and the possibility
of mounting all the accessories provided for the basic versions. They are devices Notes for the correct reading of the coordination tables:
which can make, carry and break currents under normal service conditions of The limit value of selectivity is obtained considering the lower among the given
value, the breaking capacity of the CB on the supply side and the breaking
the circuit.
capacity of the CB on the load side.
They can also be used as general circuit-breakers in sub-switchboards, as The letter T indicates total selectivity for the given combination, the corresponding
bus-ties, or to isolate installation parts, such as lines, busbars or groups of value in kA is obtained considering the lower of the downstream and upstream
loads. circuit-breakers’ breaking capacities (Icu).
Once the contacts have opened, these switches guarantee isolation thanks to
their contacts, which are at the suitable distance to prevent an arc from striking The following tables show the breaking capacities at 415Vac for SACE Emax,
in compliance with the prescriptions of the standards regarding aptitude to Isomax and Tmax circuit-breakers.
isolation. Tmax @ 415V ac Isomax @ 415V ac Emax @ 415V ac
Version Icu [kA] Version Icu [kA] Version Icu [kA]
Protection of switch disconnectors B 16 N 35* B 42
C 25 S 50 N 65**
N 36 H 65 S 75***
Each switch disconnector shall be protected by a coordinated device which
S 50 L 100 H 100
safeguards it against overcurrents, usually a circuit-breaker able to limit the
H 70 L 130
short-circuit current and the let-through energy values at levels acceptable for
L (for T2) 85 V 150****
the switch-disconnector. * Versions certified at 36 kA
L (for T4-T5) 120 ** For Emax E1 version N Icu=50 kA
As regards overload protection, the rated current of the circuit-breaker shall be
L (for T6) 100 *** For Emax E2 version S Icu=85 kA
lower than or equal to the size of the disconnector to be protected.
V 200 **** For Emax E3 version V Icu=130 kA
Regarding Isomax and Tmax series switch disconnectors the coordination tables
show the circuit-breakers which can protect them against the indicated Keys
prospective short-circuit currents values. For MCCB (Moulded-case circuit-breaker) For MCB (Miniature circuit-breaker):
ACB (Air circuit-breaker) B = charatteristic trip (I3=3...5In)
Regarding Emax series switch disconnectors it is necessary to verify that the TM = thermomagnetic release C = charatteristic trip (I3=5...10In)
short-circuit current value at the installation point is lower than the short-time – TMD (Tmax) D = charatteristic trip (I3=10...20In)
withstand current Icw of the disconnector, and that the peak value is lower than – TMA (Tmax) K = charatteristic trip (I3=8...14In)
– T adjustable M adjustable (Isomax) Z = charatteristic trip (I3=2...3In)
the making current value (Icm). M = magnetic only release
– MF (Tmax)
– MA (Tmax)
EL = elettronic release
– PR121/P - PR122/P - PR123/P
– PR211/P - PR212/P (Isomax)
– PR221DS - PR222DS (Tmax)
4.2 Discrimination tables 4.2 Discrimination tables

Example: Discrimination tables MCB-MCB
From the selectivity table on page 213 it can be seen that breakers E2N1250 MCB - S2.. B @ 415V
and T5H400,correctly set, are selective up to 55kA (higher than the short-circuit
current at the busbar). Supply s.
From the selectivity table on page 206 it can be seen that, between T5H400 S290 S500
and T1N160 In125, the total sectivity is granted; as aleady specified on page Char. D D
189 this means selectivity up to the breaking capacity of T1N and therefore up
to 36 kA (higher than the short-circuit current at the busbar). Icu [kA] 15 50
6 10 15 25 In [A] 80 100 32 40 50 63
Time-current curves
t [s] 104 - - - - ≤2
U Ur = 400V - - - - 3
- - - - 4
103
- S200 S200M S200P 6 10.5 T 1.5 2 3 5.5
E2N 1250 In1250 - S200 S200M S200P 8 10.5 T 1.5 2 3 5.5
E2N1250 In1250
102 - S200 S200M S200P 10 5 8 1 1.5 2 3
Load s.
- S200 S200M S200P 13 4.5 7 1.5 2 3
B
Cable - S200 S200M S200P 16 4,5 7 2 3
101
- S200 S200M S200P 20 3.5 5 2.5
Ik=50kA - S200 S200M S200P 25 3.5 5
T5H400 In400
1 32 4.5
- S200 S200M-S200P -
T1N160 In125 - S200 S200M-S200P - 40
T5H400 - S200 S200M-S200P - 50
1SDC008016F0001
10-1
- S200 S200M-S200P - 63
10-2
Cable
MCB - S2.. C @ 415V
Ik=22kA 10-1 1 101 22kA 50kA I [kA]
Supply s.
S290 S500
T1N160 In125
Char. D D
Icu [kA] 15 50
6 10 15 25 In [A] 80 100 32 40 50 63
- S200 S200M S200P ≤2 T T T T T T
From the curves it is evident that between breakers E2N1250 and T5H400
- S200 S200M S200P 3 T T 3 6 T T
time discrimination exists, while between breakers T5H400 and T1N160 there
is energy discrimination. - S200 S200M S200P 4 T T 2 3 6 T
S200L S200 S200M S200P 6 10.5 T 1.5 2 3 5.5
S200L S200 S200M S200P 8 10.5 T 1.5 2 3 5.5
S200L S200 S200M S200P 10 5 8 1 1.5 2 3
Load s.
S200L S200 S200M S200P 13 4.5 7 1.5 2 3
C
S200L S200 S200M S200P 16 4,5 7 2 3
S200L S200 S200M S200P 20 3.5 5 2.5
S200L S200 S200M S200P 25 3.5 5
1SDC008004F0201
S200L S200 S200M-S200P - 32 4.5
S200L S200 S200M-S200P - 40
- S200 S200M-S200P - 50
- S200 S200M-S200P - 63

Discrimination tables MCB-MCB
MCB - S2.. D @ 415V MCB - S2.. Z @ 415V
Supply s. Supply s.
S290 S500 S290 S500
Char. D D Char. D D
Icu [kA] 15 50 Icu [kA] 15 50
6 10 15 25 In [A] 80 100 32 40 50 63 6 10 15 25 In [A] 80 100 32 40 50 63
- S200 S200M S200P ≤2 T T T T T T - S200 - S200P ≤2 T T T T T T
- S200 S200M S200P 3 T T 3 6 T T - S200 - S200P 3 T T 3 6 T T
- S200 S200M S200P 4 T T 2 3 6 T - S200 - S200P 4 T T 2 3 6 T
- S200 S200M S200P 6 10.5 T 1.5 2 3 5.5 - S200 - S200P 6 10.5 T 1.5 2 3 5.5
- S200 S200M S200P 8 10.5 T 1.5 2 3 5.5 - S200 - S200P 8 10.5 T 1.5 2 3 5.5
- S200 S200M S200P 10 5 8 1 1.5 2 3 - S200 - S200P 10 5 8 1 1.5 2 3
Load s.
Load s.
- S200 - S200P 13 3 5 1.5 2 - - - S200P 13 4.5 7 1 1.5 2 3
D Z
- S200 S200M S200P 16 3 5 2 - S200 - S200P 16 4.5 7 1 1.5 2 3
- S200 S200M S200P 20 3 5 - S200 - S200P 20 3.5 5 1.5 2 2.5
- S200 S200M S200P 25 4
1SDC008005F0201
- S200 - S200P 25 3.5 5 2 2.5
- S200 S200M-S200P - 32 - S200 S200P - 32 3 4.5 2
- S200 S200M-S200P - 40 - S200 S200P - 40 3 4.5
- S200 S200M-S200P - 50 - S200 S200P - 50 3
- S200 S200M-S200P - 63 - S200 S200P - 63
MCB - S2.. K @ 415V
Supply s.
S290 S500
Char. D D
Icu [kA] 15 50
6 10 15 25 In [A] 80 100 32 40 50 63
- S200 S200M S200P ≤2 T T T T T T
- S200 S200M S200P 3 T T 3 6 T T
- S200 S200M S200P 4 T T 2 3 6 T
- S200 S200M S200P 6 10.5 T 1.5 2 3 5.5
- S200 S200M S200P 8 10.5 T 1.5 2 3 5.5
- S200 S200M S200P 10 5 8 1.5 2 3
Load s.
- - - S200P 13 3 5 1.5 2
K
- S200 S200M S200P 16 3 5 2
- S200 S200M S200P 20 3 5
- S200 S200M S200P 25 4
- S200 S200M-S200P - 32
- S200 S200M-S200P - 40
- S200 S200M-S200P - 50
- S200 S200M-S200P - 63

Discrimination tables MCB/MCCB - S500
MCB/MCCB - S500 @ 415V
Version B, C, N, S, H, L, V B, C, N, S, H, L, V
Release TM TM EL
Supply s. S290 D T2 T1-T2 T1-T2-T3 T3 T4 T2 T4-T5
200÷ 100÷
Load s. Char. Icu [kA] In [A] 80 100 12.5 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 125 160 200 250 20 25 32 50 80 100 125 160 250 10 25 63 100 160 630
6 6 10 4.5 5.5 5.5 5.5 5.5 5.5 5.5 10.5 15 20 25 36 36 36 7.5 7.5(4) 7.5 7.5 16 T T T T 36 36 36 36 T
10 6 10 4.5(1) 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 8 10 20 25 36 36 36 6.5 6.5(4) 6.5 6.5 11 T T T T 36 36 36 36 T
13 6 10 4.5(1) 4.5 4.5 4.5 7.5 10 15 25 36 36 36 6.5 5(4) 6.5 6.5 11 T T T T 36 36 36 36 T
16 6 10 4.5(1) 4.5 4.5 7.5 10 15 25 36 36 36 5(4) 6.5 6.5 11 T T T T 36 36 36 T
20 6 7.5 4.5(1) 4.5 7.5 10 15 25 36 36 36 4(4) 6.5 6.5 11 T T T T 36 36 36 T
B, C 50
25 4.5 6 4.5(1) 6 10 15 20 36 36 36 6.5 11 T T T T 36 36 36 T
32 6 4.5(1) 7.5 10 20 36 36 36 6.5 8 T T T T 36 36 36 T
40 5(1) 10 20 36 36 36 5(4) 6.5 T T T T 36 36 T
50 5(1) 7.5(2) 15 36 36 36 5(4) 7.5 T T T 36 36 T
63 5(2) 6(3) 36 36 36 5(4) 7 T T 36 T
6 6 10 4.5 5.5 5.5 5.5 5.5 5.5 5.5 10.5 15 20 25 36 36 36 7.5 7.5(4) 7.5 7.5 16 T T T T 36 36 36 36 T
10 6 10 4.5(1) 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 8 10 20 25 36 36 36 6.5 6.5(4) 6.5 6.5 11 T T T T 36 36 36 36 T
13 6 10 4.5(1) 4.5 4.5 4.5 7.5 10 15 25 36 36 36 5(4) 6.5 11 T T T T 36 36 36 36 T
16 6 10 4.5(1) 4.5 4.5 7.5 10 15 25 36 36 36 6.5 11 T T T T 36 36 36 T
20 6 7.5 4.5(1) 4.5 7.5 10 15 25 36 36 36 6.5(4) 11 T T T T 36 36 36 T
D 50 25 4.5 6 4.5(1) 6 10 15 20 36 36 36 6.5(4) 11 T T T T 36 36 36 T
S500
32 6 4.5(1) 7.5 10 20 36 36 36 8 T T T T 36 36 36 T
40 5(1) 10 20 36 36 36 6.5(4) T(4) T T T 36 36 T
50 5(1) 7.5(2) 15 36 36 36 7.5(4) T(4) T T 36 36 T
63 5(2) 6(3) 36 36 36 7(4) T(4) T 36 T
≤5.8 T T 36 36 36 36 36 36 36 36 36 36 36 50 T T 40 40(4) 40 40 40 T T T T 50 50 50 50 50 T
50 5.3…8 10 T 4.5(1) 5.5 5.5 5.5 5.5 5.5 5.5 10.5 36 36 36 50 T T 6 6(4) 6 6 40 T T T T 50 50 50 50 T
7.3…11 7.5 T 4.5(1) 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 8 36 36 36 50 T T 5(4) 5 5 40 T T T T 50 50 50 50 T
10…15 4.5 10 4.5(1) 4.5 4.5 4.5 7.5 10 15 T T T T 5(4) 5 12 T T T T T T T T T
K 14…20 4.5 6 4.5(1) 4.5 4.5 7.5 10 15 T T T T 5 12 T T T T T T T T
18…26
1SDC008006F0201
4.5 4.5(1) 4.5 7.5 10 15 T T T T 5(4) 12(4) T T T T T T T T
30 23…32 4.5(1) 6 10 15 20 T T T 5(4) 12(4) T(4) T T T T T T T
29…37 4.5(1) 7.5 10 20 T T T 5(4) 8(4) T(4) T(4) T T T T T
34…41 5(1) 10 20 T T T 6(4) T(4) T(4) T T T T T
38…45 5(1) 7.5(2) 15 T T T 6(4) 8(4) T(4) T(4) T T T T
(1) Value for the supply side magnetic only T2 circuit-breaker.
(2) Value for the supply side magnetic only T2-T3 circuit-breaker.

Discrimination tables MCCB - S2..
MCCB - S2.. B @ 415V
Version B, C, N, S, H, L B, C, N, S, H, L,V
Release TM TM EL
Char. Icu [kA] Supply s. T2 T1-T2 T1-T2-T3 T3 T4 T5 T2 T4 T5
320÷ 100 250 320÷
6 10 15 25 In [A] 12.5 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 125 160 200 250 20 25 32 50 80 100 125 160 200 250 500 10 25 63 100 160 160 320 630
- - - - ≤2
- - - - 3
- - - - 4
- S200 S200M S200P 6 5.5(1) 5.5 5.5 5.5 5.5 5.5 5.5 10.5 T T T T T T 7.5 7.5(4) 7.5 7.5 T T T T T T T T T T T T T T
- S200 S200M S200P 8 5.5 5.5 5.5 5.5 5.5 10.5 T T T T T T 7.5 7.5(4) 7.5 7.5 T T T T T T T T T T T T T T
- S200 S200M S200P 10 3(1) 3 3 3 4.5 7.5 8.5 17 T T T T 5 5(4) 5 6.5 9 T T T T T T T T T T T T T
Load s.
- S200 S200M S200P 13 3(1) 3 3 4.5 7.5 7.5 12 20 T T T 5(4) 5 6.5 8 T T T T T T T T T T T T T

B
- S200 S200M S200P 16 3(1) 3 4.5 5 7.5 12 20 T T T 3(4) 5 6.5 8 T T T T T T T T T T T T
- S200 S200M S200P 20 3(1) 3 5 6 10 15 T T T 5 7.5 T T T T T T T T T T T T
- S200 S200M S200P 25 3(1) 5 6 10 15 T T T 5 7.5 T T T T T T T T T T T T
- S200 S200M-S200P - 32 3(1) 6 7.5 12 T T T 5(4) 7.5 T T T T T T T T T T T T
- S200 S200M-S200P - 40 5.5(1) 7.5 12 T T T 6.5 T T T T T T T T T T T
- S200 S200M-S200P - 50 3(1) 5(2) 7.5 10.5 T T 5(4) T T T T T T 10.5 10.5 T T T
1SDC008007F0201
- S200 S200M-S200P - 63 5(2) 6(3) 10.5 T T T(4) T(4) T T T T 10.5 T T T
- - - - 80
- - - - 100
- - - - 125

MCCB - S2.. C @ 415V
Release TM TM EL
320÷ 100 250 320÷
6 10 15 25 In [A] 12.5 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 125 160 200 250 20 25 32 50 80 100 125 160 200 250 500 10 25 63 100 160 160 320 630
- S200 S200M S200P ≤2 T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T(4) T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T
- S200 S200M S200P 3 T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T(4) T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T
S200L S200 S200M S200P 6 5.5(1) 5.5 5.5 5.5 5.5 5.5 5.5 10.5 T T T T T T 7.5 7.5(4) 7.5 7.5 T T T T T T T T T T T T T T
S200L S200 S200M S200P 8 5.5 5.5 5.5 5.5 5.5 10.5 T T T T T T 7.5 7.5(4) 7.5 7.5 T T T T T T T T T T T T T T
S200L S200 S200M S200P 10 3(1) 3 3 3 4.5 7.5 8.5 17 T T T T 5 5(4) 5 6.5 9 T T T T T T T T T T T T T
S200L S200 S200M S200P 13 3(1) 3 3 4.5 7.5 7.5 12 20 T T T 5(4) 5 6.5 8 T T T T T T T T T T T T T
S200L S200 S200M S200P 16 3(1) 3 4.5 5 7.5 12 20 T T T 3(4) 5 6.5 8 T T T T T T T T T T T T
Load s.
C S200L S200 S200M S200P 3(1) 3 5 6 10 15 T T T 5 7.5 T T T T T T T T T T T T

20
S200L S200 S200M S200P 25 3(1) 5 6 10 15 T T T 5 7.5 T T T T T T T T T T T T
S200L S200 S200M-S200P - 32 3(1) 6 7.5 12 T T T 5(4) 7.5 T T T T T T T T T T T T
S200L S200 S200M-S200P - 5.5(1) 7.5 12 T T T 6.5 T T T T T T T T T T T
1SDC008008F0201
40
- S200 S200M-S200P - 50 3(1) 5(2) 7.5 10.5 T T 5(4) T T T T T T 10.5 10.5 T T T
- S200 S200M-S200P - 63 5(2) 6(3) 10.5 T T T(4) T(4) T T T T 10.5 T T T
- - S290 - 80 4(3) 10 15 5 11 T T 4 T(5) T T
- - S290 - 100 4(3) 7.5(3) 15 5(4) 8 T T 4 12(4) T T
- - S290 - 125 7.5(3) 8(4) 12 T 4 T T
(5) Value for the supply side T4 In160 circuit-breaker.

MCCB - S2.. D @ 415V
Release TM TM EL
320÷ 100 250 320÷
6 10 15 25 In [A] 12.5 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 125 160 200 250 20 25 32 50 80 100 125 160 200 250 500 10 25 63 100 160 160 320 630
- S200 S200M S200P 8 5.5 5.5 5.5 5.5 5.5 10.5 12 T T T T T 7.5 7.5(4) 7.5 7.5 T T T T T T T T T T T T T T
- S200 S200M S200P 10 3(1) 3 3 3 3 5 8.5 17 T T T T 5 5(4) 5 5 9 T T T T T T T T T T T T T
Load s.
- S200 - S200P 13 2(1) 2 2 3 5 8 13.5 T T T 5(4) 4 5.5 T T T T T T T T T T T T

D
- S200 S200M S200P 16 2(1) 2 2 3 5 8 13.5 T T T 4 5.5 T T T T T T T T T T T T
- S200 S200M S200P 20 2(1) 2 3 4.5 6.5 11 T T T 4(4) 5 T T T T T T T T T T T T
- S200 S200M S200P 25 2(1) 2.5 4 6 9.5 T T T 4(4) 4.5 T T T T T T T T T T T T
- S200 S200M-S200P - 32 4 6 9.5 T T T 4.5(4) T T T T T T T T T T T T
- S200 S200M-S200P - 40 3(1) 5 8 T T T 4.5(4) T(4) T T T T T T T T T T
- S200 S200M-S200P - 50 2(1) 3(2) 5 9.5 T T T(4) T(4) T T T T 9.5 9.5 T T T
1SDC008009F0201
- S200 S200M-S200P - 63 3(2) 5(3) 9.5 T T T(4) T(4) T T T 9.5 T T T
- - S290 - 80 4(3) 10 15 5 11 T T 4 T(5) T T
- - S290 - 100 4(3) 7.5(3) 15 8 T T 4 12(5) T T
- - - - 125

MCCB - S2.. K @ 415V
Release TM TM EL
320÷ 100 250 320÷
6 10 15 25 In [A] 12.5 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 125 160 200 250 20 25 32 50 80 100 125 160 200 250 500 10 25 63 100 160 160 320 630
- S200 S200M S200P 8 5.5 5.5 5.5 5.5 5.5 10.5 12 T T T T T 7.5 7.5(4) 7.5 7.5 T T T T T T T T T T T T T T
- S200 S200M S200P 10 3(1) 3 3 3 3 6 8.5 17 T T T T 5(4) 5 5 9 T T T T T T T T T T T T T
Load s.
- - - S200P 13 2(1) 3 3 5 7.5 10 13.5 T T T 5(4) 5 5 8 T T T T T T T T T T T T T

K
- S200 S200M S200P 16 2(1) 3 3 4.5 7.5 10 13.5 T T T 5(4) 5 8 T T T T T T T T T T T T
- S200 S200M S200P 20 2(1) 3 3.5 5.5 6.5 11 T T T 5 6 T T T T T T T T T T T T
- S200 S200M S200P 25 2(1) 3.5 5.5 6 9.5 T T T 5(4) 6(4) T T T T T T T T T T T T
- S200 S200M-S200P - 32 4.5 6 9,5 T T T 5(4) 6(4) T(4) T T T T T T T T T T T
- S200 S200M-S200P - 40 3(1) 5 8 T T T 5.5(4) T(4) T(4) T T T T T T T T T
- S200 S200M-S200P - 50 2(1) 3(2) 6 9.5 T T 5(4) T(4) T(4) T(4) T T T 9.5 9.5 T T T
- S200 S200M-S200P - 63 3(2) 5.5(3) 9.5 T T T(4) T(4) T(4) T(4) T T 9.5 T T T
- - S290 - 80 4(3) 10 15 5 11 T T 4 T(5) T T
- - S290 - 100 4(3) 7.5(3) 15 5(4) 8 T T 4 12(5) T T
- - - - 125
1SDC008010F0201

MCCB - S2.. Z @ 400V
Release TM TM EL
320÷ 100 250 320÷
6 10 15 25 In [A] 12.5 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 125 160 200 250 20 25 32 50 80 100 125 160 200 250 500 10 25 63 100 160 160 320 630
- S200 - S200P ≤2 T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T(4) T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T
- S200 - S200P 3 T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T(4) T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T
- S200 - S200P 4 T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T(4) T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T
- S200 - S200P 6 5.5(1) 5.5 5.5 5.5 5.5 5.5 5.5 10.5 T T T T T T 7.5 7.5(4) 7.5 7.5 T T T T T T T T T T T T T T
- S200 - S200P 8 5.5 5.5 5.5 5.5 5.5 10.5 T T T T T T 7.5 7.5(4) 7.5 7.5 T T T T T T T T T T T T T T
- S200 - S200P 10 3(1) 3 3 3 4.5 8 8.5 17 T T T T 5 5(4) 5 6.5 9 T T T T T T T T T T T T T
- - - S200P 13 3(1) 3 3 4.5 7.5 7.5 12 20 T T T 5(4) 5 6.5 8 T T T T T T T T T T T T T
Load s.
Z - S200 - S200P 16 3(1) 3 4.5 5 7.5 12 20 T T T 5(4) 4.5 6.5 8 T T T T T T T T T T T T

- S200 - S200P 20 3(1) 3 5 6 10 15 T T T 5 6.5 T T T T T T T T T T T T
- S200 - S200P 25 3(1) 5 6 10 15 T T T 5 6.5 T T T T T T T T T T T T
- S200 S200P - 32 3(1) 6 7.5 12 T T T 5(4) 6.5 T T T T T T T T T T T T
- S200 S200P - 40 5.5(1) 7.5 12 T T T 5 T T T T T T T T T T T
4(1) 5(2) 7.5 10.5 T T 3.5(4) T T T T T T 10.5 10.5 T T T
1SDC008011F0201
- S200 S200P - 50
- S200 S200P - 63 5(2) 6(3) 10.5 T T T(4) T T T T T 10.5 T T T
- - - - 80
- - - - 100
- - - - 125

Discrimination tables MCCB - MCCB
MCCB - T1 @ 415V
Supply s. T1 T2 T3 T4 T4 T5 T6 S7
B,
Version C, N,S,H,L N,S N,S,H,L,V N,S,H,L,V N,S,H,L,V N,S,H,L S,H,L
N
Release TM TM,M EL TM,M TM,M EL TM EL TM,M EL EL
Iu [A] 160 160 160 250 250 400 320 400 630 400 630 800 630 800 1000 1250 1600
Load s. I n [A] 160 160 25 63 100 160 160 200 250 20 25 32 50 80 100 125 160 200 250 100 160 250 320 320 400 500 320 400 630 800 630 800 1000 1000 1250 1600
16 3 3 3 3 3 3 4 5 10* 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 T T T T T T T T T T T T T
20 3 3 3 3 3 3 4 5 10* 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 T T T T T T T T T T T T T
25 3 3 3 3 3 3 4 5 10* 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 T T T T T T T T T T T T T
32 3 3 3 3 3 4 5 10* 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 T T T T T T T T T T T T T
B
40 3 3 3 3 3 4 5 10* 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 T T T T T T T T T T T T T
T1 TM 160
B
C 50 3 3 3 3 3 4 5 10* 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 T T T T T T T T T T T T T
1SDC008012F0201
63 3 3 3 3 4 5 10* 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 T T T T T T T T T T T T T
N 80 3 4 5 10 10 10 10 10 10 T T T T T T T T T T T T T
100 5 10* 10 10 10 10 10 T T T T T T T T T T T T T
125 10* 10 10 10 T T T T T T T T T T T T T
160 10 10 T T T T T T T T T T T T T
* Value for the supply side magnetic only circuit-breaker.

MCCB T2 @ 415V
Supply
Montes. T1 T2 T3 T4 T4 T5 T6 S7
S7
Versione
Version B,
C, N,S,H,L N,S N,S,H,L,V N,S,H,L,V N,S,H,L,V N,S,H,L S,H,L
N,S,H,L
N
Relè
Release TM TM,M EL TM,M TM,M EL TM EL TM,M EL EL
Iu [A] 160 160 160 250 250 250 320 400 630 400 630 630 800 630 800 1000 1250 1600
Valles.
Load I n [A] 160 160 25 63 100 160 160 200 250 20 25 32 50 80 100 125 160 200 250 100 160 250 320 320 400 500 320 400 630 630 800 630 800 1000 10001250 1600
1.6-2.5 T T T T T T T T T T T* T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T
3.2 T T T T T T T T T T T* T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T
4-5 T T T T T T T T T T T* T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T
6.3 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 15 40 T T* T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T
8 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 15 40 T* T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T
10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 15 40 T* T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T
12.5 3 3 3 3 3 3 4 5 T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T
16 3 3 3 3 3 3 4 5 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 T T T T T T T T T T T T T T
N
20 3 3 3 3 3 3 4 5 55* 55 55 55 55 55 55 55 55 55 T T T T T T T T T T T T T T
TM 160
S 25 3 3 3 3 3 3 4 5 40* 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 T T T T T T T T T T T T T T
T2 32 3 3 3 3 3 4 5 40* 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 T T T T T T T T T T T T T T
H 40 3 3 3 3 3 4 5 30* 30* 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 T T T T T T T T T
T T T T T
L 50 3 3 3 3 3 4 5 30* 30* 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 T T T T T T T T T T T T T T
63 3 3 3 3 4 5 30* 30* 30* 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 T T T T T T T T T T T T T T
80 3 3* 4 5 25* 25* 25* 25 25 25 25 25 T T T T T T T T T T T T T T
100 4 5 25* 25* 25* 25 25 25 25 T T T T T T T T T T T T T T
125 25* 25* 25 25 T T T T T T T T T T T T T T
160 25* 25 25 T T T T T T T T T T T T T T
1SDC008013F0201
10 3 4 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 T T T T T T T T T T T T T T
25 3 4 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 T T T T T T T T T T T T T T
EL 160 63 3 4 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 T T T T T T T T T T T T T T
100 3 4 25 25 25 25 T T T T T T T T T T T T T T
160 3 4 25 25 T T T T T T T T T T T T T T

MCCB - T3 @ 415V
Supply s. T1 T2 T3 T4 T4 T5 T6 S7
Version B,
C, N,S,H,L N,S N,S,H,L,V N,S,H,L,V N,S,H,L,V N,S,H,L S,H,L
N
Release TM TM, M EL TM.M TM.M EL TM EL TM,M EL EL
Iu [A] 160 160 160 250 250 250 320 400 630 400 630 630 800 630 800 1000 1250 1600
Load s. I n [A] 160 160 25 63 100 160 160 200 250 20 25 32 50 80 100 125 160 200 250 100 160 250 320 320 400 500 320 400 630 630 800 630 800 1000 10001250 1600
63 3 4 5 7* 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 25 25 25 25 25 25 T T T T T T T T
80 3* 4 5 7* 7 7 7 7 7 25 25 25 25 25 25 T T T T T T T T
1SDC008014F0201
100 4* 5 7* 7* 7 7 7 7 25 25 25 25 25 25 40 T 40 T T T T T
N
T3 TM 160 125 7* 7 7 20 20 20 20 20 20 36 T 36 T T T T T
S 160 7 7 20 20 20 20 36 T 36 T T T T T
200 7 20 20 20 30 T 30 T T T T T
250 20 20 20 30 40 30 40 40 T T T
MCCB - T4 @ 415V
Supply s. T5 T6 S7
Version
N,S,H,L,V N,S,H,L S,H,L
Relè
Release TM EL TM,M EL EL
Iu [A] 400 630 400 630 630 800 630 800 1000 1250 1600
Valle s.
Load I n [A] 320 400 500 320 400 630 630 800 630 800 1000 1000 1250 1600
20 T T T T T T T T T T T T T T
N. TM 250 100 50 50 50 50 50 T T T T T T T T
S. 125 50 50 50 50 T T T T T T T T
T4 H. 160 50 50 50 T T T T T T T T
L. 200 50 50 50 T T T T T T T T
V 250 50 50 T T T T T T T T
100 50 50 50 50 50 50 T T T T T T T T
250 160 50 50 50 50 50 50 T T T T T T T T
EL
250 50 50 50 T T T T T T T T
320 320 50 T T T T T T T T

Discrimination tables MCCB - MCCB Discrimination tables ACB - MCCB
MCCB - T5 @ 415V ACB - MCCB @ 415V
Supply s. T6 S7 Supply s E1 E2 E3 E4 E6
Version B N B N S L* N S H V L* S H V H V
Version
N,S,H,L S,H,L Release EL EL EL EL EL
Load s. Iu [A] 800 800 1600 1000 800 1250 2500 1000 800 800 2000 4000 3200 3200 4000 3200
1000 1000 2000 1250 1000 1600 3200 1250 1000 1000 2500 4000 4000 5000 4000
Release TM,M EL EL 1250 1250 1600 1250 1600 1250 1250 6300 5000
Iu [A] 630 800 630 800 1000 1250 1600 1600 1600 2000 1600 2000 1600 1600 6300
2000 2500 2000 2000
Load s. In [A] 630 800 630 800 1000 100012501600 3200 2500 2500
320 30 30 30 30 30 T T T 3200 3200
400 B T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T
N, 400 30 30 30 T T T
TM T1 C TM 160 T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T
T5 S, 630 500 30 30 T T T N T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T
H,
L, 320 30 30 30 30 30 T T T N T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T
400 S T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T
V EL 400 30 30 30 30 30 T T T T2 TM,EL 160
H T T T 55 65 T T T T T T T T T T T
630 630 30 T T T
L T T T 55 65 T T T 75 T T T T T T T
N T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T
T3 TM 250
S T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T
N T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T
MCCB - T6 @ 415V S T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T
250
T4 H TM,EL T T T 55 65 T T T T T T T T T T T
320
Supply s. S7 L T T T 55 65 100 T T 75 85 100 T T 100 T 100
Version V T T T 55 65 100 T T 75 85 100 T T 100 T 100
S,H,L N T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T
400
Release EL T5 H TM,EL T T T 55 65 T T T T T T T T T T T
630
L T T T 55 65 100 T T 75 85 100 T T 100 T 100
Iu [A] 1250 1600
V T T T 55 65 100 T T 75 85 100 T T 100 T 100
Load s. In [A] 1000 1250 1600 N T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T
1SDC008015F0201
630 630 40 40 S 630 T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T
N, TM T6 TM,EL 800
800 800 40 40 H 1000 T T T 55 65 T T T T T T T T T T T
S, L T T T 55 65 T T T 75 85 T T T T T T
T6 H, 630 630 40 40 40
L, EL 800 800 40 40 40 1250
S7 H EL T T T 55 T T T T T T T T T T T T
V 1600
1000 1000 40 40 L T T T 55 65 T T T 75 85 T T T T T T
Table valid for Emax circuit-breaker only with PR121/P, PR122/P and PR123/P releases
*Emax L circuit-breakers only with PR122/P and PR123/P releases
4.3 Back-up tables Example:
From the coordination table on page 217 the following conclusion is derived:
The tables shown give the short-circuit current value (in kA) for which the back- the circuit-breakers type T5H and T1N are coordinated in back-up protection
up protection is verified for the chosen circuit-breaker combination, at voltages up to a value of 65 kA (higher than the short-circuit current measured at the
from 380 up to 415 V. These tables cover all the possible combinations between installation point), although the maximum breaking capacity of T1N, at 415 V, is
ABB SACE moulded-case circuit-breakers Isomax and Tmax and those between 36 kA.
the above mentioned circuit-breakers and ABB MCBs.
Notes for a correct interpretation of the coordination U Ur = 400V

tables:
T5H
Tmax @ 415V ac Isomax @ 415V ac Emax @ 415V ac
Version Icu [kA] Version Icu [kA] Version Icu [kA]
1SDC008017F0001
B 16 N 35* B 42
C 25 S 50 N 65**
Cable
N 36 H 65 S 75***
S 50 L 100 H 100
H 70 L 130
L (for T2) 85 V 150****
L (for T4-T5) 120 * Versions certified at 36 kA
T1N160
** For Emax E1 version N Icu=50 kA
L (for T6) 100
*** For Emax E2 version S Icu=85 kA
V 200 **** For Emax E3 version V Icu=130 kA
Ik = 60kA
Keys
For MCCB (Moulded-case circuit-breaker) For MCB (Miniature circuit-breaker):
ACB (Air circuit-breaker) B = charateristic trip (I3=3...5In)
TM = thermomagnetic release C = charateristic trip (I3=5...10In)
– TMD (Tmax) D = charateristic trip (I3=10...20In)
– TMA (Tmax) K = charateristic trip (I3=8...14In)
– T adjustable M adjustable (Isomax) Z = charateristic trip (I3=2...3In) MCB - MCB @ 240V
M = magnetic only release
– MF (Tmax)
– MA (Tmax)
EL = elettronic release Supply s. S 200L S200 S200M S200P S280 S290 S500
– PR121/P - PR122/P - PR123/P (Emax)
Char. C B-C B-C B-C B-C B-C C B-C
– PR211/P - PR212/P (Isomax)
– PR221DS - PR222DS (Tmax) Load s. Icu [kA] 10 20 25 40 40 20 25 100
In [A] 6..40 0.5..63 0.5..63 0.5..25 32..63 80, 100 80..125 6..63
S931 N C 4.5 2..40 10 20 25 40 25 15 15 100
S941 N B,C 6 2..40 10 20 25 40 25 15 15 100
S951 N B,C 10 2..40 10 20 25 40 25 15 15 100
S971 N B,C 10 2..40 10 20 25 40 25 15 15 100
S200L C 10 6..40 20 25 40 25 15 15 100
S200 B,C,K,Z 20 0.5..63 25 40 25 100
S200M B,C,D 25 0.5..63 40 100
1SDC008034F0201
B, C, 40 0.5..25 100
S200P
D, K, Z 25 32..63 100
S280 B,C 20 80, 100
S290 C,D 25 80..125
S500 B,C,D 6..63
4.3 Back-up tables 4.3 Back-up tables

MCB - MCB @ 415V MCCB - MCCB @ 415V
Supply s. T1 T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 S7 T2 T4 T5 T6 S7 T2 T4 T5 T6 S7 T4 T5
Supply s. S200L S200 S200M S200P S280 S290 S500 Version C N S H L L L V
Load side Version Icu [kA] 25 36 50 70 65 85 120 100 200
Char. C B-C B-C B-C B-C B-C C B-C
T1 B 16 25 36 36 36 30 30 30 50 50 36 36 36 70 40 40 40 85 50 50 50 85 85
Load s. Icu [kA] 6 10 15 25 15 6 15 50
T1 C 25 36 36 36 36 36 36 50 50 40 40 50 50 70 65 65 65 50 85 85 85 70 50 130 100
In [A] 6..40 0.5..63 0.5..63 0.5..25 32..63 80, 100 80..125 6..63 T1 50 50 50 50 50 50 70 65 65 65 50 85 100 100 70 50 200 120
S200L C 6 6..40 10 15 25 15 15 50 T2 50 50 50 50 50 50 70 65 65 65 65 85 100 100 85 85 200 120
S200 B,C,K,Z 10 0.5..63 15 25 15 15 50 T3 50 50 50 50 50 65 65 65 50 100 100 100 50 200 120
N 36
25 50 T4 50 50 50 50 65 65 65 50 100 100 65 65 200 120
S200M B,C,D 15 0.5..63
T5 50 50 50 65 65 50 100 85 65 120
B, C, 25 0.5..25 50
S200P T6 50 40 65 40 70 50
D, K, Z 15 32..63 T2 70 70 70 65 85 100 100 85 85 200 130
S280 B,C 6 80, 100 T3 70 70 70 100 100 100 200 150
S290 C,D 15 80..125 T4 S 50 70 70 70 65 100 100 85 85 200 150
S500 B,C,D 50 6..63 T5 70 70 65 100 85 85 150
T6 70 85 85
T2 85 120 120 85 85 200 150
1SDC008036F0201
T4 120 120 100 100 200 150
H 70
T5 120 100 100 150
T6 100 85
MCCB - MCB @ 415V T2 85 120 120 200 180
T4 L 200 200
120
T5 200
Supply s. T1 T1 T1 T2 T3 T4 T2 T3 T4 T2 T4 T2 T4 T4
Version B C N S H L L V
Load s. Char. In [A] Icu [kA] 16 25 36 50 70 85 120 200

6..10 36 40
S200L C 6 16 25 30 36 36 35 40 40 40 40 40 40
13..40 16 16
0.5..10 36 40
S200 B, C, K, Z 10 16 25 30 36 36 35 40 40 40 40 40 40
13..63 16 16
0.5..10 36 40 70 85
S200M B, C, D 15 16 25 30 36 36 50 40 40 40 40
13..63 25 25 60 60
0.5..10 30 36 36 36 50 40 40 70 40 85 40 40
B, C, D, 25 1SDC008035F0201
S200P 13..25 30 36 30 36 50 30 40 60 40 60 40 40
K, Z
32..63 15 16 25 30 36 25 36 50 25 40 60 40 60 40 40
S280 B, C 80, 100 6 16 16 16 36 16 30 36 16 30 36 30 36 30 30
S290 C, D 80,125 15 16 25 30 36 30 30 50 30 30 70 30 85 30 30
S500 B, C, D 6..63 50 70 70 85 120 200
4.4 Coordination tables between circuit-breakers and switch disconnectors
4.4 Coordination tables between circuit- Notes for the correct reading of the coordination tables:
breakers and switch disconnectors Tmax @ 415V ac Isomax @ 415V ac
The tables shown give the values of the short-circuit current (in kA) for which Version Icu [kA] Version Icu [kA]
back-up protection is verified by the pre-selected combination of circuit-breaker B 16 S 50
and switch disconnector, for voltages between 380 and 415 V. The tables cover C 25 H 65
the possible combinations of moulded-case circuit-breakers in the ABB SACE N 36 L 100
Isomax and Tmax series, with the switch disconnectors detailed above. S 50
H 70
L (for T2) 85
L (for T4-T5) 120
L (for T6) 100
V 200
SWITCH DISCONNECTOR
415 V
T1D 160 T3D 250 T4D 320 T5D 400 T5D 630 T6D 630 T6D 800 S7D 1000 S7D 1250 S7D 1600 S8D 2000 S8D 2500 S8D 3200
T1B 16
T1C 25
T1N 36
T2N 36
T2S 50
T2H 70
T2L 85
T3N 36
T3S 50
T4N 36* 36
T4S 50* 50
T4H 70* 70
T4L 120* 120
T4V 200* 200
T5N 36
T5S 50
T5H 70
T5L 120
T5V 200
T6N 36
T6S 50
T6H 70
1SDC008037F0201
T6L 100
S7S 50
S7H 65
S7L 100
S8H 85
S8V 120
* for T4 250 or T4 320 only with I1 setting at 250 A.
4.4 Coordination tables between circuit-breakers and switch disconnectors 4.4 Coordination tables between circuit-breakers and switch disconnectors

Example: Example:
From the coordination table on page 218-219 it can be seen that circuit-breaker For the correct selection of the components, the disconnector must be
T2S160 is able to protect the switch disconnector T1D160 up to a short-circuit protected from overloads by a device with a rated current not greater
current of 50 kA (higher than the short-circuit current at the installation point). than the size of the disconnector, while in short-circuit conditions it must
Overload protection is also verified, as the rated current of the breaker is not be verified that:
higher than the size of the disconnector. Icw ≥ Ik
Icm ≥ Ip.
Therefore, with regard to the electrical parameters of the single devices,
Emax E2N1250/MS disconnector is selected, and a E2N1250 breaker.
That is:
Icw(E2N /MS) = 55 kA > 45 kA
Icm (E2N /MS) = 143 kA > 100 kA.
U Ur = 400V U Ur = 400V
T2S160 E2N1250
Cable Cable
1SDC008019F0001
1SDC008018F0001
T1D 160
E2N1250 /MS
Ik = 40kA Ik =45 kA
Ip =100 kA
5.1 Direct current networks
5 Special applications 5 Special applications

Calculation of the short-circuit current of an accumulator battery
5.1 Direct current networks
The short-circuit current at the terminals of an accumulator battery may be
Main applications of direct current: supplied by the battery manufacturer, or may be calculated using the following
formula:
• Emergency supply or auxiliary services:
the use of direct current is due to the need to employ a back-up energy UMax
source which allows the supply of essential services such as protection Ik =
services, emergency lighting, alarm systems, hospital and industrial services, Ri
data-processing centres etc., using accumulator batteries, for example.
• Electrical traction:
where:
the advantages offered by the use of dc motors in terms of regulation and of
• UMax is the maximum flashover voltage (no-load voltage);
single supply lines lead to the widespread use of direct current for railways,
• Ri is the internal resistance of the elements forming the battery.
underground railways, trams, lifts and public transport in general.
The internal resistance is usually supplied by the manufacturer, but may be
• Particular industrial installations:
calculated from the discharge characteristics obtained through a test such as
there are some electrolytic process plants and applications which have a
detailed by IEC 60896 – 1 or IEC 60896 – 2.
particular need for the use of electrical machinery.
For example, a battery of 12.84 V and internal resistance of 0.005 Ω gives a
Typical uses of circuit-breakers include the protection of cables, devices and
short-circuit current at the terminals of 2568 A.
the operation of motors.
Under short-circuit conditions the current increases very rapidly in the initial
moments, reaches a peak and then decreases with the discharge voltage of
the battery. Naturally, this high value of the fault current causes intense heating
Considerations for the interruption of direct current inside the battery, due to the internal resistance, and may lead to explosion.
Direct current presents larger problems than alternating current does in terms Therefore it is very important to prevent and / or minimize short-circuit currents
of the phenomena associated with the interruption of high currents. Alternating in direct currents systems supplied by accumulator batteries.
currents have a natural passage to zero of the current every half-cycle, which
corresponds to a spontaneous extinguishing of the arc which is formed when
the circuit is opened.
This characteristic does not exist in direct currents, and furthermore, in order to Criteria for the selection of circuit-breakers
extinguish the arc, it is necessary that the current lowers to zero. For the correct selection of a circuit-breaker for the protection of a direct current
The extinguishing time of a direct current, all other conditions being equal, is network, the following factors must be considered:
proportional to the time constant of the circuit T = L/R. 1.the load current, according to which the size of the breaker and the setting
It is necessary that the interruption takes place gradually, without a sudden for the thermo-magnetic over-current release can be determined;
switching off of the current which could cause large over-voltages. This can be 2.the rated plant voltage, according to which the number of poles to be
carried out by extending and cooling the arc so as to insert an ever higher connected in series is determined, thus the breaking capacity of the device
resistance into the circuit. can also be increased;
The energetic characteristics which develop in the circuit depend upon the 3.the prospective short-circuit current at the point of installation of the breaker
voltage level of the plant and result in the installation of breakers according to influencing the choice of the breaker;
connection diagrams in which the poles of the breaker are positioned in series 4.the type of network, more specifically the type of earthing connection.
to increase their performance under short-circuit conditions. The breaking
capacity of the switching device becomes higher as the number of contacts Note: in case of using of four pole circuit-breakers, the neutral must be at 100%
which open the circuit increases and, therefore, when the arc voltage applied is
larger. Direct current network types
This also means that when the supply voltage of the installation rises, so must
the number of current switches and therefore the poles in series. Direct current networks may be carried out:
• with both polarities insulated from earth;
• with one polarity connected to earth;
• with median point connected to earth.
5.1 Direct current networks 5.1 Direct current networks

Network with both polarities insulated from earth Diagram B
Three-pole breaker with two poles in series for one polarity and one pole for the
other polarity (1) + -
a b
1SDC008022F0001
1SDC008020F0001
U R
c Load
Diagram D
Four-pole breaker with two poles in parallel per polarity
+ -
• Fault a: the fault, without negligible impedance, between the two polarities
sets up a short-circuit current to which both polarities contribute to the full
voltage, according to which the breaking capacity of the breaker must be
selected.
1SDC008023F0001
• Fault b: the fault between the polarity and earth has no consequences from
the point of view of the function of the installation.
• Fault c: again, this fault between the polarity and earth has no consequences
from the point of view of the function of the installation.
In insulated networks it is necessary to install a device capable of signalling the
presence of the first earth fault in order to eliminate it. In the worst conditions, Load
when a second earth fault is verified, the breaker may have to interrupt the
short-circuit current with the full voltage applied to a single polarity and therefore Diagram G
with a breaking capacity which may not be sufficient.
In networks with both polarities insulated from earth it is appropriate to divide Four-pole breaker with three poles in series on one polarity and one pole on the
the number of poles of the breaker necessary for interruption on each polarity remaining polarity (1)
(positive and negative) in such a way as to obtain separation of the circuit. + -
The diagrams to be used are as follows:
Diagram A
1SDC008024F0001
Three-pole breaker with one pole per polarity
+ -
Load
1SDC008021F0001
(1) It is not advisable to divide the poles of the breaker unequally as, in this type of network,
a second earth fault may lead to the single pole working under fault conditions at full
voltage. In these circumstances, it is essential to install a device capable of signalling the
earth fault or the loss of insulation of one polarity.
Load

Diagram H Diagrams to be used with circuit isolation are as follows:
Four-pole breaker with two poles in series per polarity Diagram A
+ -
+ -
1SDC008027F0001
1SDC008025F0001
Load
Load
Diagram B
Network with one polarity connected to earth
Three-pole breaker with two poles in series on the polarity not connected to
earth, and one pole on the remaining polarity
a b + -
1SDC008026F0001
U R
1SDC008028F0001
c
Load
• Fault a: the fault between the two polarities sets up a short-circuit current to
which both polarities contribute to the full voltage U, according to which the
breaking capacity of the breaker is selected.
• Fault b: the fault on the polarity not connected to earth sets up a current Diagram D
which involves the over-current protection according to the resistance of the
ground. Four-pole breaker with two poles in parallel per polarity
• Fault c: the fault between the polarity connected to earth and earth has no + -
consequences from the point of view of the function of the installation.
In a network with one polarity connected to earth, all the poles of the breaker
necessary for protection must be connected in series on the non-earthed
polarity. If isolation is required, it is necessary to provide another breaker pole
on the earthed polarity.
1SDC008029F0001
Load

Diagram G Diagram F
Four-pole breaker with three poles in series on the polarity not connected to Four-pole breaker with four poles in series on the polarity not connected to
earth, and one pole on the remaining polarity earth
+ -
+ -
1SDC008033F0001
1SDC008030F0001
Load
Load Network with the median point connected to earth
Diagrams to be used without circuit isolation are as follows:

a b
Diagram C
1SDC008034F0001
U R
Three-pole breaker with three poles in series
+ - c
• Fault a: the fault between the two polarities sets up a short-circuit current to
which both polarities contribute to the full voltage U, according to which the
1SDC008031F0001 breaking capacity of the breaker is selected.
• Fault b: the fault between the polarity and earth sets up a short-circuit current
less than that of a fault between the two polarities, as it is supplied by a
voltage equal to 0.5 U.
• Fault c: the fault in this case is analogous to the previous case, but concerns
Load the negative polarity.
With network with the median point connected to earth the breaker must be
Diagram E inserted on both polarities.
Four-pole breaker with series of two poles in parallel Diagrams to be used are as follows:
+ - Diagram A
+ -
1SDC008035F0001
1SDC008032F0001
Load Load

Diagram D Example:
Four-pole breaker with two poles in parallel per polarity Using a Tmax T6N800 In800 circuit-breaker with three poles in parallel, a
coefficient equal to 0.8 must be applied, therefore the maximum carrying current
+ -
will be 0.8·3·800 = 1920 A.
Behaviour of thermal releases

As the functioning of these releases is based on thermal phenomena arising
1SDC008036F0001
from the flowing of current, they can therefore be used with direct current, their
trip characteristics remaining unaltered.
Behaviour of magnetic releases
Load The values of the trip thresholds of ac magnetic releases, used for direct current,
must be multiplied by the following coefficient (km), according to the breaker
and the connection diagram:
Diagram H Table 2: km coefficient

Four-pole breaker with two poles in series per polarity
diagram diagram diagram diagram diagram diagram diagram diagram
Circuit-breaker A B C D E F G H
+ -
T1 1.3 1 1 - - - - -
T2 1.3 1.15 1.15 - - - - -
T3 1.3 1.15 1.15 - - - - -
T4 1.3 1.15 1.15 1 1 1 - -
T5 1.1 1 1 0.9 0.9 0.9 - -
1SDC008037F0001
T6 1.1 1 1 0.9 0.9 0.9 - -
Example
Data:
Load
• Direct current network connected to earth;
• Rated voltage Ur = 250 V;
• Short-circuit current Ik = 32 kA
Use of switching devices in direct current • Load current Ib = 230 A
Using Table 3, it is possible to select the Tmax T3N250 In = 250 A three pole
Parallel connection of breaker poles breaker, using the connection shown in diagram B (two poles in series for the
According to the number of poles connected in parallel, the coefficients detailed polarity not connected to earth and one poles in series for the polarity connected
in the following table must be applied: to earth).
From Table 2 corresponding to diagram B, and with breaker Tmax T3, it risults
km=1.15; therefore the nominal magnetic trip will occur at 2875 A (taking into
Table 1: Correction factor for poles connected in parallel account the tolerance, the trip will occur between 2300 A and 3450 A).
number of poles in parallel 2 3 4 (neutral 100%)
reduction factor of dc carrying capacity 0.9 0.8 0.7
breaker current carrying capacity 1.8xIn 2.4xIn 2.8xIn
The connections which are external from the breaker terminals must be carried
out by the user in such a way as to ensure that the connection is perfectly
balanced.
5.1 Direct current networks 5.2 Networks at particular frequencies

The following table summarizes the breaking capacity of the various circuit-
5.2 Networks at particular frequencies: 400 Hz and 16 2/3 Hz
breakers available for direct current. The number of poles to be connected in
series to guarantee the breaking capacity is given in brackets.
Standard production breakers can be used with alternating currents with
frequencies other than 50/60 Hz (the frequencies to which the rated perfor-
Table 3: Breaking capacity in direct current according to the voltage mance of the device refer, with alternating current) as appropriate derating
coefficients are applied.
Rated Breaking capacity [kA] 5.2.1 400 Hz networks

Circuit-breaker current [A] ≤ 125 [V]1 250 [V] 500 [V] 750 [V]
At high frequencies, performance is reclassified to take into account phenomena
T1B160 16 ÷ 160 16 (1P) 20 (3P) - 16 (2P) 16 (3P)
such as:
T1C160 25 ÷ 160 25 (1P) 30 (3P) - 25 (2P) 25 (3P)
• the increase in the skin effect and the increase in the inductive reactance
T1N160 32 ÷ 160 36 (1P) 40 (3P) - 36 (2P) 36 (3P)
directly proportional to the frequency causes overheating of the conductors
T2N160 1.6 ÷ 160 36 (1P) 40 (3P) - 36 (2P) 36 (3P)
or the copper components in the breaker which normally carry current;
T2S160 1.6 ÷ 160 50 (1P) 55 (3P) - 50 (2P) 50 (3P)
• the lengthening of the hysteresis loop and the reduction of the magnetic
T2H160 1.6 ÷ 160 70 (1P) 85 (3P) - 70 (2P) 70 (3P)
saturation value with the consequent variation of the forces associated with
T2L160 1.6 ÷ 160 85 (1P) 100 (3P) - 85 (2P) 85 (3P)
the magnetic field at a given current value.
T3N250 63 ÷ 250 36 (1P) 40 (3P) - 36 (2P) 36 (3P)
T3S250 63 ÷ 250 50 (1P) 55 (3P) - 50 (2P) 50 (3P) In general these phenomena have consequences on the behaviour of both
T4N250/320 20 ÷ 250 36 (1P) 36 (2P) 25 (2P) 16 (3P) thermo-magnetic releases and the current interrupting parts of the circuit-
T4S250/320 20 ÷ 250 50 (1P) 50 (2P) 36 (2P) 25 (3P) breaker.
T4H250/320 20 ÷ 250 70 (1P) 70 (2P) 50 (2P) 36 (3P)
T4L250/320 20 ÷ 250 100 (1P) 100 (2P) 70 (2P) 50 (3P) The following tables refer to circuit-breakers with thermomagnetic releases,
T4V250/320 20 ÷ 250 100 (1P) 100 (2P) 100 (2P) 70 (3P) with a breaking capacity lower than 36 kA. This value is usually more than
T5N400/630 320 ÷ 500 36 (1P) 36 (2P) 25 (2P) 16 (3P) sufficient for the protection of installations where such a frequency is used,
T5S400/630 320 ÷ 500 50 (1P) 50 (2P) 36 (2P) 25 (3P) normally characterized by rather low short-circuit currents.
T5H400/630 320 ÷ 500 70 (1P) 70 (2P) 50 (2P) 36 (3P) As can be seen from the data shown, the tripping threshold of the thermal
T5L400/630 320 ÷ 500 100 (1P) 100 (2P) 70 (2P) 50 (3P) element (ln) decreases as the frequency increases because of the reduced
T5V400/630 320 ÷ 500 100 (1P) 100 (2P) 100 (2P) 70 (3P) conductivity of the materials and the increase of the associated thermal
T6N630/800 630-800 36 (1P) 36 (2P) 20 (2P) 16 (3P) phenomena; in general, the derating of this performance is generally equal to 10%.
T6S630/800 630-800 50 (1P) 50 (2P) 35 (2P) 20 (3P) Vice versa, the magnetic threshold (l3) increases with the increase in frequency:
T6H630/800 630-800 70 (1P) 70 (2P) 50 (2P) 36 (3P) for this reason it is recommended practice to use a 5·ln version.
T6L630/800 630-800 100 (1P) 100 (2P) 65 (2P) 50 (3P)
1
Minimum allowed voltage 24 Vdc.
5.2 Networks at particular frequencies 5.2 Networks at particular frequencies

Table 1: Tmax performance T1 16-63 A TMD Table 2: Tmax performance T1 80 A TMD
I1 (400Hz) I3 I1 (400Hz) I3
T1B 160 MIN MED MAX I3 (50Hz) Km I3 (400H z) T1B 160 MIN MED MAX I3 (50Hz) Km I3 (400H z)
T1C 160 In16 10 12 14 500 2 1000 T1C 160 In80
T1N 160 50 61 72 800 2 1600
In20 12 15 18 500 2 1000 T1N 160
In25 16 19 22 500 2 1000 Km = Multiplier factor of I3 due to the induced magnetic fields
In32 20 24.5 29 500 2 1000
In40 25 30.5 36 500 2 1000
In50 31 38 45 500 2 1000
In63 39 48 57 630 2 1260
Km = Multiplier factor of I3 due to the induced magnetic fields
Trip curves Trip curves

thermomagnetic release thermomagnetic release
T1 B/C/N 160 1000
T1 B/C/N 160 1000
In 16 to 63 A In 80 A
TMD TMD
100 100
t [s] t [s]
10 10
1 1
In=16 I3=1000 A
0.1 In=20 I3=1000 A 0.1
In=25 I3=1000 A
In=32 I3=1000 A In=80 I3=1600 A
In=40 I3=1000 A
In=50-63 I3=1000 A
0.01 0.01
0.1 1 10 100 1000 0.1 1 10 100
I1 I1

Table 3: Tmax performance T2 1.6-80 A TMD Table 4: Tmax performance T3 63-250 A TMG
I1 (400Hz) I3 I1 (400Hz) I3 (Low magnetic setting)
T2N 160 MIN MED MAX I3 (50Hz) Km I3 (400Hz) T3N 250 MIN MED MAX I3 (50Hz) Km I3 (400Hz)
In1.6 1 1.2 1.4 16 1.7 27.2 In63 39 48 57 400 1.7 680
In2 1.2 1.5 1.8 20 1.7 34 In80 50 61 72 400 1.7 680
In2.5 1.5 1.9 2.2 25 1.7 42.5
In100 63 76.5 90 400 1.7 680
In3.2 2 2.5 2.9 32 1.7 54.4
In4 2.5 3 3.6 40 1.7 68
In125 79 96 113 400 1.7 680
In5 3 3.8 4.5 50 1.7 85 In160 100 122 144 480 1.7 816
In6.3 4 4.8 5.7 63 1.7 107.1 In200 126 153 180 600 1.7 1020
In8 5 6.1 7.2 80 1.7 136 In250 157 191 225 750 1.7 1275
In10 6.3 7.6 9 100 1.7 170 Km = Multiplier factor of I3 due to the induced magnetic fields
In12.5 7.8 9.5 11.2 125 1.7 212.5
In16 10 12 14 500 1.7 850
In20 12 15 18 500 1.7 850
In25 16 19 22 500 1.7 850
In32 20 24.5 29 500 1.7 850
In40 25 30.5 36 500 1.7 850
In50 31 38 45 500 1.7 850
In63 39 48 57 630 1.7 1071
In80 50 61 72 800 1.7 1360
T2 N 160 T3N 250
1000 1000
In 1.6 to 80 A In 63 to 250 A
TMD TMG
100 100
t [s] t [s]
10 10
1 1
In=16 I3=850 A
In=20 I3=850 A
In=25 I3=850 A In=63 I3=680 A
0.1 In=32 I3=850 A 0.1 In=80 I3=680 A
In=40 I3=850 A In=100 I3=680 A
In=1.6 to 12.5 I3=17xIn In=125 I3=680 A
In=50 to 80 I3=17xIn In=160,200,250 I3=5.1xIn
0.01 0.01
0.1 1 10 100 1000 0.1 1 10 100 1000
I1 I1

Table 5: Tmax performance T3 63-125 A TMD Table 6: Tmax performance T4 20-50 A TMD
I1 (400Hz) I3 I1 (400Hz) I3
T3N 250 MIN MED MAX I3 (50Hz) Km I3 (400H z) T4N 250 MIN MED MAX I3 (50Hz) Km I3 (400Hz)
In63 39 48 57 630 1.7 1071 In20 12 15 18 320 1.7 544
In80 50 61 72 800 1.7 1360 In32 20 24.5 29 320 1.7 544
In50 31 38 45 500 1.7 850
In100 63 76.5 90 1000 1.7 1700
In125 79 96 113 1250 1.7 2125 Km = Multiplier factor of I3 due to the induced magnetic fields

T3N 250 1000
T4 N 250 10000
In 63 to 125 A In 20 to 50 A
TMD TMD
1000
100
t [s] t [s]
100
10
10
0.1 In=20 I3=544 A

0.1 In=32;50 I3=17xIn
In=63 to 125 I3=17xIn
0.01 0.01
0.1 1 10 100 1000 0.1 1 10 100 1000
I1 I1

Table 7: Tmax performance T4N 80-250 A TMA Table 8: Tmax performance T5N 320-500 A TMA
I1 (400Hz) I3 setting (MIN=5xIn) I1 (400Hz) I3 setting (MIN=5xIn)
T4N 250 /320 MIN MED MAX I3 @ 5xIn (50Hz) K m I3 @ 5xIn (400Hz) T5N400/630 MIN MED MAX I3 @ 5xIn(50Hz) Km I3 @ 5xIn (400)Hz
In80 50 61 72 400 1.7 680 In320 201 244 288 1600 1.5 2400
In100 63 76.5 90 500 1.7 850 In400 252 306 360 2000 1.5 3000
In125 79 96 113 625 1.7 1060 In500 315 382 450 2500 1.5 3750
In160 100 122 144 800 1.7 1360 Km = Multiplier factor of I3 due to the induced magnetic fields
In200 126 153 180 1000 1.7 1700
In250 157 191 225 1250 1.7 2125

T4N 250/320 T5 N 400/630
10000 10000
In 80 to 250 A In 320 to 500 A
TMA TMA
1000 1000
t [s] t [s]
100 100
10 10
1 1
In=80 to 250 I3=8.5xIn

0.1 0.1
In=320 to In500 I3=7.5xIn
0.01 0.01
0.1 1 10 100 0.1 1 10 100
I1 I1

Table 9: Tmax performance T5N 320-500 A TMG Table 10: Tmax performance T6N 630 A TMA
I1 (400Hz) I3 setting (2.5…5xIn) I1 (400Hz) I3 = 5÷10In (set I3=5In)
T5N 400/630 MIN MED MAX I3 @ 2.5..5xIn (50Hz) K m I3 @ 2.5..5xIn (400Hz) MIN MED MAX I3 (50Hz) Km I3 (400H z)
In320 201 244 288 800...1600 1.5 1200...2400
T6N630 In630
397 482 567 3150 1.5 4725
In400 252 306 360 1000...2000 1.5 1500...3000
In500 315 382 450 1250...2500 1.5 1875...3750

T5N 400/630 T6N 630 104
10000
In 320 to 500 A In 630 A
TMG TMA
1000 103
t [s]
t [s]
100
102
10
101
0.1
In=630 I3=7.5xIn
In=320 to 500 I3=3.75..7.5xIn 10-1
0.01
0.1 1 10 100
I1
10-2
10-1 1 1,05 101 102
I1

Table 11: Tmax performance T6N 800 A TMA
5.2.2 16 2/3 Hz networks
I1 (400Hz) I3 = 5-10In (set I3=5In)
Single phase distribution with a frequency of 16 2/3 Hz was developed for
MIN MED MAX I3 (50Hz) Km I3 (400Hz) electrical traction systems as an alternative to three phase 50 Hz systems, and
T6N 800 In800
504 602 720 4000 1.5 6000 to direct current systems.
Km = Multiplier factor of I3 due to the induced magnetic fields At low frequencies the thermal tripping threshold is not subject to any derating,
while the magnetic threshold requires a correction coefficient km, as detailed in
table 2.
The Isomax and Tmax series thermomagnetic moulded-case circuit-breakers
are suitable for use with frequencies of 16 2/3 Hz; the electrical performance
and the relevant connection diagrams are shown below.
Trip curves
Table 1: Breaking capacity [kA]
thermomagnetic release
T6N 800 250 V 500 V 750 V 1000 V (1)
10000
In [A]
In 800 A T1B160 16 ÷160 16 (2P) 20 (3P) 16 (3P) - -
TMA T1C160 25 ÷ 160 25 (2P) 30 (3P) 25 (3P) - -
T1N160 32 ÷ 160 36 (2P) 40 (3P) 36 (3P) - -
1000 T2N160 1.6 ÷ 160 36 (2P) 40 (3P) 36 (3P) - -
T2S160 1.6 ÷ 160 50 (2P) 55 (3P) 50 (3P) - -
T2H160 1.6 ÷ 160 70 (2P) 85 (3P) 70 (3P) - -
t [s] T2L160 1.6 ÷ 160 85 (2P) 100 (3P) 85 (3P) 50 (4P) (2) -
T3N250 63 ÷ 250 36 (2P) 40 (3P) 36 (3P) - -
100 T3S250 63 ÷ 250 50 (2P) 55 (3P) 50 (3P) - -
T4N250/320 20 ÷ 250 36 (2P) 25 (2P) 16 (3P) -
T4S250/320 20 ÷ 250 50 (2P) 36 (2P) 25 (3P) -
T4H250/320 20 ÷ 250 70 (2P) 50 (2P) 36 (3P) -
T4L250/320 20 ÷ 250 100 (2P) 70 (2P) 50 (3P) -
10 T4V250/320 20 ÷ 250 150 (2P) 100 (2P) 70 (3P) -
T4V250 32 ÷ 250 40 (4P)
T5N400/630 320 ÷ 500 36 (2P) 25 (2P) 16 (3P) -
T5S400/630 320 ÷ 500 50 (2P) 36 (2P) 25 (3P) -
1 T5H400/630 320 ÷ 500 70 (2P) 50 (2P) 36 (3P) -
T5L400/630 320 ÷ 500 100 (2P) 70 (2P) 50 (3P) -
T5V400/630 320 ÷ 500 150 (2P) 100 (2P) 70 (3P) -
T5V400/630 400 ÷ 500 40 (4P)
In=800 I3=7.5xIn T6N630/800 630 ÷ 800 36 (2P) 20 (2P) 16 (3P) -
0.1
T6S630/800 630 ÷ 800 50 (2P) 35 (2P) 20 (3P) -
T6H630/800 630 ÷ 800 70 (2P) 50 (2P) 36 (3P) -
T6L630/800 630 ÷ 800 100 (2P) 70 (2P) 50 (3P) 40 (4P)
(1)
1000V version circuit-breakers in dc, with neutral at 100%.
0.01 (2)
Circuit-breakers with neutral at 100%.
0.1 1 10 100
I1

Table 2: km factor Connection diagrams
Diagram A Diagram B Diagram C
Diagram A1
T1 1 1 -
T2 0.9 0.9 0.9 Configuration with two poles in series (without neutral connected to earth)
T3 0.9 0.9 - • Interruption for phase to neutral fault: 2 poles in series
T4 0.9 0.9 0.9 • Interruption for phase to earth fault: not considered
T5 0.9 0.9 0.9 (The installation method must be such as to make the probability of a second
T6 0.9 0.9 0.9 earth fault negligible)
L N
1SDC008038F0001
Table 3: Possible connections according to the voltage, the type of
distribution and the type of fault
Load
Neutral not grounded Neutral grounded*
L-N fault L-E fault
250 V 2 poles in series A1 A2 B2
250 V 3 poles in series** B1 B2, B3 B3
500 V 2 poles in series A1 A2, B2 B2, B3
500 V 3 poles in series** B1 B2, B3 B3 Diagram A2
750 V 3 poles in series B1 B2, B3 B3
750 V 4 poles in series*** C1 C2, C3 C2 Configuration with two poles in series (with neutral connected to earth)
1000 V 4 poles in series C1 C2, C3 C2 • Interruption for phase to neutral fault: 2 poles in series
* In the case of the only possible faults being L-N or L-E (E=Earth) with non-significant
• Interruption for phase to earth fault: single pole (same capacity as two poles
impedance, use the diagrams shown. If both faults are possible, use the diagrams in series, but limited to 125V)
valid for L-E fault.
** T1, T2, T3 only
*** T2 only L N
Load

Diagram B1 Diagram C1
Configuration with three poles in series (without neutral connected to earth) Configuration with four poles in series (without neutral connected to earth)
• Interruption for phase to neutral fault: 3 poles in series • Interruption for phase to neutral fault: 4 poles in series
• Interruption for phase to earth fault: not considered • Interruption for phase to earth fault: not considered
(The installation method must be such as to make the probability of a second (The installation method must be such as to make the probability of a second
earth fault negligible) earth fault negligible)
L N L N L N
1SDC008039F0001
1SDC008042F0001
Load
Load Load
Diagram B2
Configuration with three poles in series (with neutral connected to earth and Diagram C2
interrupted)
• Interruption for phase to neutral fault: 3 poles in series Configuration with four poles in series, on one polarity (with neutral connected
• Interruption for phase to earth fault: 2 poles in series to earth and not interrupted)
• Interruption for phase to neutral fault: 4 poles in series
• Interruption for phase to earth fault: 4 poles in series
L N L N
1SDC008041F0001
Load Load
Diagram B3 Diagram C3
Configuration with three poles in series (with neutral connected to earth but not Interruption with four poles in series (with neutral connected to earth and
interrupted) interrupted)
• Interruption for phase to neutral fault: 3 poles in series • Interruption for phase to neutral fault: 4 poles in series
• Interruption for phase to earth fault: 3 poles in series • Interruption for phase to earth fault: 3 poles in series
L N L N
1SDC008040F0001
Load Load
5.2 Networks at particular frequencies 5.3 1000 Vdc and 1000 Vac networks

Example: 1000 V dc Moulded-case circuit-breakers T4 T5 T6
Network data: Rated uninterrupted current, Iu [A] 250 400/630 630/800
Rated voltage 250 V
Poles Nr. 4 4 4
Rated frequency 16 2/3 Hz
Rated operational voltage, Ue [V –] 1000 1000 1000
Load current 120 A
Rated impulse withstand voltage, Uimp [kV] 8 8 8
Phase to neutral short-circuit current 45 kA
Neutral connected to earth Rated insulation voltage, Ui [V] 1000 1000 1000
Test voltage at industrial frequency for 1 min. [V] 3500 3500 3500
Assuming that the probability of a phase to earth fault is negligible, Table 3
shows that connections A2, B2 or B3 may be used. Rated ultimate short-circuit breaking capacity, Icu V V L
Therefore it is possible to choose a Tmax T2S160 In125 circuit-breaker, which (4 poles in series) [kA] 40 40 40
with the connection according to diagram A2 (two poles in series) has a breaking Rated short-time withstand current for 1 s, Icw [kA] – 5 (400A) 7.6 (630A) - 10 (800A)
capacity of 50 kA, while according to diagrams B2 or B3 (three poles in series) Utilisation category (EN 60947-2) A B (400A)-A (630A) B
the breaking capacity is 55 kA (Table 1). To determine the magnetic trip, see Isolation behaviour
factor km in Table 2. The magnetic threshold will be:
IEC 60947-2, EN 60947-2
I3= 1250·0.9 = 1125 A
whichever diagram is used. Thermomagnetic releases TMD – –
If it is possible to have an earth fault with non significant impedance, the diagrams Thermomagnetic releases TMA
to be considered (Table 3) are only B2 or B3. In particular, in diagram B2 it can Thermomagnetic releases, T adjustable - M adjustable – –
be seen that only 2 poles are working in series, the breaking capacity will be 50 Versions F F F
kA (Table 1), while with diagram B3, with 3 poles working in series, the breaking Terminals Fixed FC Cu FC Cu F - FC CuAl - R
capacity is 55 kA.
Mechanical life [No. operations / operations per hours] 20000/240 20000/120 20000/120
Basic dimensions, fixed L [mm] 140 184 280
5.3 1000 Vdc and 1000 Vac networks D [mm] 103.5 103.5 103.5
H [mm] 205 205 268
The Tmax, SACE Isomax and Emax /E 1000 V circuit-breakers are particularly TERMINAL CAPTION ES = Front extended spread R = Rear orientated MC = Multicable
suitable for use in installations in mines, petrochemical plants and services F = Front FC Cu = Front for copper cables HR = Rear in horizontal flat bar
EF = Front extended FC CuAl = Front for CuAl cables VR = Rear in vertical flat bar
connected to electrical traction (tunnel lighting).
5.3.1 1000 V dc networks
1000 Vdc Moulded case circuit-breakers Connection diagrams

General Characteristics Possible connection diagrams with reference to the type of distribution system
The range of Tmax and SACE Isomax S moulded-case circuit-breakers for use in which they can be used follow.
in installations with rated voltage up to 1000 V direct current comply with
international standard IEC 60947-2. The range is fitted with adjustable thermo- Networks insulated from earth
magnetic releases and is suitable for all installation requirements and has a The following diagrams can be used (the polarity may be inverted).
range of available settings from 32 A to 800 A. The four-pole version circuit + -
breakers allow high performance levels to be reached thanks to the series
connection of the poles.
The circuit breakers in the Tmax and SACE Isomax S 1000 V range maintain
the same dimensions and fixing points as standard circuit breakers.
These circuit-breakers can also be fitted with the relevant range of standard
1SDC008043F0001
accessories, with the exception of residual current releases for Tmax and
mechanical interlocks for SACE Isomax.
In particular it is possible to use conversion kits for removable and withdrawable
moving parts and various terminal kits.
Load
A) 3+1 poles in series (1000 Vdc)
5.3 1000 Vdc and 1000 Vac networks 5.3 1000 Vdc and 1000 Vac networks

+ - Networks with median point of the supply source connected to earth
In the presence of an earth fault of positive or negative polarity, the poles involved
in the fault work at U/2 (500 V); the following diagram must be used:
+ -
1SDC008044F0001
Load
1SDC008046F0001
B) 2+2 poles in series (1000 Vdc)
It is assumed that the risk of a double earth fault in which the first fault is
downstream of the breaker on one polarity and the second is upstream of the Load
same switching device on the opposite polarity is null.
In this condition the fault current, which can reach high values, effects only D) 2+2 poles in series (1000 Vdc)
some of the 4 poles necessary to ensure the breaking capacity.
It is possible to prevent the possibility of a double earth fault by installing a
Correction factors for tripping thresholds
device which signals the loss of insulation and identifies the position of the first
earth fault, allowing it to be eliminated quickly. With regard to overload protection, no correction factors need to be applied.
However, for the magnetic threshold values in use with 1000 Vdc with the
previously described applicable diagrams, refer to the corresponding values
for alternating current, multiplied by the correction factors given in the following
Networks with one polarity connected to earth table:
Circuit-breaker km
As the polarity connected to earth does not have to be interrupted (in the example
T4V 1
it is assumed that the polarity connected to earth is negative, although the
following is also valid with the polarity inverted), the diagram which shows the T5V 0.9
connection of 4 poles in series on the polarity not connected to earth may be T6L 0.8
used.
Circuit-breakers with thermomagnetic release for direct current

+ -
In [A] 32 (1) 50 (1) 80 (2) 100 (2) 125 (2) 160 (2) 200 (2) 250 (2) 400 (2) 500 (2) 630 (2) 800 (2)
T4V 250 – – – –
T5V 400 – – – – – – – – – – –
T5V 630 – – – – – – – – – – –
T6L 630 – – – – – – – – – – –
1SDC008045F0001
T6L 800 – – – – – – – – – – –
I3 = (10xIn) [A] 320 500 – – – – – – – – – –
I3 = (5 -10xIn) [A] – – 400÷800 500÷1000 625÷1250 800÷1600 1000÷2000 1250÷2500 2000÷4000 2500÷5000 3150÷6300 4000÷8000
Load (1)
Thermal threshold adjustable from 0.7 and 1 x In; fixed magnetic threshold
(2)
Thermal threshold adjustable from 0.7 and 1 x In; magnetic threshold adjustable between 5 and 10 x In.
C) 4 poles in series (1000 Vdc)

Example 1000 Vdc air switch disconnectors
To ensure the protection of a user supplied with a network having the following The air switch disconnectors derived from the Emax air breakers are identified
characteristics: by the standard range code together with the code “/E MS”.
Rated voltage Ur = 1000 Vdc These comply with the international Standard IEC 60947-3 and are especially
Short-circuit current I k = 18 kA suitable for use as bus-ties or principle isolators in direct current installations,
Load current I b = 420 A for example in electrical traction applications.
Network with both polarities insulated from earth. The overall dimensions and the fixing points remain unaltered from those of
standard breakers, and they can be fitted with various terminal kits and all the
From the table of available settings, the circuit-breaker to be used is: accessories for the Emax range; they are available in both withdrawable and
T5V 630 In=500 four-pole Icu@1000 Vdc = 40 kA fixed versions, and in three-pole version (up to 750 Vdc) and four-pole (up to
Thermal trip threshold adjustable from (0.7-1) x In therefore from 350 A to 500 A 1000 Vdc).
to be set at 0.84. The withdrawable breakers are assembled with special version fixed parts for
Magnetic trip threshold adjustable from (5-10) x In which with correction factor applications of 750/1000 Vdc.
km = 0.9 gives the following adjustment range: 2250 A to 4500 A. The magnetic The range covers all installation requirements up to 1000 Vdc / 3200 A or up to
threshold will be adjusted according to any conductors to be protected. 750 Vdc / 4000 A.
The connection of the poles must be as described in diagrams A or B. A breaking capacity equal to the rated short-time withstand current is attributed
A device which signals any first earth fault must be present. to these breakers when they are associated with a suitable external relay.
With the same system data, if the network is carried out with a polarity connected
to earth, the circuit-breaker must be connected as described in diagram C. The following table shows the available versions and their relative electrical
performance:
E1B/E MS E2N/E MS E3H/E MS E4H/E MS E6H/E MS
Rated current (at 40 °C) Iu [A] 800 1250 1250 3200 5000
[A] 1250 1600 1600 4000 6300
[A] 2000 2000
[A] 2500
[A] 3200
Poles 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4
Rated service voltage Ue [V] 750 1000 750 1000 750 1000 750 1000 750 1000
Rated insulation voltage Ui [V] 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000
Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp [kV] 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12
Rated short-time withstand current Icw (1s) [kA] 20 20 (1) 25 25(1) 40 40 (1) 65 65 65 65
Rated making capacity Icm 750V DC [kA] 20 20 25 25 40 40 65 65 65 65
1000V DC – 20 – 25 – 40 – 65 – 65
Note: The breaking capacity Icu, by means of external protection relay, with 500 ms maximum timing, is equal to the value of Icw (1s).
(1) The performances at 750 V are:
for E1B/E MS Icw = 25 kA,
for E2N/E MS Icw = 40 kA and
for E3H/E MS Icw = 50 kA.

Connection diagrams + -
Connection diagrams to be used according to the type of distribution system
follow.
The risk of a double earth fault on different poles is assumed to be zero, that is,
the fault current involves only one part of the breaker poles.
1SDC008050F0001
Load
Networks insulated from earth G) 2+1 poles in series (750 Vdc)
The following diagrams may be used (the polarity may be inverted). Networks with one polarity connected to earth
The polarity connected to earth does not have to be interrupted (in the examples
+ - it is assumed that the polarity connected to earth is negative):
+
-
1SDC008049F0001
1SDC008047F0001
Load
Load
E) 3+1 poles in series (1000 Vdc) H) 4 poles in series (1000 Vdc)
-
+
+ Load -
1SDC008051F0001
1SDC008048F0001
Load
I) 3 poles in series (750 Vdc)

F) 2+2 poles in series (1000 Vdc)
Networks with median point of the supply source connected to earth
Only four-pole breakers may be used as in the configuration shown in diagram F).

5.3.2 1000 Vac networks The circuit-breakers in the 1000 V range maintain the same dimensions as
standard circuit breakers.
1000 Vac moulded-case circuit-breakers These circuit-breakers can also be fitted with the relevant range of standard
accessories, with the exception of residual current releases.
General characteristics
The circuit breakers in the Tmax 1000 V range comply with the international The following tables show the electrical characteristics of the range:
standard IEC 60947-2.
These circuit breakers can be fitted with thermo-magnetic releases (for the
smaller sizes) and with electronic releases. All installation requirements can be
met with a range of available settings from 32 A to 800 A and with breaking
capacity up to 20 kA at 1000 Vac.
1000 Vac moulded-case circuit-breakers T4 T5 T6
Rated uninterrupted current, Iu [A] 250 400/630 630/800

Poles Nr. 3 3 4 3 3 4 3 4
Rated operational voltage, Ue (ac) 50-60Hz [V] 1000 1000 1000
Rated impulse withstand voltage, Uimp [kV] 8 8 8
Rated insulation voltage, Ui [V] 1000 1000 1000
Test voltage at industrial frequency for 1 min. [V] 3500 3500 3500
Rated ultimate short-circuit breaking capacity, L V (1) V(1) L V(1) V(1) L
Icu (ac) 50-60 Hz 1000 V [kA] 12 20 20 12 20 20 12
Rated service short-circuit breaking capacity, Ics (ac) 50-60 Hz 1000 V [kA] 12 12 12 10 10 10 6
Rated short-circuit making capacity Icm (ac) 50-60 Hz 1000 V [kA] 24 40 40 24 40 40 24
Rated short-time withstand current for 1 s, Icw [kA] – 5 (400A) 7.6(630A) - 10(800A)
Utilisation category (EN 60947-2) A B (400A) A (630A) B
Isolation behaviour
IEC 60947-2, EN 60947-2
Thermomagnetic releases TMD – – – – – –
TMA – – – – –
Electronic releases PR221DS-LS – – –
PR221DS-I – – –
PR222DS-LSI – – –
PR222DS-LSIG – – –
Interchangeability
Versions F F F
Terminals Fixed F-FC Cu F-FC Cu F-FC CuAl-R
Mechanical life [No. operations / operations per hours] 20000/240 20000/120 20000/120
Dimensions L [mm] 105 105 140 140 140 184 210 280
D [mm] 103.5 103.5 103.5 103.5 103.5 103.5 103.5
H [mm] 205 205 205 205 205 205 268
TERMINAL CAPTION
F = Front FC CuAl = Front for CuAl cables
FC Cu = Front for copper cables R = Rear orientated
(1)
The circuit-breaker can be supplied only through the upper terminals.

The following tables show the available releases. The following tables show the electrical characteristics of the devices:
Circuit-breakers with electronic release for alternating currents

Air circuit-breakers
In100 In250 In400 In630 In800 E2B/E E2N/E E3H/E E4H/E E6H/E
T4 250 – – – Rated uninterrupted
current (at 40 °C) Iu [A] 1600 2000 1250 1600 2000 1250 1600 2000 2500 3200 3200 4000 5000 6300
T5 400 – – – –
Rated service voltage Ue [V~] 1150 1150 1150 1150 1150 1150 1150 1150 1150 1150 1150 1150 1150 1150
T5 630 – – – –
Rated insulation voltage Ui [V~] 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250
T6L 630 – – – – Rated ultimate breaking capacity
T6L 800 – – – – under short-circuitIcu
1000 V [kA] 20 20 30 30 30 50 50 50 50 50 65 65 65 65
I 3 (1÷10x In) [A] (1) 100÷1000 250÷2500 400÷4000 630÷6300 800÷8000
(2)
1150 V [kA] 20 20 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 65 65 65 65
I 3 (1.5÷12 x In) [A] 150÷1200 375÷3000 600÷4800 945÷7560 1200÷9600
Rated service breaking capacity
(1)
PR221 under short-circuitIcs
(2)
PR222
1000 V [kA] 20 20 30 30 30 50 50 50 50 50 65 65 65 65
Circuit-breakers with thermomagnetic release for alternating currents 1150 V [kA] 20 20 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 65 65 65 65
Rated short-time withstand
current Icw (1s)
In [A] 32 (1) 50 (1) 80 (2) 100 (2) 125 (2) 160 (2) 200 (2) 250 (2) 400 (2) 500 (2) 1000 V [kA] 20 20 30 30 30 50 50 50 50 50 65 65 65 65
1150 V [kA] 20 20 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 65 65 65 65
T4V 250 – –
Rated making capacity under
T5V 400 – – – – – – – – – short-circuit (peak value) Icm
1000 V [kA] 40 40 63 63 63 105 105 105 105 105 143 143 143 143
T5V 630 – – – – – – – – –
1150 V [kA] 40 40 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 143 143 143 143
I 3 = (10xIn) [A] 320 500 – – – – – – – –
I 3 = (5 -10xIn) [A] – – 400÷800 500÷1000 625÷1250 800÷1600 1000÷2000 1250÷2500 2000÷4000 2500÷5000 Air switch disconnectors (at 1150 Vac)
(1)
Thermal threshold adjustable from 0.7 and 1 x In; fixed magnetic threshold E2B/E MS E2N/E MS E3H/E MS E4H/E MS E6H/E MS
(2)
Thermal threshold adjustable from 0.7 and 1 x In; magnetic threshold adjustable between 5 and 10 x In.
Rated current (at 40 °C) Iu [A] 1600 1250 1250 3200 5000
1150 Vac air circuit-breakers and switch disconnectors [A] 2000 1600 1600 4000 6300
[A] 2000 2000
For 1150 V alternating current installations, the following devices are available:
[A] 2500
• Circuit-breakers in compliance with Standard IEC 60947-2.
The special version breakers up to 1150 Vac are identified by the standard [A] 3200
range code together with the suffix “/E”, and are derived from the correspondent Poles 3/4 3/4 3/4 3/4 3/4
Emax standard breakers and retain the same versions, accessories and overall Rated service voltage Ue [V] 1150 1150 1150 1150 1150
dimensions. Rated insulation voltage Ui [V] 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250
The Emax range of breakers is available in both withdrawable and fixed versions
Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp [kV] 12 12 12 12 12
with three and four poles, and can be fitted with accessories and equipped
Rated short-time withstand current Icw (1s) [kA] 20 30 30 (1) 65 65
with the full range of electronic releases and microprocessors (PR121-PR122-
PR123). Rated making capacity Icm (peak value) [kA] 40 63 63 (2) 143 143
• Switch disconnectors in compliance with Standard IEC 60947-3. Note: The breaking capacity Icu, by means of external protection relay, with 500 ms
These breakers are identified by the code of the standard range, from which maximum timing, is equal to the value of Icw (1s).
they are derived, together with the suffix “/E MS”. Three-pole and four-pole (1)
The performance at 1000V is 50 kA
(2)
versions are available in both withdrawable and fixed versions with the same The performance at 1000V is 105 kA
dimensions, accessory characteristics and installation as the standard switch
disconnectors.
5.4 Automatic transfer switches

5.4 Automatic Transfer Switches
ATS010 device is interfaced by means of appropriate terminals:
In the electrical plants, where a high reliability is required from the power supply - with the protection circuit-breakers of the N-Line and of the E-Line, motorized
source because the operation cycle cannot be interrupted and the risk of a and mechanically interlocked, to detect their status and send opening and
lack of power supply is unacceptable, an emergency line supply is indispensable closing commands according to the set time delays;
to avoid the loss of large quantities of data, damages to working processes, - with the control card of the Gen set to control its status and send start and
plant stops etc. stop commands;
For these reasons, transfer switch devices are used mainly for: - with any further signals coming from the plant in order to block the switching
• power supply of hotels and airports; logic;
• surgical rooms and primary services in hospitals; - with the N-Line to detect any possible anomaly and with the E-Line to verify
• power supply of UPS groups; the voltage presence;
• databanks, telecommunication systems, PC rooms; - with an additional device to disconnect non-priority loads;
• power supply of industrial lines for continuous processes. - with an auxiliary power supply at 24 Vdc ± 20% (or 48 Vdc ± 10%). This
ATS010 is the solution offered by ABB: it is an automatic transfer switch system supply source shall be present also in case of lack of voltage on both lines (N-
with micro-processor based technology which allows switching of the supply Line and E-Line).
from the normal line (N-Line) to the emergency line (E-Line) in case any of the
following anomalies occurs on the main network: The circuit-breakers used to switch from the N-line to the E-line shall have all
• overvoltages and voltage dips; the necessary accessories and shall be properly interlocked in order to guarantee
• lack of one of the phases; the correct working of the plant. The following accessories are required:
• asymmetries in the phase cycle;
• frequency values out of the setting range. Moulded-case circuit-breakers Tmax (T4-T5-T6) and SACE Isomax (S7):
Then, when the network standard parameters are recovered, the system
switches again the power supply to the main network (N-Line). - motor operator from 48 V to 110 V dc or up to 250V ac;
- trip signaling contact;
ATS010 is used in systems with two distinct supply lines connected to the - open/closed signaling contact;
same busbar system and functioning independently (“island condition”): the - racked-in signaling contact in case of plug-in or withdrawable circuit-breakers;
first one is used as normal supply line, the second is used for emergency power - mechanical interlock between two circuit-breakers.
supply from a generator system. It is also possible to provide the system with a
device to disconnect the non-priority loads when the network is supplied from
the E-Line. Air circuit-breakers Emax:
- charging spring motor;
- shunt opening release;
The following scheme shows a plant having a safety auxiliary power supply:
- shunt closing release;
- trip signaling contact;
- open/closed signaling contacts;
- racked-in signaling contact in case of withdrawable circuit-breakers;
- mechanical interlock between two circuit-breakers.
Normal network G Emergency Generator
(N-Line) (E-Line)
Switching strategies
According to the application where ATS010 device is used, two different
-QF1 -QF2 switching strategies can be chosen.
1SDC008038F0201
ATS010 Strategy 1: this strategy is used when an auxiliary supply source is available
for the supply of the motor operators of the circuit-breakers; the switching
sequence is as follows:
- normal line anomaly detection;
Non-vital loads Vital loads
SD - normal line circuit-breaker opening and Gen Set starting;
- waiting for presence of Gen Set voltage and emergency circuit-breaker closing.
5.4 Automatic transfer switches 5.4 Automatic transfer switches

For example, strategy 1 is used for systems in which a redundant 110 V auxiliary MANUAL:
power supply is available (MV/LV substations); the plant is designed so that the The MANUAL mode offers a choice between the following possibilities:
auxiliary voltage is always present even when neither the normal line nor the
Gen Set are active. In this case, the auxiliary power supply can be used to feed
the motor operators and/or the shunt opening and closing releases of the circuit- 1. Normal ON
breakers. ATS010 operates the circuit-breakers regardless of the presence of The emergency line circuit-breaker is forced to open and the normal line circuit-
the network and of the Gen Set. breaker is forced to close; the Gen Set is stopped and the transfer switch
logic is disabled.
Strategy 2: this strategy is absolutely necessary when the power supply for This selector position guarantees that the emergency line is not closed and
the auxiliary accessories of the circuit-breakers is directly derived from the that the Gen Set is not running; this position is useful when the user wants to
network and the Gen Set, since a safety auxiliary power supply is not available; carry out maintenance on the emergency line or on the Gen Set (in these
in this case, before operating the circuit-breakers, ATS010 waits for availability cases it is advisable to install mechanical lock in open position for the
of normal line or emergency line voltage: normal line or Gen Set. The switching emergency line circuit-breaker).
sequence is as follows:
- normal line anomaly detection; 2. Normal – Emergency OFF (maintenance)
- Gen Set starting;
- waiting for presence of Gen Set voltage and normal line circuit-breaker opening; Both circuit-breakers (N-Line and E-Line) are forced in open position. It is
- Gen Set circuit-breaker closing. useful when all loads are to be disconnected from the power supply sources,
for example to carry out maintenance on the plant (in these cases, it is advisable
Note: in both strategies, it is necessary to provide an auxiliary power supply for to mechanically lock both circuit-breakers in the open position).
ATS010.
3. Gen Set START
Operating modes
The START command of the Gen Set has been activated through the proper
By using the front selector it is possible to choose one of the following six output. The circuit-breakers are not operated and the transfer switch logic is
operating modes: disabled.
When emergency line voltage is present and switching is enabled, it is possible
TEST: to switch the selector to ‘Emergency ON’ position in order to force supply
This operating mode is useful to test the Gen Set start and therefore to test the from the emergency line.
emergency line power supply status without disconnecting normal line power
supply.
4. Emergency ON
AUTOMATIC: Power supply is forced from the emergency line. Before switching to this
The transfer switch logic is ON and checks both the circuit-breakers as well as position, ‘Gen-Set START’ operating mode is activated and shall be present
the generator. In case of normal line anomalies, the transfer switch procedure until switching is enabled as previously described.
begins from normal to emergency line and viceversa when normal line voltage
become available again.

Setting of parameters
All the parameters for the functioning of ATS010 can be simply adjusted through ON OFF ON OFF
dip-switches or trimmers. 4 4
3 3
Rated voltage for three-phase or single-phase plant 220V 230V
2 2
The following parameters of the N-Line can be set through dip-switches: 1 1
- network rated voltage value (from 100 V up to 500 V);
- power supply type (three-phase or single-phase);
- frequency value (50 Hz or 60 Hz);
- type of strategy. ON OFF ON OFF
4 4
Note: Voltages higher than 500 V can be reached by using VTs (voltage 3 3
240V 2
277V 2
transformers); in this case the setting of the voltage value shall consider the
transformation ratio. 1 1
ON OFF ON OFF
4 4
3 3
347V 380V
2 2
1 1
1SDC008052F0001
ON OFF ON OFF
4 4
3 3
400V 415V
2 2
1 1
The figure below shows all the possible voltage values which can be set by the
dip-switches from 1 to 4.
ON OFF ON OFF
4 4
ON OFF ON OFF
3 3
4 4 440V 480V
2 2
3 3
100V 2
115V 2
1 1
1 1
ON OFF
4
ON OFF ON OFF 3
4 4 500V
2
3 3 1
120V 208V
2 2
1 1
Note: the black square shows the dip-switch position.

Overvoltage threshold T3= 0 ÷ 254 s GEN-SET STOP
According to the load characteristics, it is possible to set the voltage range Delay time from N-Line return to Gen set stop command. It is used when the
outside which the N-Line supply cannot be accepted and switching to the E- Generator needs a cooling time after the disconnection of the load (opening of
Line is necessary. the E-Line circuit-breaker).
1SDC008056F0001
T4= 0 ÷ 254 s BACK TO NORMAL LINE OK
1SDC008053F0001
Delay time necessary for N-Line voltage to establish, before inverse switching
procedure is started.
1SDC008057F0001
Transfer switch delay configuration
Transfer switch delays can be set through special trimmers. Setting times and
relevant purposes are reported below:
T1 = 0 ÷ 32 s CB-N open
T5 = 0 ÷ 32 s CB-E CLOSE
Delay time from net anomaly detection to N-Line CB opening. It is used to
avoid transfer switching in case of short voltage dips. Delay time to allow the gen-set voltage to stabilize: after starting the generator
and detecting a voltage on the emergency line, the ATS010 unit waits for a time
T5 before considering this voltage stable.
In Strategy 1, after detecting the gen-set voltage, the ATS010 unit waits for
1SDC008054F0001
time T5 before closing CB-E.

In strategy 2, the ATS010 unit cannot open or close the breakers unless there
is a stable voltage source. Therefore, the unit waits for a time T5 before opening
CB-N. If, however, a time delay T1 since voltage loss has not elapsed, the
ATS010 unit waits until T1 has elapsed, and only then opens CB-N.
1SDC008058F0001
T2 = 0 ÷ 32 s GEN-SET START
Delay time from net anomaly detection to Gen set start command. It is used to
prevent from transfer switching in case of short voltage dips.
1SDC008055F0001
5.4 Automatic transfer switches
5 Special applications 6 Switchboards

Check on the plant and on the circuit-breakers 6.1 Electrical switchboards
ATS010 can be used in plants with the following characteristics: The switchboard is a combination of one or more low voltage switching,
• the Gen set shall function independently (“island” condition); protection and other devices assembled in one or more enclosure so as to
• rated voltage and frequency of the plants are included within the given ranges; satisfy the requirements regarding safety and to allow the functions for which it
• ATS010 supply is guaranteed even if N-Line and E-Line voltages are missing. was designed to be carried out.
The two circuit-breakers controlled by ATS are to be: A switchboard consists of a container, termed enclosure by the relevant
• mechanically interlocked; Standards (which has the function of support and mechanical protection of the
• of the prescribed type and size; components contained within), and the electrical equipment, which consists of
• equipped with the prescribed accessories. devices, internal connections and input and output terminals for connection
with the system.
References Standards
The reference Standard is IEC 60439-1 published in 1999, titled “Low-voltage
EN 50178 (1997): ”Electronic equipment for use in power installations” switchgear and controlgear assemblies - Part 1: Type-tested and partially type-
Compliance with “Low Voltage Directive” (LVD) no. 73/23/EEC and tested assemblies”, approved by CENELEC code number EN 60439-1.
“Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive” (EMC) no. 89/336/EEC.
Electromagnetic compatibility: EN 50081-2, EN 50082-2 Supplementary calculation guides are:
Environmental conditions: IEC 60068-2-1, IEC 60068-2-2, IEC 60068-2-3.
IEC 60890 “A method of temperature-rise assessment by extrapolation for
partially type-tested assemblies (PTTA) of low-voltage switchgear and
controlgear“.
IEC 61117 “A method for assessing the short-circuit withstand strength of

ATS010 - main technical characteristics partially type-tested assemblies (PTTA)”.
Rated power supply voltage 24 Vdc ± 20%
(galvanically isolated from the ground) 48 Vdc ± 10% IEC 60865-1 “Short-circuit currents - Calculation of effects - Part 1: Definitions
(maximum ripple ± 5%) and calculation methods”.
Maximum power consumption 5 W @ 24 Vdc
10 W @ 48 Vdc Standard IEC 60439-1 sets out the requirements relating to the construction,
Rated power 1,8 W @ 24 Vdc safety and maintainability of electrical switchboards, and identifies the nominal
(N-Line voltage present and CBs not operated) 4,5 W @ 48 Vdc characteristics, the operational environmental conditions, the mechanical and
Operating temperature -25 °C…+70 °C electrical requirements and the performance regulations.
Maximum humidity 90 % without condensation The type-tests and individual tests are defined, as well as the method of their
Storing temperature -20 °C…..+80 °C execution and the criteria necessary for the evaluation of the results.
Degree of protection IP54 (front panel)
Dimensions (H x W x D) 144 x 144 x 85 Standard IEC 60439-1 distinguishes between the two types of switchboard:
Weight [kg] 0,8 TTA (type-tested assemblies) and PTTA (partially type-tested assemblies).
By “type-tested assemblies” (TTA), it is meant a low voltage switchgear and
controlgear assemblies conforming to an established type or system without
Normal line voltage sensor deviations likely to significantly influence the performance from the typical
assembly verified to be in accordance with the Standard prescriptions.
Normal line rated voltage 100…500 Vac with direct connection
Over 500 Vac with external voltage transformers TTA switchboards are assemblies derived directly from a prototype designed in
Rated frequency 50 Hz / 60 Hz all details and subjected to type-tests; as the type-tests are very complex,
Impulse withstand voltage on L1, L2, L3 inputs 6 kV
switchboards designed by a manufacturer with a sound technical and financial
basis are referred to. Nevertheless, TTA assemblies can be mounted by a panel
Motor operators - shunt opening/closing releases builder or installer who follows the manufacturer’s instructions; deviations from
the prototype are only allowed if they do not significantly change the perfor-
Tmax T4-T5-T6 Isomax S7 Up to 250 Vac
From 48 Vdc to 110 Vdc
mance compared with the type-tested equipment.
Emax Up to 250 Vac
From 24 Vdc to 110 Vdc
6.1 Electrical switchboards 6.1 Electrical switchboards
6 Switchboards 6 Switchboards
By “partially type-tested assemblies” (PTTA), it is meant a low voltage and List of verifications and tests to be performed on TTA and PTTA
controlgear assembly, tested only with a part of the type-tests; some tests may Characteristics Sub-
be substituted by extrapolation which are calculations based on experimental No. to be checked clauses TTA PTTA
results obtained from assemblies which have passed the type-tests. Verifications 1 Temperature-rise limits 8.2.1 Verification of temperature-rise Verification of temperature-rise limits
limits by test by test or extrapolation
through simplified measurements or calculations, allowed as an alternative to
(type test)
type tests, concern heating, short circuit withstand and insulation.
2 Dielectric properties 8.2.2 Verification of dielectric Verification of dielectric properties by
properties by test test according to 8.2.2 or 8.3.2, or
Standard IEC 60439-1 states that some steps of assembly may take place (type test) verification of insulation resistance
outside the factory of the manufacturer, provided the assembly is performed in according to 8.3.4
accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. (see No. 9 and 11)
The installer may use commercial assembly kits to realize a suitable switchboard 3 Short-circuit withstand 8.2.3 Verification of the short- Verification of the short-circuit
configuration. strength circuit withstand strength withstand strength by test or by
The same Standard specifies a division of responsibility between the by test extrapolation from similar type-tested
manufacturer and the assembler in Table 7: “List of verifications and tests to be (type test) arrangements
performed on TTA and PTTA” in which the type-tests and individual tests to be 4 Effectiveness of the 8.2.4
carried out on the assembly are detailed. protective circuit
The type-tests verify the compliance of the prototype with the requirements of
Effective connection 8.2.4.1 Verification of the effective Verification of the effective
the Standard, and are generally under the responsibility of the manufacturer,
between the exposed connection between the connection between the exposed
who must also supply instructions for the production and assembly of the conductive parts of the exposed conductive parts conductive parts of the ASSEMBLY
switchboard. The assembler has responsibility for the selection and assembly ASSEMBLY and the of the ASSEMBLY and the and the protective circuit by inspection
of components in accordance with the instructions supplied and must confirm protective circuit protective circuit by or by resistance measurement
compliance with the Standards through the previously stated checks in the inspection or by resistance
case of switchboards that deviate from a tested prototype. Routine tests must measurement (type test)
also be carried out on every example produced.
Short-circuit withstand Verification of the short- Verification of the short-circuit
The distinction between TTA and PTTA switchgear and controlgear assemblies strength of the 8.2.4.2 circuit withstand strength withstand strength of the protective
has no relevance to the declaration of conformity with Standard IEC 60439-1, protective circuit of the protective circuit by circuit by test or appropriate design
in so far as the switchboard must comply with this Standard. test (type test) and arrangement of the protective
conductor (see 7.4.3.1.1, last
paragraph)
5 Clearances and 8.2.5 Verification of the Verification of clearances and
creepage distances clearances and creepage creepage distances
distances (type test)
6 Mechanical operation 8.2.6 Verification of mechanical Verification of mechanical operation
operation (type test)
7 Degree of protection 8.2.7 Verification of the degree Verification of the degree of
of protection (type test) protection
8 Wiring, electrical 8.3.1 Inspection of the ASSEMBLY Inspection of the ASSEMBLY including
operation including inspection of inspection of wiring and, if necessary,
wiring and, if necessary, electrical operation test
electrical operation test
(routine test)
9 Insulation 8.3.2 Dielectric test Dielectric test or verification of
(routine test) insulation resistance according to
8.3.4 (see No. 2 and 11)
10 Protective measures 8.3.3 Checking of protective Checking of protective measures
measures and of the
electrical continuity of the
protective circuits (routine test)
11 Insulation resistance 8.3.4 Verification of insulation resistance
unless test according to 8.2.2 or 8.3.2
has been made (see No. 2 and 9)
Degrees of protection Form of separation and classification of switchboards
The degree of protection IP indicates a level of protection provided by the Forms of internal separation
assembly against access to or contact with live parts, against ingress of solid
foreign bodies and against the ingress of liquid. The IP code is the system used By form of separation it is meant the type of subdivision provided within the
for the identification of the degree of protection, in compliance with the switchboard. Separation by means of barriers or partitions (metallic or insulating)
requirements of Standard IEC 60529. Unless otherwise specified by the may have the function to:
manufacturer, the degree of protection applies to the complete switchboard,
assembled and installed for normal use (with door closed).
The manufacturer shall also state the degree of protection applicable to particular - provide protection against direct contact (at least IPXXB) in the case of access
configurations which may arise in service, such as the degree of protection to a part of the switchboard which is not live, with respect to the rest of the
with the door open or with devices removed or withdrawn. switchboard which remains live;
- reduce the risk of starting or propagating an internal arc;
Elements of the IP Code and their meanings - impede the passage of solid bodies between different parts of the switchboard
Numerials Meaning for the Meaning for the (degree of protection of at least IP2X).
Element or letters protection of equipment protection of persons Ref.
Code letters IP A partition is a separation element between two parts, while a barrier protects
First characteristic Against ingress of the solid Against access to Cl.5 the operator from direct contact and from arcing effects from any interruption
numeral foreign objects hazardous parts with devices in the normal access direction.
The following table from Standard IEC 60439-1 highlights typical forms of
0 (non-protected) (non-protected) separation which can be obtained using barriers or partitions:
1 ≥ 50 mm diameter back of hand
2 ≥ 12.5 mm diameter finger
3 ≥ 2.5 mm diameter tool
4 ≥ 1.0 mm diameter wire
5 dust-protected wire
6 dust-tight wire
Second Against ingress of water Cl.6
characteristic with harmful effects
numeral
0 (non-protected)
1 vertically dripping
2 dripping (15° tilted)
3 spraying
4 splashing
5 jetting Main criteria Subcriteria Form
6 powerful jetting No separation Form 1
7 temporary immersion Terminals for external conductors not Form 2a
8 continuous immersion separated from busbars
Separation of busbars from the functional units
Additional letter Against access to Cl.7 Terminals for external conductors Form 2b
(optional) hazardous parts with separated from busbars
Separation of busbars from the functional units and Terminals for external conductors not Form 3a
A back of hand separation of all functional units from one another. separated from busbars
B finger Separation of the terminals for external conductors Terminals for external conductors Form 3b
C tool from the functional units, but not from each other separated from busbars
D wire Terminals for external conductors in the Form 4a
Supplementary Supplemetary information Cl.8 same compartment as the associated
letter (optional specific to: Separation of busbars from the functional units and functional unit
separation of all functional units from one another, Terminals for external conductors not in Form 4b
A Hight voltage apparatus including the terminals for external conductors the same compartment as the associated
B Motion during water test which are an integral part of the functional unit functional unit, but in individual, separate,
C Stationary during water test enclosed protected spaces or
D Weather conditions compartments
Simbols Form 1 Form 2 Form 3 Form 4
(no internal segregation) (segregation of the busbars (separation of the busbars from ((separation of the busbars from
the functional units + separation
- Desk-type assembly
the functional units + separation
from the functional units)
of the functional units from each
of the functional units from each
other + separation of the
Used for the control of machinery or complex systems in the mechanical, iron
other) terminals from each other) and steel, and chemical industries.
Form 2a Form 3a Form 4a
Terminals not separated from Terminals not separated from Terminals in the same
the busbars the busbars compartment as the associated - Box-type assembly
functional unit
Characterized by wall mounting, either mounted on a wall or flush-fitting;
b
these switchboards are generally used for distribution at department or zone
a d
level in industrial environments and in the tertiary sector.
- Multi-box-type assembly
Each box, generally protected and flanged, contains a functional unit which
Form 2b Form 3b Form 4b
Terminals separated from the Terminals separated from the Terminals in the same may be an automatic circuit-breaker, a starter, a socket complete with locking
c busbars busbars compartment as the associated
functional unit
switch or circuit-breaker.
1SDC008039F0201
Caption With regard to the intended function, switchboards may be divided into the
a Housing
b Internal segregation
following types:
c Functional units including the terminals for the associated
external conductors
d Busbars, including the distribution busbars
- Main distribution boards
Main distribution boards are generally installed immediately downstream of
MV/LV transformers, or of generators; they are also termed power centres.
Main distribution boards comprise one or more incoming units, busbar
connectors, and a relatively smaller number of output units.
- Secondary distribution boards

Secondary distribution boards include a wide range of switchboards for the
Classification distribution of power, and are equipped with a single input unit and numerous
output units.
Different classifications of electrical switchboard exist, depending on a range of
factors.
- Motor operation boards
Motor control boards are designed for the control and centralised protection
Based on construction type, Standard IEC 60439-1 firstly distinguishes between
of motors: therefore they comprise the relative coordinated devices for
open and enclosed assemblies.
operation and protection, and auxiliary control and signalling devices.
A switchboard is enclosed when it comprises protective panels on all sides,
providing a degree of protection against direct contact of at least IPXXB.
- Control, measurement and protection boards
Switchboards used in normal environments must be enclosed.
Control, measurement and protection boards generally consist of desks
containing mainly equipment for the control, monitoring and measurement of
Open switchboards, with or without front covering, which have the live parts
industrial processes and systems.
accessible. These switchboards may only be used in electrical plants.
- Machine-side boards
With regard to external design, switchboards are divided into the following
Machine-side boards are functionally similar to the above; their role is to provide
categories:
an interface between the machine with the power supply and the operator.
- Cubicle-type assembly
- Assemblies for construction sites (ASC)
Used for large scale control and distribution equipment; multi-cubicle-type
Assemblies for construction sites may be of different sizes, from a simple
assembly can be obtained by placing cubicles side by side.
plug and socket assembly to true distribution boards with enclosures of metal
or insulating material. They are generally mobile or, in any case, transportable.
6.1 Electrical switchboards 6.2 MNS switchboards
Method of temperature rise assessment by 6.2 MNS switchboards
extrapolation for partially tested assemblies (PTTA) MNS systems are suitable for applications in all fields concerning the generation,
distribution and use of electrical energy; e. g., they can be used as:
For PTTA assemblies, the temperature rise can be determined by laboratory
- main and sub-distribution boards;
tests or calculations, which can be carried out in accordance with Standard - motor power supply of MCCs (Motor Control Centres);
IEC 60890. The formulae and coefficients given in this Standard are deduced - automation switchboards.
from measurements taken from numerous switchboards, and the validity of the
method has been checked by comparison with the test results. The MNS system is a framework construction with maintenance-free bolted
This method does not cover the whole range of low voltage switchgear and connections which can be equipped as required with standardized components
controlgear assemblies since it has been developed under precise hypotheses and can be adapted to any application. The consistent application of the mo-
which limit the applications; this can however be correct, suited and integrated dular principle both in electrical and mechanical design permits optional selection
with other calculation procedures which can be demonstrated to have a technical of the structural design, interior arrangement and degree of protection according
basis. to the operating and environmental conditions.
Standard IEC 60890 serves to determine the temperature rise of the air inside
the switchboard caused by the energy dissipated by the devices and conductors The design and material used for the MNS system largely prevent the occurrence
installed within the switchboard. of electric arcs, or provide for arc extinguishing within a short time. The MNS
To calculate the temperature rise of the air inside an enclosure, once the System complies with the requirements laid down in VDE0660 Part 500 as well
as IEC 61641 and has furthermore been subjected to extensive accidental arc
requirements of the Standard have been met, the following must be considered:
tests by an independent institute.
- Dimensions of the enclosure. The MNS system offers the user many alternative solutions and notable
- Type of installation: advantages in comparison with conventional-type installations:
- enclosure open to air on all sides; - compact, space-saving design;
- wall-mounted enclosure; - back-to-back arrangement;
- enclosure designed for mounting in extremities; - optimized energy distribution in the cubicles;
- enclosure in an internal position in a multi- - easy project and detail engineering through standardized components;
compartment switchboard; - comprehensive range of standardized modules;
- Any ventilation openings, and their dimensions. - various design levels depending on operating and environmental conditions;
- Number of horizontal internal separators; - easy combination of the different equipment systems, such as fixed and
- Power losses from the effective current flowing through any device and withdrawable modules in a single cubicle;
conductor installed within the switchboard or compartment. - possibility of arc-proof design (standard design with fixed module design);
- possibility of earthquake-, vibration- and shock-proof design;
The Standard allows the calculation of temperature rise of the air at mid-height - easy assembly without special tools;
- easy conversion and retrofit;
and at the highest point of the switchboard. Once the values are calculated, it
- largely maintenance-free;
must be evaluated if the switchboard can comply with the requirements relating
- high operational reliability;
to the set limits at certain points within the same switchboard. - high safety for human beings.
The Annex B explains the calculation method described in the Standard.
ABB supplies the client with calculation software which allows the temperature The basic elements of the frame are C-sections with holes at 25 mm intervals in
rise inside the switchboard to be calculated quickly. compliance with Standard DIN 43660. All frame parts are secured maintenance-
free with tapping screws or ESLOK screws. Based on the basic grid size of 25
mm, frames can be constructed for the various cubicle types without any special
tools. Single or multi-cubicle switchgear assemblies for front or front and rear
operations are possible.
Different designs are available, depending on the enclosure required:
- single equipment compartment door;
- double equipment compartment door;
- equipment and cable compartment door;
- module doors and/or withdrawable module covers and cable compartment door.
The bottom side of the cubicle can be provided with floor plates. With the aid of
flanged plates, cable ducts can be provided to suit all requirements. Doors and
cladding can be provided with one or more ventilation opening, roof plates can
be provided with metallic grid (IP 30 – IP40) or with ventilation chimney (IP 40, 41, 42).
6.3 ArTu distribution switchboards 6.3 ArTu distribution switchboards
Depending on the requirements, a frame structure can be subdivided into the - maximum integration with modular devices and ABB SACE moulded-case
following compartments (functional areas): and air circuit-breakers;
- equipment compartment; - minimum switchboard assembly times thanks to the simplicity of the kits, the
- busbar compartment; standardization of the small assembly items, the self-supporting elements
- cable compartment. and the presence of clear reference points for assembly of the plates and
The equipment compartment holds the equipment modules, the busbar panels;
compartment contains the busbars and distribution bars, the cable compartment - separations in kits up to Form 4.
houses the incoming and outgoing cables (optionally from above and from
below) with the wiring required for connecting the modules as well as the The range of ArTu switchboards includes four versions, which can be equipped
supporting devices (cable mounting rails, cable connection parts, parallel with the same accessories.
connections, wiring ducts, etc.). The functional compartments of a cubicle as
well as the cubicles themselves can be separated by partitions. Horizontal ArTu L series
partitions with or without ventilation openings can also be inserted between the
compartments. ArTu L series consists of a range of modular switchboard kits, with a capacity
All incoming/outgoing feeder and bus coupler cubicles include one switching of 24 modules per row and degree of protection IP31 (without door) or IP43
device. These devices can be fixed-mounted switch disconnectors, fixed- (basic version with door). These switchboards can be wall- or floor-mounted:
mounted or withdrawable air or moulded-case circuit-breakers. - wall-mounted ArTu L series, with heights of 600, 800, 1000 and 1200 mm,
This type of cubicles is subdivided into equipment and busbar compartments; depth 200 mm, width 700 mm. Both System pro M modular devices and
their size (H x W) is 2200 mm x 400 mm / 1200 mm x 600 mm, and the depth moulded-case circuit-breakers Tmax T1-T2-T3 are housed inside this
depends on the dimensions of the switchgear used. switchboard series;
Cubicles with air circuit-breakers up to 2000 A can be built in the reduced - floor-mounted ArTu L series, with heights of 1400, 1600, 1800 and 2000
dimensioned version (W = 400 mm). mm, depth 240 mm, width 700 mm. System pro M modular devices, moulded-
It is possible to interconnect cubicles to form optimal delivery units with a case circuit-breakers type Tmax T1-T2-T3-T4-T5-T6 (fixed version with front
maximum width of 3000 mm. terminals) are housed inside this switchboard series.
ArTu M series
6.3 ArTu distribution switchboards ArTu M series consists of a modular range of monoblock switchboards for wall-
mounted (with depths of 150 and 200 mm with IP65 degree of protection) or
The range of ABB SACE ArTu distribution switchboards provides a complete
floor-mounted (with depth of 250 mm and IP31 or IP65 degrees of protection)
and integrated offer of switchboards and kit systems for constructing primary
and secondary low voltage distribution switchboards. installations, in which it is possible to mount System pro M modular devices
With a single range of accessories and starting from simple assembly kits, the and Tmax T1-T2-T3 moulded-case circuit-breakers on a DIN rail ArTu M series
ArTu switchboards make it possible to assembly a wide range of configurations of floor-mounted switchboards can be equipped with Tmax series.
mounting modular, moulded-case and air circuit-breakers, with any internal
separation up to Form 4. ArTu K series
ABB SACE offers a series of standardized kits, consisting of pre-drilled plates ArTu K series consists of a range of modular switchboard kits for floor-mounted
and panels for the installation of the whole range of circuit-breakers type System installation with four different depths (250, 350, 600, 800 and 1000 mm) and
pro M, Isomax, Tmax and Emax E1, E2, E3, E4 without the need of additional with degree of protection IP31 (without front door), IP41 (with front door and
drilling operations or adaptations.
ventilated side panels) or IP65 (with front door and blind side panels), in which
Special consideration has been given to cabling requirements, providing special
it is possible to mount System pro M modular devices, the whole range of
seats to fix the plastic cabling duct horizontally and vertically.
moulded-case circuit–breakers Tmax and Isomax, and Emax circuit-breakers
Standardization of the components is extended to internal separation of the
switchboard: in ArTu switchboards, separation is easily carried out and it does E1, E2, E3 and E4.
not require either construction of “made-to-measure” switchboards or any ArTu switchboards have three functional widths:
additional sheet cutting, bending or drilling work. - 400 mm, for the installation of moulded-case circuit-breakers up to 630 A (T5);
- 600 mm, which is the basic dimension for the installation of all the apparatus;
ArTu switchboards are characterized by the following features: - 800 mm, for the creation of the side cable container within the structure of
- integrated range of modular metalwork structures up to 4000 A with common the floor-mounted switchboard or for the use of panels with the same width.
accessories;
- possibility of fulfilling all application requirements in terms of installation (wall- The available internal space varies in height from 600 mm (wall-mounted L
mounting, floor-mounting, monoblock and cabinet kits) and degree of series) to 2000 mm (floor-mounted M series and K series), thus offering a possible
protection (IP31, IP41, IP43, IP65); solution for the most varied application requirements.
- structure made of hot-galvanized sheet;
6.3 ArTu distribution switchboards
6 Switchboards Annex A: Protection against short-circuit effects

inside low-voltage switchboards
ArTu PB Series (Panelboard and Pan Assembly)
The ArTu line is now upgraded with the new ArTu PB Panelboard solution. The Std. IEC 60439-1 specifies that ASSEMBLIES (referred to hereafter as
The ArTu PB Panelboard is suitable for distribution applications with an incomer switchboards) shall be constructed so as to be capable of withstanding the
up to 800A and outgoing feeders up to 250A. thermal and dynamic stresses resulting from short-circuit currents up to the
The ArTu PB Panelboard is extremely sturdy thanks to its new designed rated values.
framework and it is available both in the wall-mounted version as well as in the Furthermore, switchboards shall be protected against short-circuit currents by
floor-mounted one. means of circuit-breakers, fuses or a combination of both, which may either be
ArTu PB Panelboard customisation is extremely flexible due to the smart design incorporated in the switchboard or arranged upstream.
based on configurations of 6, 12 and 18 outgoing ways and to the new ABB When ordering a switchboard, the user shall specify the short-circuit conditions
plug-in system that allows easy and fast connections for all T1 and T3 versions. at the point of installation.
Upon request, extension boxes are available on all sides of the structure, for
metering purposes too. This chapter takes into consideration the following aspects:
The vertical trunking system is running behind the MCCB’s layer allowing easy - The need, or not, to carry out a verification of the short-circuit
access to every accessory wiring (SR’s, UV’s, AUX contacts). withstand strength of the switchboard.
The ArTu PB Panelboard, supplied as a standard with a blind door, is available - The suitability of a switchboard for a plant as a function of the
with a glazed one as well. prospective short-circuit current of the plant and of the short-circuit
parameters of the switchboard.
- The suitability of a busbar system as a function of the short-circuit
current and of the protective devices.
Annex A: Protection against short-circuit effects Annex A: Protection against short-circuit effects
inside low-voltage switchboards inside low-voltage switchboards
Verification of short-circuit withstand strength Short-circuit current and suitability of the switchboard
The verification of the short-circuit withstand strength is dealt with in the Standard
for the plant
IEC 60439-1, where, in particular, the cases requiring this verification and the The verification of the short-circuit withstand strength is based on two values
different types of verification are specified. stated by the manufacturer in alternative to each other:
The verification of the short-circuit withstand strength is not required if the - the rated short-time current Icw
following conditions are fulfilled: - the rated conditional short-circuit current Ik
• For switchboards having a rated short-time current (Icw) or rated conditional Based on one of these two values, it is possible to determine whether the
current (Ik) not exceeding 10 kA. switchboard is suitable to be installed in a particular point of the system.
• For switchboards protected by current limiting devices having a cut-off current
not exceeding 17 kA at the maximum allowable prospective short-circuit current It shall be necessary to verify that the breaking capacities of the
at the terminals of the incoming circuit of the switchboard. apparatus inside the switchboard are compatible with the short-circuit
• For auxiliary circuits of switchboards intended to be connected to transformers values of the system.
whose rated power does not exceed 10 kVA for a rated secondary voltage of
not less than 110 V, or 1.6 kVA for a rated secondary voltage less than 110 V, The rated short-time withstand current Icw is a predefined r.m.s. value of test
and whose short-circuit impedance is not less than 4%. current, to which a determined peak value applied to the test circuit of the
• For all the parts of switchboards (busbars, busbar supports, connections to switchboard for a specified time (usually 1s) corresponds. The switchboard
shall be able to withstand the thermal and electro-dynamical stresses without
busbars, incoming and outgoing units, switching and protective devices, etc.)
damages or deformations which could compromise the operation of the system.
which have already been subjected to type tests valid for conditions in the
From this test (if passed) it is possible to obtain the specific let-through energy
switchboard.
(I2t) which can be carried by the switchboard:
Therefore, from an engineering point of view, the need to verify the short-circuit I2t = Icw2t
withstand strength may be viewed as follows:
The test shall be carried out at a power factor value specified below in the Table
4 of the Std. IEC 60439-1. A factor “n” corresponding at this cosϕ value allows
to determine the peak value of the short-circuit current withstood by the
switchboard through the following formula:
Icw of switchboard ≤ 10 kA
or
Ip = Icw . n
Ik conditional current of switchboard ≤ 10 kA Table 4
power factor
r.m.s. value of short-circuit current cosϕ n
NO
YES I ≤ 5 kA 0.7 1.5
5<I ≤ 10 kA 0.5 1.7
The condition
10<I ≤ 20 kA 0.3 2
YES Ip ≤ 17 kA 20<I ≤ 50 kA 0.25 2.1
50<I 0.2 2.2
is satisfied for the cut-off current of the protective
circuit-breaker at the maximum allowable The values of this table represent the majority of applications. In special locations, for
prospective short-circuit current example in the vicinity of transformers or generators, lower values of power factor may
be found, whereby the maximum prospective peak current may become the limiting
value instead of the r.m.s. value of the short-circuit current.
NO
The conditional short-circuit current is a predetermined r.m.s. value of test current
to which a defined peak value corresponds and which can be withstand by the
Verification not Verification switchboard during the operating time of a specified protective device. This
required required devices is usually the main circuit-breaker of the switchboard.
By comparing the two values Icw and Ip with the prospective short-circuit current
of the plant, it is possible to establish whether the switchboard is suitable to be
installed at a specified point of the system.
As regards the details of the test performance, reference shall be made directly The following diagrams show the method to determine the compatibility of the
to the Standard IEC 60439-1. switchboard with the plant.
Example
The rated short-time withstand current of the
switchboard Icw (r.m.s.value) is known Plant data: Rated voltage Ur=400 V
Rated frequency fr=50Hz
Short-circuit current Ik=35kA
Assume that in an existing system there is a switchboard with Icw equal to

35kA and that, at the installation point of the switchboard, the prospective
Ik (prospective, of the plant) < Icw (of the switchboard) short-circuit current is equal to 35kA.
NO Now assume that an increase in the power supply of a plant is decided and
YES that the short-circuit value rises to 60 kA.
Plant data after the increase: Rated voltage Ur=400 V
Rated frequency fr=50Hz
On the supply side of the switchboard a Short-circuit current Ik=60kA
YES circuit-breaker is installed, which for the
prospective Ik has I2t < I2t (of the
switchboard) and a cut-off current Since the Icw of the switchboard is lower than the short-circuit current of the
Ip < Ip (switchboard) system, in order to verify that the actual switchboard is still compatible, it is
necessary to:
- determine the I2t and Ip values let-through by the circuit-breaker on the supply
NO side of the switchboard
- verify that the protective devices installed inside the switchboard have a
Switchboard Switchboard sufficient breaking capacity (separately or in back-up)
suitable not suitable
Icw = 35kA from which:

I2t switchboard = 352x1 =1225 MA2s
The conditional short-circuit current of Ipswitchboard = 73.5 kA (according to Table 4)
the switchboard (r.m.s.value) is known
Assuming that on the supply side of the switchboard a circuit-breaker type
Tmax T5H (Icu=70kA@415V) is installed
I2tCB < 4MA2s
Ik (prospective, of the plant) < Ik
IpCB < 40kA
(conditional current of the switchboard)
(with a specified protective device) since
I2tswitchboard > I2tCB
Ipswitchboard > IpCB
YES NO
it results that the switchboard (structure and busbar system) is suitable.
Switchboard Switchboard
suitable not suitable Assume that the circuit-breakers installed inside the switchboard are circuit-
breakers type T1, T2 and T3 version N with Icu=36kA@415V. From the back-
up tables (see Chapter 4.3), it results that the circuit-breakers inside the
The breaking capacities of the apparatus inside the switchboard shall be verified to be switchboard are suitable for the plant, since their breaking capacity is increased
compatible with the short-circuit values of the plant. to 65 kA thanks to the circuit-breaker type T5H on the supply side.
Selection of the distribution system in relation to short- Example
circuit withstand strength Plant data: Rated voltage Ur=400 V
The dimensioning of the distribution system of the switchboard is obtained by Rated frequency fr=50Hz
taking into consideration the rated current flowing through it and the prospective Short-circuit current Ik=65kA
short-circuit current of the plant.
The manufacturer usually provides tables which allow the choice of the busbar
cross-section as a function of the rated current and give the mounting distances By considering the need of using a system of 400 A busbars with shaped form,
of the busbar supports to ensure the short-circuit withstand strength. in the ABB SACE catalogue “ArTu distribution switchboards” the following choice
is possible:
To select a distribution system compatible with the short-circuit data of the BA0400 In=400 A (IP65) Icw=35kA.
plant, one of these procedures shall be followed:
By assuming to have on the supply side of the busbar system a moulded-case
• If the protective device on the supply side of the distribution system circuit-breaker type
is known
From the Icw value of the distribution system it results: ABB SACE Tmax T5400 In400
Ik syst = Icw.n where n is the factor deduced from the Table 4
I2t syst = Icw2.t where t is equal to 1 s from the Icw of the busbar system, it derives:
Ip syst = Icw.n = 35 . 2.1 = 73.5 [kA]
In correspondence with the prospective short-circuit current value of the plant I2t syst = Icw2.t = 352 . 1 = 1225 [(kA)2 s]
the following values can be determined:
the cut-off current of the circuit-breaker IpCB From the curves
the specific let-through energy of the circuit-breaker I2tCB - at page 118
If IpCB<Ipsyst and I2tCB< I2tsyst, then the distribution system is suitable. Ik 65kA corresponds at about IpCB=35 kA
Icw (system) Ik (prospective) + circuit-breaker - at page 144

Ik 65kA corresponds at about I2 tCB=4 [(kA)2s]= 4 [MA2sec]
Thus, since
Iksyst = Icw . n IpCB
IpCB < Ipsyst
and
I2tCB < I2tsyst
I2tsyst = Icw2 . t I2tCB it results that the busbar system is compatible with the switchboard.
IpCB < Ipsyst and I2tCB<I2tsyst
YES NO
System System not

suitable suitable
• If the protective device on the supply side of the distribution

system is not known
The following condition must be fulfilled:
Ik (prospective) < Icw (system)
Selection of conductors on the supply side of the protective Example
devices Plant data:
The Standard IEC 60439-1 prescribes that in a switchboard, the active Rated voltage Ur=400 V
Rated frequency fr=50Hz T2 160
conductors (distribution busbars included) positioned between the main busbars
and the supply side of the single functional units, as well as the constructional Short-circuit current Ik=45kA
T2 160
components of these units, can be dimensioned according to the reduced short-
In the switchboard shown in the figu-
circuit stresses which occur on the load side of the short-circuit protective device
re, the vertical distribution busbars are
of the unit. derived from the main busbars. T3 250
These are 800 A busbars with shaped
This may be possible if the conductors are installed in such a way throughout section and with the following
the switchboard that, under normal operating conditions, an internal short-circuit characteristics:
T3 250
between phases and/or between phase and earth is only a remote possibility. It In (IP65) = 800 A,
is advisable that such conductors are of solid rigid manufacture. Icw max = 35 kA
As an example, this Standard gives conductor types and installation requirements Since it is a “rigid” system with spacers,
according to the Std. IEC 60439-1 a T3 250
which allow to consider a short-circuit between phases and/or between phase short-circuit between busbars is a re-
and earth only a remote possibility. mote possibility.
Anyway, a verification that the stresses reduced by the circuit-breakers on the
Type of conductor Requirements load side of the system are compatible with the system is required.
Bare conductors or single-core conductors with Assuming that in the cubicles there are the following circuit-breakers:
Mutual contact or contact with conductive parts shall
basic insulation, for example cables according be avoided, for example by use of spacers. ABB SACE T3S250
to IEC 60227-3. ABB SACE T2S160
Single-core conductors with basic insulation Mutual contact or contact with conductive parts is it is necessary to verify that, in the case of a short-circuit on any outgoing
and a maximum permissible conductor- permitted where there is no applied external pressure. conductor, the limitations created by the circuit-breaker are compatible with
operating temperature above 90°C, for example Contact with sharp edges must be avoided. There must the busbar system; to comply with this requirement, at the maximum allowable
cables according to IEC 60245-3, or heat- be no risk of mechanical damage. prospective short-circuit current, the circuit-breaker with higher cut-off current
resistant PVC insulated cables according to IEC and let-through energy must have an adequate current limiting capability for
These conductors may only be loaded such that an
the busbar system.
60227-3. operating temperature of 70°C is not exceeded.
Conductors with basic insulation, for example In this case the circuit-breaker is type ABB SACE T3S250 In250.
cables according to IEC 60227-3, having The verification shall be carried out as in the previous paragraph:
additional secondary insulation, for example
individually covered cables with shrink sleeving From the Icw of the busbar system, it derives:
or individually run cables in plastic conduits.
Ip syst = Icw.n = 35 . 2.1 = 73.5 [kA]
Conductors insulated with a very high I2t syst = Icw2.t = 352 . 1 = 1225 [(kA)2 s]
No additional requirements if there is no risk of
mechanical strength material, for example FTFE
mechanical damage.
insulation, or double-insulated conductors with From the limitation and let-through energy curves
an enhanced outer sheath rated for use up to 3 - at page 116
kV, for example cables according to IEC 60502. Ik = 45kA corresponds at about IpCB=30 kA
Single or multi-core sheathed cables, for - at page 142
example cables according to IEC 60245-4 or Ik = 45kA corresponds at about I2tCB=2 [(kA)2s]
60227-4.
Thus, since
Under these conditions or if anyway the integral short-circuit may be considered IpCB<Ipsyst
a remote possibility, the above described procedure shall be used to verify the and
suitability of the distribution system to the short-circuit conditions, when these I2tCB< I2tsyst
are determined as a function of the characteristics of the circuit-breakers on the
load side of the busbars. it results that the busbar system is compatible with the switchboard.
Annex B: temperature rise evaluation
Annex B: Temperature rise evaluation Annex B: Temperature rise evaluation

according to IEC 60890 according to IEC 60890
The calculation method suggested in the Standard IEC 60890 makes it possible Table 1: Operating current and power losses of insulated conductors
to evaluate the temperature rise inside an assembly (PTTA); this method is
applicable only if the following conditions are met:
Cross- Maximum permissible conductor temperature 70 °C
• there is an approximately even distribution of power losses inside the enclosure; section
• the installed equipment is arranged in a way that air circulation is only slightly (Cu)
d d d d
impeded; 1)
• the equipment installed is designed for direct current or alternating current up
to and including 60 Hz with the total of supply currents not exceeding 3150 A;
• conductors carrying high currents and structural parts are arranged in a way Air temperature inside the enclosure around the conductors
that eddy-current losses are negligible;
• for enclosures with ventilating openings, the cross-section of the air outlet
openings is at least 1.1 times the cross-section of the air inlet openings; 35 °C 55 °C 35 °C 55 °C 35 °C 55 °C
• there are no more than three horizontal partitions in the PTTA or a section of it;
operating current
operating current
operating current
operating current
operating current
operating current
power losses 2)
power losses 2)
power losses 2)
power losses 2)
power losses 2)
power losses 2)
• where enclosures with external ventilation openings have compartments, the
surface of the ventilation openings in each horizontal partition shall be at least
50% of the horizontal cross section of the compartment.
The data necessary for the calculation are:

- dimensions of the enclosure: height, width, depth;
- the type of installation of the enclosure (see Table 8); mm 2 A W/m A W/m A W/m A W/m A W/m A W/m
- presence of ventilation openings; 1.5 12 2.1 8 0.9 12 2.1 8 0.9 12 2.1 8 0.9
- number of internal horizontal partitions; 2.5 17 2.5 11 1.1 20 3.5 12 1.3 20 3.5 12 1.3
- the power loss of the equipment installed in the enclosure (see Tables 13 and 14); 4 22 2.6 14 1.1 25 3.4 18 1.8 25 3.4 20 2.2
- the power loss of the conductors inside the enclosure, equal to the sum of 6 28 2.8 18 1.2 32 3.7 23 1.9 32 3.7 25 2.3
10 38 3.0 25 1.3 48 4.8 31 2.0 50 5.2 32 2.1
the power loss of every conductor, according to Tables 1, 2 and 3. 16 52 3.7 34 1.6 64 5.6 42 2.4 65 5.8 50 3.4
25 85 6.3 55 2.6 85 6.3 65 3.7
For equipment and conductors not fully loaded, it is possible to evaluate the 35 104 7.5 67 3.1 115 7.9 85 5.0
power loss as: 50 130 7.9 85 3.4 150 10.5 115 6.2
70 161 8.4 105 3.6 175 9.9 149 7.2
95 192 8.7 125 3.7 225 11.9 175 7.2
2 120 226 9.6 147 4.1 250 11.7 210 8.3
P = Pn ( II ) (1)
b
n
150
185
240
275
295
347
11.7
10.9
12.0
167
191
225
4.3
4.6
5.0
275
350
400
11.7
15.4
15.9
239
273
322
8.8
9.4
10.3
300 400 13.2 260 5.6 460 17.5 371 11.4
Conductors for auxiliary circuits
where: Diam.
P is the actual power loss; 0.12 2.6 1.2 1.7 0.5 0.4
Pn is the rated power loss (at Ir); 0.14 2.9 1.3 1.9 0.6 -
0.20 3.2 1.1 2.1 0.5 -
Ib is the actual current;
0.22 3.6 1.3 2.3 0.5 0.5
In is the rated current. 0.30 4.4 1.4 2.9 0.6 0.6
0.34 4.7 1.4 3.1 0.6 0.6
0.50 6.4 1.8 4.2 0.8 0.8
0.56 1.6 0.7 -
1SDC008040F0201
0.75 8.2 1.9 5.4 0.8 1.0
1.00 9.3 1.8 6.1 0.8 -
1) Any arrangement desired with the values specified referring to six cores in a multi-core bundle with a
simultaneous load 100%
2) single length
Annex B: temperature rise evaluation Annex B: temperature rise evaluation

Table 2: Operating current and power losses of bare conductors, in Table 3: Operating current and power losses of bare conductors used
vertical arrangement without direct connections to apparatus as connections between apparatus and busbars
Maximum permissible conductor temperature 85 °C Width Cross- Maximum permissible conductor temperature 65 °C
Width Cross- x section
x section Thickness (Cu) Air temperature inside the enclosure Air temperature inside the enclosure
Thickness (Cu) Air temperature inside the enclosure Air temperature inside the enclosure around the conductors 35 °C around the conductors 55 °C
around the conductors 35 °C around the conductors 55 °C
50 Hz to 60 Hz ac dc and ac to 16 2/3 Hz 50 Hz to 60 Hz ac dc and ac to 16 2/3 Hz 50 Hz to 60 Hz ac and dc 50 Hz to 60 Hz ac and dc
operating current
operating current
operating current
operating current
operating current
operating current
operating current
operating current
operating current
operating current
operating current
operating current
power losses 1)
power losses 1)
power losses 1)
power losses 1)
power losses 1)
power losses 1)
power losses 1)
power losses 1)
power losses 1)
power losses 1)
power losses 1)
power losses 1)
mm x mm mm 2 A* W/m A** W/m A* W/m A** W/m A* W/m A** W/m A* W/m A** W/m mm x mm mm 2 A* W/m A** W/m A* W/m A** W/m
12 x 2 23.5 144 19.5 242 27.5 144 19.5 242 27.5 105 10.4 177 14.7 105 10.4 177 14.7 12 x 2 23.5 82 5.9 130 7.4 69 4.2 105 4.9
15 x 2 29.5 170 21.7 282 29.9 170 21.7 282 29.9 124 11.6 206 16.0 124 11.6 206 16.0 15 x 2 29.5 96 6.4 150 7.8 88 5.4 124 5.4
15 x 3 44.5 215 23.1 375 35.2 215 23.1 375 35.2 157 12.3 274 18.8 157 12.3 274 18.8 15 x 3 44.5 124 7.1 202 9.5 102 4.8 162 6.1
20 x 2 39.5 215 26.1 351 34.8 215 26.1 354 35.4 157 13.9 256 18.5 157 12.3 258 18.8 20 x 2 39.5 115 6.9 184 8.9 93 4.5 172 7.7
20 x 3 59.5 271 27.6 463 40.2 271 27.6 463 40.2 198 14.7 338 21.4 198 14.7 338 21.4 20 x 3 59.5 152 8.0 249 10.8 125 5.4 198 6.8
20 x 5 99.1 364 29.9 665 49.8 364 29.9 668 50.3 266 16.0 485 26.5 266 16.0 487 26.7 20 x 5 99.1 218 9.9 348 12.7 174 6.3 284 8.4
20 x 10 199 568 36.9 1097 69.2 569 36.7 1107 69.6 414 19.6 800 36.8 415 19.5 807 37.0 20 x 10 199 348 12.8 648 22.3 284 8.6 532 15.0
25 x 5 124 435 34.1 779 55.4 435 34.1 78 55.6 317 18.1 568 29.5 317 18.1 572 29.5 25 x 5 124 253 10.7 413 14.2 204 7.0 338 9.5
30 x 5 149 504 38.4 894 60.6 505 38.2 899 60.7 368 20.5 652 32.3 369 20.4 656 32.3 30 x 5 149 288 11.6 492 16.9 233 7.6 402 11.3
30 x 10 299 762 44.4 1410 77.9 770 44.8 1436 77.8 556 27.7 1028 41.4 562 23.9 1048 41.5 30 x 10 299 482 17.2 960 32.7 402 11.5 780 21.6
40 x 5 199 641 47.0 1112 72.5 644 47.0 1128 72.3 468 25.0 811 38.5 469 24.9 586 38.5 40 x 5 199 348 12.8 648 22.3 284 8.6 532 15.0
40 x 10 399 951 52.7 1716 88.9 968 52.6 1796 90.5 694 28.1 1251 47.3 706 28.0 1310 48.1 40 x 10 399 648 22.7 1245 41.9 532 15.3 1032 28.8
50 x 5 249 775 55.7 1322 82.9 782 55.4 1357 83.4 566 29.7 964 44.1 570 29.4 989 44.3 50 x 5 249 413 14.7 805 27.9 338 9.8 655 18,5
50 x 10 499 1133 60.9 2008 102.9 1164 61.4 2141 103.8 826 32.3 1465 54.8 849 32.7 1562 55.3 50 x 10 499 805 28.5 1560 53.5 660 19.2 1280 36.0
60 x 5 299 915 64.1 1530 94.2 926 64.7 1583 94.6 667 34.1 1116 50.1 675 34.4 1154 50.3 60 x 5 299 492 17.2 960 32.7 402 11.5 780 21.6
60 x 10 599 1310 68.5 2288 116.2 1357 69.5 2487 117.8 955 36.4 1668 62.0 989 36.9 1814 62.7 60 x 10 599 960 34.1 1848 63.2 780 22.5 1524 43.0
80 x 5 399 1170 80.7 1929 116.4 1200 80.8 2035 116.1 858 42.9 1407 61.9 875 42.9 1484 61.8 80 x 5 399 648 22.7 1256 42.6 532 15.3 1032 28.8
1SDC008041F0201
1SDC008042F0201
80 x 10 799 1649 85.0 2806 138.7 1742 85.1 3165 140.4 1203 45.3 2047 73.8 1271 45.3 1756 74.8 80 x 10 799 1256 45.8 2432 85.8 1032 30.9 1920 53.5
100 x 5 499 1436 100.1 2301 137.0 1476 98.7 2407 121.2 1048 53.3 1678 72.9 1077 52.5 1756 69.8 100 x 5 499 805 29.2 1560 54.8 660 19.6 1280 36.9
100 x 10 999 1982 101.7 3298 164.2 2128 102.6 3844 169.9 1445 54.0 2406 84.4 1552 54.6 2803 90.4 100 x 10 999 1560 58.4 2680 86.2 1280 39.3 2180 57.0
120 x 10 1200 2314 115.5 3804 187.3 2514 115.9 4509 189.9 1688 61.5 2774 99.6 1833 61.6 3288 101.0 120 x 10 1200 1848 68.3 2928 85.7 1524 46.5 2400 57.6
*) one conductor per phase **) two conductors per phase 1) single length *) one conductor per phase **) two conductors per phase 1) single length

Where enclosures without vertical partitions or individual sections have an Table 4: Surface factor b according to the type of installation
effective cooling surface greater than about 11.5 m or a width grater than about Type of installation Surface factor b
1.5 m, they should be divided for the calculation into fictitious sections, whose
Exposed top surface 1.4
dimensions approximate to the foregoing values.
Covered top surface, e.g. of built-in enclosures 0.7
Exposed side faces, e.g. front, rear and side walls 0.9
Covered side faces, e.g. rear side of wall-mounted enclosures 0.5
The following diagram shows the procedure to evaluate the temperature rise.
Side faces of central enclosures 0.5
Floor surface Not taken into account
START Fictitious side faces of sections which have been introduced only for calculation purposes
are not taken into account
Ae = ∑ (Ao . b) Table 5: Factor d for enclosures without ventilation openings and with
b (Tab.4)
an effective cooling surface Ae > 1.25 m2
Number of horizontal partitions n Factor d
h1.35 h1.35
f= yes no f = 0 1
Ab Ae > 1.25 mm2 Ab
1 1.05
2 1.15
yes with no 3 1.3
ventilation openings?
c (Tab.10) d (Tab.6) d (Tab.5) c (Tab.8)

Table 6: Factor d for enclosures with ventilation openings and with an
effective cooling surface Ae > 1.25 m2
k (Tab.9) k (Tab.7)
Number of horizontal partitions n Factor d
x = 0.715 x = 0.804 0 1
1 1.05
2 1.1
∆t0.5 = d . k . Px 3 1.15
Table 7: Enclosure constant k for enclosures without ventilation openings,

∆t1 = c . ∆t0.5 with an effective cooling surface Ae > 1.25 m2
Ae [m2] k Ae [m2] k
1.25 0.524 6.5 0.135
h 1.5 0.45 7 0.13
g=
1SDC008043F0201
w 2 0.35 7.5 0.125

2.5 0.275 8 0.12
c (Tab.12) k (Tab.11) 3 0.225 8.5 0.115
3.5 0.2 9 0.11
x = 0.804 4 0.185 9.5 0.105
4.5 0.17 10 0.1
5 0.16 10.5 0.095
∆t0.75 = ∆t1 = c .∆t0.5 ∆t0.5 = k . Px 5.5 0.15 11 0.09
6 0.14 11.5 0.085

Table 8: Temperature distribution factor c for enclosures without Table 9: Enclosure constant k for enclosures with ventilation openings and an effective
ventilation openings, with an effective cooling surface Ae > 1.25 m2 cooling surface Ae > 1.25 m2
h1.35 Ventilation
f= Type of installation opening Ae [m2]
Ab 1 2 3 4 5 in cm2 1 1.5 2 2.5 3 4 5 6 7 8 10 12 14
0.6 1.225 1.21 1.19 1.17 1.113 50 0.36 0.33 0.3 0.28 0.26 0.24 0.22 0.208 0.194 0.18 0.165 0.145 0.135
1 1.24 1.225 1.21 1.185 1.14 100 0.293 0.27 0.25 0.233 0.22 0.203 0.187 0.175 0.165 0.153 0.14 0.128 0.119
1.5 1.265 1.245 1.23 1.21 1.17 150 0.247 0.227 0.21 0.198 0.187 0.173 0.16 0.15 0.143 0.135 0.123 0.114 0.107
2 1.285 1.27 1.25 1.23 1.19 200 0.213 0.196 0.184 0.174 0.164 0.152 0.143 0.135 0.127 0.12 0.11 0.103 0.097
2.5 1.31 1.29 1.275 1.25 1.21 250 0.19 0.175 0.165 0.155 0.147 0.138 0.13 0.121 0.116 0.11 0.1 0.095 0.09
3 1.325 1.31 1.295 1.27 1.23 300 0.17 0.157 0.148 0.14 0.133 0.125 0.118 0.115 0.106 0.1 0.093 0.088 0.084
3.5 1.35 1.33 1.315 1.29 1.255 350 0.152 0.141 0.135 0.128 0.121 0.115 0.109 0.103 0.098 0.093 0.087 0.082 0.079
4 1.37 1.355 1.34 1.32 1.275 400 0.138 0.129 0.121 0.117 0.11 0.106 0.1 0.096 0.091 0.088 0.081 0.078 0.075
4.5 1.395 1.375 1.36 1.34 1.295 450 0.126 0.119 0.111 0.108 0.103 0.099 0.094 0.09 0.086 0.083 0.078 0.074 0.07
5 1.415 1.395 1.38 1.36 1.32 500 0.116 0.11 0.104 0.1 0.096 0.092 0.088 0.085 0.082 0.078 0.073 0.07 0.067
5.5 1.435 1.415 1.4 1.38 1.34 550 0.107 0.102 0.097 0.093 0.09 0.087 0.083 0.08 0.078 0.075 0.07 0.068 0.065
6 1.45 1.435 1.42 1.395 1.355 600 0.1 0.095 0.09 0.088 0.085 0.082 0.079 0.076 0.073 0.07 0.067 0.065 0.063
6.5 1.47 1.45 1.435 1.41 1.37 650 0.094 0.09 0.086 0.083 0.08 0.077 0.075 0.072 0.07 0.068 0.065 0.063 0.061
7 1.48 1.47 1.45 1.43 1.39 700 0.089 0.085 0.08 0.078 0.076 0.074 0.072 0.07 0.068 0.066 0.064 0.062 0.06
7.5 1.495 1.48 1.465 1.44 1.4
8 1.51 1.49 1.475 1.455 1.415
8.5 1.52 1.505 1.49 1.47 1.43
9 1.535 1.52 1.5 1.48 1.44
9.5 1.55 1.53 1.515 1.49 1.455
10 1.56 1.54 1.52 1.5 1.47
10.5 1.57 1.55 1.535 1.51 1.475
11 1.575 1.565 1.549 1.52 1.485
11.5 1.585 1.57 1.55 1.525 1.49
Table 10: Temperature distribution factor c for enclosures with ventilation openings and
12 1.59 1.58 1.56 1.535 1.5
an effective cooling surface Ae > 1.25 m2
12.5 1.6 1.585 1.57 1.54 1.51 h1.35
Ventilation f=
where h is the height of the enclosure, and Ab is the area of the base. opening Ab
For “Type of installation”: in cm2 1.5 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Type of installation n° 50 1.3 1.35 1.43 1.5 1.57 1.63 1.68 1.74 1.78 1.83
100 1.41 1.46 1.55 1.62 1.68 1.74 1.79 1.84 1.88 1.92
1 Separate enclosure, detached on all sides
150 1.5 1.55 1.63 1.69 1.75 1.8 1.85 1.9 1.94 1.97
200 1.56 1.61 1.67 1.75 1.8 1.85 1.9 1.94 1.97 2.01
2 First or last enclosure, detached type
250 1.61 1.65 1.73 1.78 1.84 1.88 1.93 1.97 2.01 2.04
Separate enclosure for wall-mounting 300 1.65 1.69 1.75 1.82 1.86 1.92 1.96 2 2.03 2.06
3 350 1.68 1.72 1.78 1.85 1.9 1.94 1.97 2.02 2.05 2.08
Central enclosure, detached type 400 1.71 1.75 1.81 1.87 1.92 1.96 2 2.04 2.07 2.1
450 1.74 1.77 1.83 1.88 1.94 1.97 2.02 2.05 2.08 2.12
1SDC008069F0001
First or last enclosure, wall-mounting type 500 1.76 1.79 1.85 1.9 1.95 1.99 2.04 2.06 2.1 2.13
4 550 1.77 1.82 1.88 1.93 1.97 2.01 2.05 2.08 2.11 2.14
Central enclosure for wall-mounting and with covered top surface 600 1.8 1.83 1.88 1.94 1.98 2.02 2.06 2.09 2.12 2.15
650 1.81 1.85 1.9 1.95 1.99 2.04 2.07 2.1 2.14 2.17
5 Central enclosure, wall-mounting type 700 1.83 1.87 1.92 1.96 2 2.05 2.08 2.12 2.15 2.18

Table 11: Enclosure constant k for enclosures without ventilation openings Total (3/4 poles) Table 13: MCCB power losses
and with an effective cooling surface Ae ≤ 1.25 m2 power loss in W
Releases In[A] T11P T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 S7 S8
Ae [m2] k Ae [m2] k F F F P F P F P/W F P/W F W F W F
0.08 3.973 0.65 0.848 1 4.5 5.1
0.09 3.643 0.7 0.803 1.6 6.3 7.5
0.1 3.371 0.75 0.764 2 7.5 8.7
0.15 2.5 0.8 0.728 2.5 7.8 9
0.2 2.022 0.85 0.696 3.2 8.7 10.2
0.25 1.716 0.9 0.668 4 7.8 9
5 8.7 10.5
0.3 1.5 0.95 0.641
6.3 10.5 12.3
0.35 1.339 1 0.618
8 8.1 9.6
0.4 1.213 1.05 0.596
10 9.3 10.8
0.45 1.113 1.1 0.576 12.5 3.3 3.9
0.5 1.029 1.15 0.557 16 1.5 4.5 4.2 4.8
0.55 0.960 1.2 0.540 TMF 20 1.8 5.4 5.1 6 10.8 10.8
0.6 0.9 1.25 0.524 TMD 25 2 6 6.9 8.4
TMA 32 2.1 6.3 8.1 9.6 11.1 11.1
MF 40 2.6 7.8 11.7 13.8
MA 50 3.7 11.1 12.9 15 11.7 12.3
63 4.3 12.9 15.3 18 12.9 15.3
Table 12: Temperature distribution factor c for enclosures without ventilation 80 4.8 14.4 18.3 21.6 14.4 17.4 13.8 15
openings and with an effective cooling surface Ae ≤ 1.25 m2 100 7 21 25.5 30 16.8 20.4 15.6 17.4
125 10.7 32.1 36 44.1 19.8 23.7 18.6 21.6
g c g c 160 15 45 51 60 23.7 28.5 22.2 27
0 1 1.5 1.231 200 39.6 47.4 29.7 37.2
0.1 1.02 1.6 1.237 250 53.4 64.2 41.1 52.8
0.2 1.04 1.7 1.24 320 40.8 62.7
0.3 1.06 1.8 1.244 400 58.5 93
0.4 1.078 1.9 1.246 500 86.4 110.1
0.5 1.097 2 1.249 630 92 117
0.6 1.118 2.1 1.251 800 93 119
0.7 1.137 2.2 1.253 10 1.5 1.8
0.8 1.156 2.3 1.254 25 3 3.6
0.9 1.174 2.4 1.255 63 10.5 12
100 24 27.2 5.1 6.9
1 1.188 2.5 1.256
160 51 60 13.2 18
1.1 1.2 2.6 1.257
PR211 250 32.1 43.8
1.2 1.21 2.7 1.258
PR212 320 52.8 72 31.8 53.7
1.3 1.22 2.8 1.259 PR221 400 49.5 84
1.4 1.226 PR222 630 123 160.8 90 115
PR223 800 96 125
where g is the ratio of the height and the width of the enclosure. 1000 150 102 140
1250 160 220
1600 260 360
2000 200
2500 315
3200 500
The values indicated in the table refer to balanced loads, with a current flow equal to the In, and are
valid for both circuit-breakers and switch-disconnectors, three-pole and four-pole versions.
For the latter, the current of the neutral is nil by definition.

Table 14: Emax power losses The power losses from each component of the above switchboard are evaluated
Total (3/4 poles) E1B-N E2B-N-S E2L E3N-S-H-V E3L E4S-H-V E6H-V hereunder. Ib 2
power loss in W
In=800
F
65
W
95
F
29
W
53
F W F
22
W
36
F W F W F W For the circuit-breakers, the power losses are calculated as P = Pn
with In and Pn given in the Tables 14 and 15.
In
, ( )
In=1000 96 147 45 83 38 58 The table below shows the values relevant to each circuit-breaker of the
In=1250 150 230 70 130 105 165 60 90 switchboard in question:
In=1600 253 378 115 215 170 265 85 150 In CB Ib Power losses
In=2000 180 330 130 225 215 330 Circuit-breakers [A] [A] [W]
In=2500 205 350 335 515 IG E2 1600 EL 1600 1340 80.7
In=3200 330 570 235 425 170 290 I1 T5 400 EL 400 330 33.7
In=4000 360 660 265 445 I2 T5 400 EL 400 330 33.7
In=5000 415 700 I3 T5 400 EL 400 330 33.7
In=6300 650 1100 I4 T3 250 TMD 250 175 26.2
I5 T3 250 TMD 250 175 26.2
Total power loss of circuit-breakers [W] 234
Example
For the busbars, the power losses are calculated as P = Pn ( InIb ) ⋅ (3 ⋅ Length),
with In and Pn given in the Table 2.
Hereunder an example of temperature rise evaluation for a switchboard with The table below shows the power losses of busbars:
the following characteristics:
- enclosure without ventilation openings Cross-section Length Ib Power losses
- no internal segregation Busbars nx[mm]x[mm] [m] [A] [W]
- separate enclosure for wall-mounting A 2x60x10 0.393 1340 47.2
- one main circuit-breaker B 80x10 0.332 1340 56
- 5 circuit-breakers for load supply C 80x10 0.300 1010 28.7
- busbars and cable systems D 80x10 0.300 680 13
E 80x10 0.300 350 3.5
F 80x10 0.300 175 0.9
Enclosure Circuit diagram Total power loss of busbars [W] 149
A
B
I1 For the bare conductors connecting the busbars to the circuit-breakers, the
Ib 2
C
IG
IG
power losses are calculated as P = Pn In ( ) ⋅ (3 ⋅ Length) , with In and Pn
I2 I1 I2 I3 I4 I5 given in the Table 2. Here below the values for each section:
Connection Cross-section Length Ib Power losses
D
bare conductors nx[mm]x[mm] [m] [A] [W]
I3 D Ig 2x60x10 0.450 1340 54
I1 30x10 0.150 330 3.8
E
I2 30x10 0.150 330 3.8
I4
H I3 30x10 0.150 330 3.8
F I4 20x10 0.150 175 1.6
Dimensions [mm] Number of horizontal
I5 I5 20x10 0.150 175 1.6
Height Width Depth partitions = 0
Total power loss of bare conductors [W] 68
Separate enclosure
2000 1440 840 for wall-mounting W

For the cables connecting the circuit-breakers to the supply and the loads, the From Table 7, k results 0.112 (value interpolated)
Ib 2
power losses are calculated as P = Pn ( )
In ⋅ (3 ⋅ Length) , with In and Pn
Since x = 0.804, the temperature rise at half the height of the enclosure is:
given in the Table 4.
∆t0.5 = d ⋅ k ⋅ Px =1 ⋅ 0.112 ⋅ 7840.804 = 23.8 k
Here below the power losses for each connection:
Cables Cross-section Length Ib Power losses For the evaluation of the temperature rise at the top of the enclosure, it is
[n]xmm2 [m] [A] [W] necessary to determine the c factor by using the f factor:
IG 4x240 1.0 1340 133.8 h1.35 21.35
I1 240 2.0 330 64.9 f= = = 2.107 (Ab is the base area of the switchboard)
Ab 1.44 ⋅ 0.84
I2 240 1.7 330 55.2
I3 240 1.4 330 45.4 From Table 8, column 3 (separate enclosure for wall-mounting), c results to be
I4 120 1.1 175 19 equal to1.255 (value interpolated).
I5 120 0.8 175 13.8
Total power loss of cables [W] 332
∆t1 = c ⋅ ∆t0.5 = 1.255 ⋅ 23.8 = 29.8 k
Considering 35°C ambient temperature, as prescribed by the Standard, the

Thus, the total power loss inside the enclosure is: P = 784 [W] following temperatures shall be reached inside the enclosure:
From the geometrical dimensions of the switchboard, the effective cooling t0.5 = 35 + 23.8 ≈ 59°C
surface Ae is determined below: t1 = 35 + 29.8 ≈ 65°C
Dimensions[m]x[m] A0[m2] b factor A0 Assuming that the temperature derating of the circuit-breakers inside the
Top 0.840x1.44 1.21 1.4 1.69 switchboard can be compared to the derating at an ambient temperature
Front 2x1.44 1.64 0.9 2.59 different from 40°C, through the tables of Chapter 3.5, it is possible to verify if
Rear 2x1.44 1.64 0.5 1.44 the selected circuit-breakers can carry the required currents:
Left-hand side 2x0.840 1.68 0.9 1.51
Right-hand side 2x0.840 1.68 0.9 1.51 E2 1600 at 65°C In=1538[A] > Ig = 1340 [A]
Ae=Σ(A0⋅b) 8.75 T5 400 at 65°C In=384 [A] > I1 = I2 = I3 = 330 [A]
T3 250 at 60° C In=216 [A] > I4 = I5 = 175 [A]
Making reference to the procedure described in the diagram at page 294, it is
possible to evaluate the temperature rise inside the switchboard.
Annex C: Application examples
Annex C: Application examples Annex C: Application examples

Advanced protection functions with PR123 release Advanced protection functions with PR123 release
Dual Setting The figure at the side Time current
shows the time-current curves
Thanks to the new PR123 release, it is possible to program two different sets 103s
of parameters and, through an external command, to switch from one set to curves of the installation
under normal service A
the other. 102s
This function is useful when there is an emergency source (generator) in the conditions.
system, only supplying voltage in the case of a power loss on the network side. The values set allow no
intersection of the 10s
Example: curves. D C
1s
In the system described below, in the case of a loss of the normal supply on
the network side, by means of ABB SACE ATS010 automatic transfer
switch, it is possible to switch the supply from the network to the emergency 10-1s
1SDC008080F0001
power unit and to disconnect the non-primary loads by opening the QS1
switch-disconnector. 10-2s
Under normal service conditions of the installation, the circuit-breakers C are
set in order to be selective with both circuit-breaker A, on the supply side, as 10-3s
well as with circuit-breakers D on the load side. 1kA 10kA 102kA 103kA
By switching from the network to the emergency power unit, circuit-breaker B The figure at the side Time current
becomes the reference circuit-breaker on the supply side of circuit-breakers C. shows the situation in curves
This circuit-breaker, being the protection of a generator, must be set to trip 103s
which, after switching, B
times shorter than A and therefore the setting values of the circuit-breakers on the power is supplied
the load side might not guarantee the selectivity with B. 102s
by the power unit
By means of the “dual setting” function of the PR123 release, it is possible to through circuit-breaker B.
switch circuit-breakers C from a parameter set which guarantees selectivity If the settings of circuit- 10s
C
with A, to another set which make them selective with B. breakers C are not D
However, these new settings could make the combination between circuit- modified, there will be no 1s
breakers C and the circuit-breakers on the load side non-selective. selectivity with the main
circuit-breaker B. 10-1s
1SDC008081F0001
U
10-2s
TM1
Un2=400V GS1 10-3s
G Un=400V 1kA 10kA 102kA 103kA
This last figure shows Time current
how it is possible to curves
A B 103s
switch to a set of B
parameters which
102s
QS1 guarantees selectivity of
E C C C circuit-breakers C with B
by means of the “dual 10s
non-priority loads
setting” function. D
1s
QS2 10-1s
1SDC008049F0201
1SDC008082F0001
C
D D D 10-2s
10-3s
1kA 10kA 102kA 103kA

Double G With the same configuration, a fault on the supply side of the circuit-breaker
The Emax type circuit-breakers, equipped with the PR123 electronic release, (Figure 2) does not cause intervention of function G since the fault current does
allow two independent curves for protection G: not affect either the CT of the phase or that of the neutral.
-one for the internal protection (function G without external toroid); Figure 2
-one for the external protection (function G with external toroid) Trasformer
secondary winding
L1
A typical application of function double G consists in simultaneous protection
Emax
both against earth fault of the secondary of the transformer and of its connection internal CTs
cables to the circuit-breaker terminals (restricted earth fault protection), as well
as against earth faults on the load side of the circuit-breaker (outside the
restricted earth fault protection). L2
L3
1SDC008051F0201
N
PE
Example:
Figure 1 shows a fault on the load side of an Emax circuit-breaker: the fault
current flows through one phase only and, if the vectorial sum of the currents The use of function “double G” allows installation of an external toroid, as shown
detected by the four current transformers (CTs) results to be higher than the set in Figure 3, so that earth faults on the supply side of Emax CB can be detected
threshold, the electronic release activates function G (and the circuit-breaker as well. In this case, the alarm contact of the second G is exploited in order to
trips). trip the circuit-breaker installed on the primary and to ensure fault disconnection.
Figure 3
Figure 1
Trasformer
Trasformer secondary winding
secondary winding
L1
L1
Emax
Emax internal CTs
internal CTs
L2
L2
L3
L3 External
toroid
1SDC008052F0201
1SDC008050F0201
N
N
PE
PE

If, with the same configuration as Figure 3, the fault occurs on the load side of Double S
the Emax circuit-breaker, the fault current would affect both the toroid as well Thanks to the new PR123 release, which allows two thresholds of protection
as the current transformers on the phases. To define which circuit-breaker is to function S to be set independently and be activated simultaneously, selectivity
trip (MV or LV circuit-breaker), suitable coordination of the trip times is required: can also be achieved under highly critical conditions.
in particular, it is necessary to set the times so that LV circuit-breaker Here is an example of how, by using the new release, it is possible to obtain a
opening due to internal function G is faster than realization of the alarm signal better selectivity level compared with the use of a release without “double S”.
coming from the external toroid. Therefore, thanks to the time-current This is the wiring diagram of the system under examination; in particular, attention
discrimination between the two G protection functions, before the MV circuit- must be focussed on:
breaker on the primary of the transformer receives the trip command, the circuit-
breaker on the LV side is able to eliminate the earth fault. - the presence, on the supply side, of a MV circuit-breaker, which, for selectivity
Obviously, if the fault occurred on the supply side of the LV circuit-breaker, only reasons, imposes low setting values for the Emax circuit-breaker on the LV
the circuit-breaker on the MV side would trip. side
- the presence of a LV/LV transformer which, due to the inrush currents, imposes
high setting values for the circuit-breakers on its primary side
The table shows the main characteristics of the range of toroids (available only
in the closed version).
U Uref = 20000 V
Characteristics of the toroid ranges
MV CB
Rated current 100 A, 250 A, 400 A, 800 A
Outer dimensions of the tooid Un1 = 20000 V
Un2 = 400 V
W = 165 mm Sn = 800 kVA
H MV/LV Transformer
D = 160 mm
1SDC008053F0201
WC1
W D H = 112 mm
Internal diameter of the toroid Ø = 112 mm

E2 1250
Ik = 22.6 kA
T5 630 PR222
Un1 = 400 V
Un2 = 230 V
Sn = 315 kVA
MV/LV Transformer
1SDC008054F0201

Solution with a release without “double S” Solution with the PR123 release with “double S”
Time current 104s Time current 104s
T5 630 E 1250 curves T5 630 E2 1250
curves PR521 Ik PR521 Ik
@ 400V 103s @ 400V 103s
102s 102s
10s 10s
1s LV/LV Trans. 315kVA 1s LV/LV Trans. 315kVA
1SDC008083F0001
1SDC008084F0001
10-1s 10-1s
10-2s 10-2s
10-1kA 1kA 10kA 10-1kA 1kA 10kA
MV CB (PR521) MV CB (PR521)
50 (I>): 50A t=0.5s 50 (I>): 50A t=0.5s
51 (I>>): 500A t=0s 51 (I>>): 500A t=0s
E2N 1250 PR122 T5V 630 PR222DS/P E2N 1250 PR123 T5V 630 PR222DS/P
LSIG R1250 LSIG R630 LSIG R1250 LSIG R630
L Setting 0.8 0.74 L Setting 0.8 0.74
Curve 108s 12s Curve 108s 12s
S t=constant Setting 3.5 4.2 S t=constant Setting 3.5 4.2
Curve 0.5s 0.25s Curve 0.5s 0.25s
I Setting OFF 7 S2 t=constant Setting 5 -
Curve 0.05s -
In the case of a short-circuit, the Emax E2 circuit-breaker and the MV circuit-
breaker will open simultaneously with this solution. Attention must be paid to I Setting OFF 7
the fact that, owing to the value Ik, function I of the E2 circuit-breaker has to be
disabled (I3=OFF) so that selectivity with the T5 on the load side is guaranteed.
As evident, by means of the “double S” function, selectivity can be achieved

both with the T5 circuit-breaker on the load side as well as with the MV circuit-
breaker on the supply side.
A further advantage obtained by using the “double S” function is the reduction
in the time of permanence of high current values under short-circuit conditions,
which results in lower thermal and dynamic stresses on the busbars and on the
other installation components.
Volume 1 Protection and
nd
3 edition control devices
1SDC008001D0203

06/05
1SDC008001D0203
Printed in Italy
Due to possible developments of standards as well as of

materials, the characteristics and dimensions specified in
this document may only be considered binding after
confirmation by ABB SACE.
ABB SACE S.p.A.

An ABB Group Company
L.V. Breakers
Via Baioni, 35
24123 Bergamo - Italy ABB SACE
Tel.: +39 035.395.111 - Telefax: +39 035.395.306-433
http://www.abb.com

ABB - Electrical Installation Handbook - I

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

ABB - Electrical Installation Handbook - I

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

ABB - Electrical Installation Handbook - I

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Electrical installation handbook

Volume 1 Protection and

Protection and control devices

Due to possible developments of standards as well as of

ABB SACE S.p.A.

Protection and control devices

ABB SACE - Protection and control devices 1

Electrical installation handbook users

IEC International Electrotechnical Commission

Marks of conformity to the relevant national and

Slovakia Electrotechnical Research and FRANCE NF Mark Household appliances

IRELAND CO N F IIRS Mark Electrical equipment SPAIN AEE Electrical products.

UNITED Compliance with the “British

Safety Mark Swiss low voltage material subject B R IT I S

UNITED BASEC Cables CENELEC Mark Cables

1.2 IEC Standards for electrical

2 Protection and control devices 2 Protection and control devices

2.1 Circuit-breaker nameplates

Moulded-case circuit-breaker: Tmax Moulded-case circuit-breaker: Isomax

2 Protection and control devices 2 Protection and control devices

2.2 Main definitions

CIRCUIT-BREAKER TYPE Main characteristics

into Category A, i.e. service short- directives: switchgear and

2 Protection and control devices 2 Protection and control devices

2 Protection and control devices 2 Protection and control devices

2 Protection and control devices 2 Protection and control devices

2.3.2 ELECTRONIC RELEASES

2 Protection and control devices 2 Protection and control devices

2 Protection and control devices 2 Protection and control devices

2 Protection and control devices 2 Protection and control devices

3 General characteristics 3 General characteristics

3.1 Electrical characteristics of circuit-breakers

3 General characteristics 3 General characteristics

3 General characteristics 3 General characteristics

3 General characteristics 3 General characteristics

3 General characteristics 3 General characteristics

SACE Emax air circuit-breakers E1 B-N E2 B-N-S E2 L E3 N-S-H-V E3 L E4 S-H-V E6 H-V

3 General characteristics 3 General characteristics

3 General characteristics 3 General characteristics

3 General characteristics 3 General characteristics

3 General characteristics 3 General characteristics

102 Overload limit

3 General characteristics 3 General characteristics

3 General characteristics 3 General characteristics

102 Overload limit 102

3 General characteristics 3 General characteristics

3 General characteristics 3 General characteristics

10-1 1 1,05 101 102

3 General characteristics 3 General characteristics

102 T1 160 - In 160 Time-Current curves

3 General characteristics 3 General characteristics

PR223 1.1÷1.3 x I1 ± 10 % PR223

3 General characteristics 3 General characteristics

Here below the tolerances:

3 General characteristics 3 General characteristics

3 General characteristics 3 General characteristics

L-I Functions PR221DS

3 General characteristics 3 General characteristics

3 General characteristics 3 General characteristics

3 General characteristics 3 General characteristics